ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ ÜÜÜÜ ÜÜÜÜÜÜ ÜÜÜÜÜÜ ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ ° ßÜ ° ßÜ ° Û ° ßÜ ° ßÜ° Û ßßßÛ ÛßßßßßßÛßßßßßßßÜ ²ßßßÛßÛ ÛßÜ Û ßßßÛ ßßßÛßÜ Û ßßßÛßÛ Û Û ÛßßßßßÛßßß ° Û ° ² °ßßßßß Üß° Û ° Û ° Û ° Û ° Û ° Û ° ÛÜ° Û ° Û° ² ° Û ° Ûßß ° Üß ° Û ° Û ° Û ± Û ± Û ± Û ± Û Û ° Û± Ûßß ± Û ± ßÜÜÜ ± ÜÜ ßÜ ± Û ± Û ± Û ± Û ± Û ± Û ± Ûß± Û ± Û± ßÜÜÜÜÜ ² Û ² ² ² ² Û ² ² Û ² Û ² Û ² Û ² Û ² Û ² Û ² Û ² Û² ² ßßßß ßßßßßßß ßßßß ßßß ßßßß ßßßß ßßßß ßßßß ßßßß ßßßß ßßßß ßßßß ßßßßßßßßßßßßß T E R M I N A T E ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ Version 5.00 The Final Terminal Copyright 1992,97 by Strathrory System Limited Worldwide distributor SerWiz Comm All Rights Reserved TABLE OF CONTENTS Introduction to the Final Terminal .................................. 1 What is a terminal program? ......................................... 1 Online help ......................................................... 1 TERMINAT ? will give you a list of all available parameters ......... 1 Editing input fields ................................................ 1 Mouse ............................................................... 2 SHIFT-ESC Runtime information ....................................... 2 Alt-A SmartNote ..................................................... 3 SmartNote commands ................................................. 3 SmartNote cursor-movement commands ................................. 4 Alt-B (Shift-CursorUp) Scrollback buffer ............................ 4 Alt-C Clear Screen .................................................. 4 Alt-D Dialing directory ............................................. 4 Alt-E Local echo .................................................... 4 Alt-F The File Manager .............................................. 5 Alt-G Scripts ....................................................... 5 Alt-H Hangup ........................................................ 5 Alt-I Screen image .................................................. 5 Alt-J DOS-Shell ..................................................... 5 Alt-K String grabber ................................................ 5 Alt-L Capture file .................................................. 5 Alt-M Miscellaneous functions ....................................... 6 Greenwich Mean Time ................................................ 7 Timezones complete list ........................................... 7 Privacy Insurance .................................................. 8 Prevent annoying phonecalls ....................................... 8 Prevent burglary .................................................. 8 Alt-N Send username ................................................. 8 Alt-O Configuration ................................................. 8 Alt-P Adjust comm. parameters ....................................... 8 Alt-Q Quit autologin ................................................ 8 Alt-R Select download path .......................................... 8 Alt-S Send password ................................................. 8 Alt-T Terminal emulation ............................................ 9 Alt-U System information ............................................ 9 Alt-V VISIBLE FAST (tm) access menu ................................. 9 Alt-W Translation editor ............................................ 10 Alt-Y Chat mode ..................................................... 11 Alt-X Exit Terminate ................................................ 11 Alt-Z Quick reference menu .......................................... 11 Alt-= Load a keyboard table ......................................... 11 Ctrl-End Break ...................................................... 11 ScrollLock Doorway mode ............................................. 11 PageDown Download ................................................... 12 PageUp Upload ....................................................... 12 RETURN on the selected file then the transfer will start. If you ... 12 Alt-1 Sound ......................................................... 12 Alt-2 ANSI music .................................................... 12 Alt-3 Statusline .................................................... 12 Alt-4 Usagelog ...................................................... 12 Alt-5 Add linefeed .................................................. 12 Alt-6 IEMSI ......................................................... 12 Alt-7 Ctrl-Status ................................................... 12 Alt-8 Alt-Status .................................................... 13 Alt-9 Ctrl-Shift-Status ............................................. 13 Alt-0 Auto capture .................................................. 13 Alt-F1 Status left .................................................. 13 Alt-F2 Status right ................................................. 13 Alt-F3 Pause function ............................................... 13 Alt-F4 IEMSI information ............................................ 14 Alt-F5 File tagger .................................................. 14 Alt-F6 Tagmenu ...................................................... 14 Alt-F7 Point system ................................................. 14 Alt-F8 Hostmode ..................................................... 14 Alt-F9 History strings .............................................. 14 Alt-F10 CD Audio player ............................................. 15 Alt-F11 External editor ............................................. 15 Alt-F12 Fax manager. ................................................ 15 NETWORK ............................................................. 15 Terminate Thesaurus ................................................. 15 Configurating Terminate ................................................ 16 Command line switches ............................................... 18 /Config ............................................................ 18 /F ................................................................. 18 /Host .............................................................. 18 /Point ............................................................. 18 /C:filename.ext .................................................... 18 /NoCard ............................................................ 18 /Skip .............................................................. 18 /Disk .............................................................. 18 /Buf:xxx ........................................................... 18 /NoXMS ............................................................. 19 /Dial:xxx .......................................................... 19 /Boss[:x] .......................................................... 19 /Call:node/name .................................................... 19 /Fix ............................................................... 19 /ScrLen:xxx /ScrCol:xxx ............................................ 19 /Device:x .......................................................... 19 /Port:x ............................................................ 19 /Baud:x ............................................................ 19 /Init:"string" ..................................................... 19 /Task:x ............................................................ 19 /Mode:x ............................................................ 20 /Upg ............................................................... 20 /NoImport .......................................................... 20 /Script ............................................................ 20 Errorlevels ......................................................... 20 Fatal errors 255 ............................................. 20 Overlay errors 254 ............................................. 20 Password error 253 ............................................. 20 Lock error 252 ............................................. 20 Out of diskspace 251 ............................................. 20 Inactivity 250 ............................................. 20 Semaphore exit 249 ............................................. 21 Hostmode shutdown 248 ............................................. 21 No errors 0 ............................................. 21 Screen and Colors ...................................................... 22 Colors .............................................................. 22 Palette ............................................................ 22 Auto palette ........................................................ 22 Windows sound ....................................................... 22 Exploding windows ................................................... 22 Direct writes ....................................................... 23 Snow checking ....................................................... 23 Screen blanker ...................................................... 23 Show snakes ......................................................... 23 VGA Fadeout ......................................................... 23 Use SND files ....................................................... 23 Screen size ......................................................... 24 ÃÄStart mode ....................................................... 24 ÃÄOther mode ....................................................... 24 ÃÄExit mode ....................................................... 24 ÀÄ132x25 mode ....................................................... 24 Big phonebook ....................................................... 24 Force CP-850 ........................................................ 24 Find textmodes ...................................................... 24 Use intensity ....................................................... 24 Only low ASCII ...................................................... 24 Communications ......................................................... 25 Maximum baud rates .................................................. 25 When to use a fast 16550A serialchip with FIFO buffer ............... 25 Device setup ........................................................ 26 Serial interface .................................................... 26 UART/Serial Direct serial chips ............................ 26 Interrupt 14h Via BIOS int 14h max 9600 baud ................. 26 Fossil Resident serial devices, like X00/BNU .......... 26 Digiboard Very fast intelligent multiport adapter. ....... 26 Comport ............................................................. 26 Device name ......................................................... 26 Baudrate ............................................................ 26 Lock port ........................................................... 26 Databits / Stopbits / Parity ........................................ 26 Databits ............................................................ 26 Stopbits ............................................................ 27 Parity .............................................................. 27 None No parity is added, default .................................. 27 Even A parity bit is added such that the bit sum is always even ... 27 Odd A parity bit is added such that the bit sum is always odd .... 27 Mark A parity bit of value one is always added .................... 27 Space A parity bit of value zero is always added ................... 27 Phonebook ........................................................... 27 Costfile ............................................................ 27 Receive buffer size Transmit buffer size ........................... 27 Software flow control (Xon/Xoff) .................................... 27 Hardware flow control (CTS/RTS) ..................................... 28 Hardware flow control (DSR/DTR) ..................................... 28 Use 16550 fifo if available ......................................... 28 Keep 16550 fifo on in shell ......................................... 28 RTS low while writing ............................................... 28 Auto RTS low trigger ................................................ 28 Carrier detect mask ................................................. 28 Init string ......................................................... 28 Restore port on close ............................................... 28 Close port in shell ................................................. 29 Configure comports .................................................. 29 Check IRQ ........................................................... 30 Set default values .................................................. 30 Auto installation ................................................... 30 Using Terminate on ISDN lines ....................................... 31 Using the internal CAPI 1.1 support ................................ 31 Terminate CAPI 1.1 Hayes Command Interpreter ....................... 31 To make a call with Teles-bundling (15000 CPS) ..................... 31 ISDN AT-commands supported ......................................... 32 CAPI-error codes (/CAUSE=) ......................................... 33 Using cFos ISDN fossil driver with Terminate ....................... 35 General options ........................................................ 37 General options 1 ................................................... 37 Swap method ......................................................... 37 Swap when shelling .................................................. 37 Warning days ........................................................ 37 ScrollBack buffer kb ................................................ 37 Time format ......................................................... 38 Country code ........................................................ 38 Pause time / char ................................................... 38 Minimum diskspace ................................................... 38 Tag char ............................................................ 38 Edit background ..................................................... 38 Online warn minutes ................................................. 38 Information time .................................................... 38 Max log size kb ..................................................... 38 Inactivity seconds .................................................. 38 Audio control ....................................................... 38 Auto password ....................................................... 39 Separators .......................................................... 39 Thousand : . , ........................................ 39 Decimal : , . ........................................ 39 Date : - / ........................................ 39 Time : . : ........................................ 39 Filefinder drives / Scan drives ..................................... 39 Release buffer ...................................................... 39 Menu background ..................................................... 39 OS/2 timeslices ..................................................... 39 General options 2 ................................................... 40 External support .................................................... 40 !P ................................................................. 40 !C ................................................................. 40 !0 ................................................................. 40 !E ................................................................. 40 !M ................................................................. 41 !W ................................................................. 41 !B ................................................................. 41 !L ................................................................. 41 !F ................................................................. 41 !CD ................................................................ 41 !25,!30,!43,!50 .................................................... 41 !@ ................................................................. 41 !Q ................................................................. 41 @SCRIPT ............................................................ 41 Save configuration .................................................. 42 Toggles ................................................................ 43 Blind support ....................................................... 43 Deaf Support ........................................................ 43 Blind transfer ...................................................... 43 Sound ............................................................... 43 Connect alarm ....................................................... 43 Transfer then beep .................................................. 43 Key click ........................................................... 43 Show ScrollText ..................................................... 44 Opening screen ...................................................... 44 Closing screen ...................................................... 44 Ask start device .................................................... 44 Start in phone ...................................................... 44 Start in top ........................................................ 44 Ask phone ........................................................... 44 Phonebook after ..................................................... 44 Jump back to phone .................................................. 44 Dialer auto untag ................................................... 44 Quick dialing bar ................................................... 44 Return aborts ....................................................... 44 Show big CONNECT .................................................... 45 Numlock carrier ..................................................... 45 Private dialing ..................................................... 45 Auto save config .................................................... 45 Auto save history ................................................... 45 Auto update baud .................................................... 45 Backup cfg/phone .................................................... 45 Second backup ....................................................... 45 Save before dial .................................................... 45 Save scrollback ..................................................... 45 Save tagfile ........................................................ 46 Open logfile ........................................................ 46 Auto-open capture ................................................... 46 Overwrite capture ................................................... 46 Append capture ...................................................... 46 Ctrl in capture ..................................................... 46 Capture keystroke ................................................... 46 Special Capture ..................................................... 46 Hide passwords ...................................................... 46 Password checking ................................................... 46 Crypt cfg/fon ....................................................... 47 Ask at Alt-X ........................................................ 47 Ask at Alt-H ........................................................ 47 Show when Ctrl ...................................................... 47 Show when Alt ....................................................... 47 Show when Ctrl+Sh ................................................... 47 Baud in status ...................................................... 47 Mouse ............................................................... 47 Enhanced keyboard ................................................... 47 Flush Cache ......................................................... 47 Import descript. .................................................... 47 RegInfo bright ...................................................... 47 Select sort ......................................................... 48 Shell information ................................................... 48 Tag advance ......................................................... 48 Transfer info ....................................................... 48 Transfer slice ...................................................... 48 Wrap word in chat ................................................... 48 EMSI debug info ..................................................... 48 Alt-K infoscreen .................................................... 48 Reset toggles ....................................................... 48 Modem and dialing ...................................................... 49 Install modem ....................................................... 50 Including your own modem in Terminate's database .................... 50 Init strings ........................................................ 51 Send all ........................................................... 51 Dial prefix/suffix .................................................. 52 International code ................................................. 52 Exit string ......................................................... 52 Connect string ...................................................... 52 No connect strings .................................................. 53 Hang-up ............................................................. 53 Ring/Ok string ...................................................... 54 Dial time ........................................................... 54 Dial cancel string .................................................. 54 Redial timers ....................................................... 54 Auto-answer string .................................................. 54 Auto answer ......................................................... 54 Baud change ......................................................... 54 Modem string delay .................................................. 54 Force initstring .................................................... 54 RS-232C INTERFACE ................................................... 56 HAYES ............................................................... 57 Filenames and paths .................................................... 60 Download manager .................................................... 61 Upload directory .................................................... 61 Script directory .................................................... 62 Translation file .................................................... 62 Phonebook directory ................................................. 62 Capture directory ................................................... 62 Capture file ........................................................ 62 Log file ............................................................ 62 Editor filename ..................................................... 62 Line command ........................................................ 62 Viewer filename ..................................................... 62 The internal lister ................................................ 63 Protocol directory .................................................. 63 Shell directory ..................................................... 63 Swap file ........................................................... 63 Utility directory ................................................... 63 Manual directory .................................................... 63 Run after download Run after upload ................................ 63 Qwk reply files ..................................................... 64 Semaphore directory ................................................. 64 Exit file ........................................................... 64 Filelist manager .................................................... 64 Protocols .............................................................. 65 Default ............................................................. 65 Allow auto .......................................................... 65 Internal protocols .................................................. 65 Enable protocols ................................................... 65 CPS adjust ......................................................... 66 Hangup after time .................................................. 66 Hangup default ..................................................... 66 Zmodem/ZedZap: ..................................................... 66 Allow CRC-32 ...................................................... 66 Allow recovery .................................................... 66 Check file date ................................................... 66 Touch file ........................................................ 67 Increase filename ................................................. 67 Always overwrite .................................................. 67 Zmodem signature .................................................. 67 Auto upload ....................................................... 67 ASCII send/receive ................................................. 67 Strip high bit .................................................... 67 Remote abort char ................................................. 67 Local echo ........................................................ 68 Blank line -=> 1 Space ............................................ 68 Line pacing ....................................................... 68 Character pacing .................................................. 68 CR translation LF translation .................................... 68 External protocols .................................................. 68 Protocol name ...................................................... 69 Information ........................................................ 69 [Path]+Filename .................................................... 69 Ask at downloads ................................................... 69 Change to UL dir ................................................... 69 Change to DL dir ................................................... 70 Batch .............................................................. 70 Hotkey ............................................................. 70 Upload parameters / Download param. ................................ 70 Auto-download ...................................................... 71 Signature Signature hex ........................................... 71 Transfering files ................................................... 71 Total / Costs ...................................................... 71 Disk space ......................................................... 72 Progress ........................................................... 72 Path ............................................................... 72 Hangup ............................................................. 72 Skip rest of file .................................................. 72 Music while transfering ............................................ 72 RTS low while writing .............................................. 72 ISDN channel bundling .............................................. 73 Batch upload PgUp,Alt-B ............................................. 73 Emulations ............................................................. 74 What is an emulation ................................................ 74 Emulations available in Terminate ................................... 74 ANSI ............................................................... 74 Avatar ............................................................. 74 VT-52 .............................................................. 74 VT-100 ............................................................. 74 National character sets ........................................... 75 British .......................................................... 75 Dutch ............................................................ 75 Finnish .......................................................... 75 French ........................................................... 75 Canadian ......................................................... 75 German ........................................................... 75 Italian .......................................................... 75 Danish ........................................................... 75 Spanish .......................................................... 75 Swedish .......................................................... 75 Swiss ............................................................ 75 VT-220 ............................................................. 75 Debug emulations ................................................... 75 Default terminal .................................................... 76 Setup terminal ...................................................... 77 Settings for emulations ............................................ 78 Emulation ......................................................... 78 Comment ........................................................... 78 Keyboard file ..................................................... 78 Statusline ........................................................ 78 Default color ..................................................... 78 Numlock ........................................................... 78 Scroll screen ..................................................... 79 Local echo ........................................................ 79 Add linefeed ...................................................... 79 Strip high ........................................................ 79 Erase backspace ................................................... 79 Ignore null ....................................................... 79 ANSI music ........................................................ 79 Center screen ..................................................... 79 Auto ANSI ......................................................... 79 Special VT-100 and VT-220 settings ................................. 80 Code page ......................................................... 80 Relaxed mode ...................................................... 80 Wrap line ......................................................... 80 Terminal ID ....................................................... 80 Special VT-220 settings ............................................ 81 Keyboard ID ....................................................... 81 VT print file ..................................................... 81 Lock keyboard ..................................................... 81 Edit keyboard ....................................................... 82 @DIAL 5 6 7 8 9 10 ................................................. 82 @PRINTSCR .......................................................... 83 @PRINT ............................................................. 83 Doorway setup ....................................................... 83 Auto Doorway ....................................................... 83 Remote printing .................................................... 83 Print file ......................................................... 84 Reset all terminals ................................................. 84 Host mode .............................................................. 85 The host mode / The Terminate BBS ................................... 85 Device setup ........................................................ 85 Device 1 & Device 2 ................................................ 85 Init string ........................................................ 85 Ring string ........................................................ 86 Ring count ......................................................... 86 Answer string ...................................................... 86 Answer timeout ..................................................... 86 Use device 2 ....................................................... 86 Ring wait .......................................................... 86 Host path ........................................................... 86 Send path ........................................................... 86 Receive path ........................................................ 86 Mailer setup ........................................................ 86 Mailer enabled ..................................................... 87 Request file ....................................................... 87 Password file ...................................................... 87 Secure inbound ..................................................... 87 Event file ......................................................... 87 After Receive ...................................................... 87 Fax settings ........................................................ 87 Fax receive ........................................................ 87 Fax init ........................................................... 88 Fax answer ......................................................... 88 Fax internal ....................................................... 88 Fax command ........................................................ 88 Fax init 2 ......................................................... 88 Fax 19200 .......................................................... 88 Enable IEMSI ........................................................ 88 Callback wait ....................................................... 88 Allow sound ......................................................... 89 Shut down pwd ....................................................... 89 New user ............................................................ 89 New users .......................................................... 89 Security ........................................................... 89 Time per day ....................................................... 89 Expire days ........................................................ 89 Skip questions ..................................................... 89 Public control ...................................................... 89 Expire .............................................................. 90 Nothing ............................................................ 90 Change to normal security .......................................... 90 Change to new user defaults ........................................ 90 Delete ............................................................. 90 User external ....................................................... 90 News file .......................................................... 90 Public menu ........................................................ 90 Main menu .......................................................... 91 Door files ......................................................... 91 Host-protocols ...................................................... 91 After user .......................................................... 91 Using the host mode ................................................. 91 WELCOME.ANS/ASC .................................................... 92 NEWUSER.ANS/ASC .................................................... 92 EXPIRE.ANS/ASC ..................................................... 92 NEWS.DOC ........................................................... 92 NEWS.TXT, NEWS.ANS/ASC ............................................. 92 NORMAL.ANS/ASC ..................................................... 92 SUPERVIS.ANS/ASC ................................................... 92 BULLETIN.ANS/ASC ................................................... 92 BULLE???.TXT ....................................................... 92 GOODBYE.ANS/ASC .................................................... 92 T-FILES.BBS ........................................................ 92 T-USERS.BBS ........................................................ 92 T-HOLD.BBS ......................................................... 92 T-LAST.BBS ......................................................... 92 Esc Exit ............................................................ 94 L Login locally ..................................................... 94 U User database manager ............................................. 95 Name ............................................................... 95 Password ........................................................... 95 Security ........................................................... 95 Supervisor ........................................................ 95 Co-Sysop .......................................................... 95 Privileged ........................................................ 95 Normal ............................................................ 96 Organisation ....................................................... 96 Address ............................................................ 96 Comment ............................................................ 96 Data phone ......................................................... 96 Voice phone ........................................................ 96 Expire date ........................................................ 96 First call ......................................................... 96 Last call .......................................................... 96 Time per day ....................................................... 96 Time used today .................................................... 96 Guest .............................................................. 96 Callback ........................................................... 97 Callback .......................................................... 97 Dial prefix ....................................................... 97 Dial suffix ....................................................... 97 Phone number ...................................................... 97 Private path ....................................................... 97 X Export user database ............................................. 97 E Events ............................................................ 97 Use events ......................................................... 97 Enabled ............................................................ 98 Name ............................................................... 98 Days ............................................................... 98 Begin .............................................................. 98 Type ............................................................... 98 Run program ...................................................... 98 Call system ...................................................... 98 Errorlevel ....................................................... 98 System ........................................................... 98 Parameters ......................................................... 99 Allow host-users ................................................... 99 Answer calls ....................................................... 99 Allow filerequest .................................................. 99 Call device ........................................................ 99 Send files on hold ................................................. 99 Send netmail only .................................................. 99 Call nonCM Systems ................................................. 99 Pickup Mail ........................................................ 99 Send requests ...................................................... 99 F Files ............................................................. 99 Put files on hold for user in database ............................. 100 Put files on hold for new user ..................................... 100 Edit hold file ..................................................... 100 Delete hold file ................................................... 100 Edit fileareas ..................................................... 100 Edit public control file ........................................... 100 Edit news file ..................................................... 100 Edit language file ................................................. 100 Edit hotkeys ....................................................... 100 M Edit messages ..................................................... 100 P Lock keyboard ..................................................... 100 H Host configuration ................................................ 100 O Configuration ..................................................... 100 J Shell to DOS ...................................................... 100 Alt-H Hangup ........................................................ 101 Alt-Y Yell .......................................................... 101 Alt-J DOS ........................................................... 101 (B)ulletin .......................................................... 101 (C)hat .............................................................. 101 (D)ownload .......................................................... 101 (E)rase ............................................................. 101 (F)iles ............................................................. 101 (G)oodbye ........................................................... 101 (H)D-free ........................................................... 101 (I)nfo-HD ........................................................... 102 (L)ocate ............................................................ 102 (M)essage ........................................................... 102 (N)ew dir ........................................................... 102 (R)ead .............................................................. 102 (S)hutdown .......................................................... 102 (T)ype .............................................................. 102 (U)pload ............................................................ 102 (0),(1),(2),(3),(4),(5),(6) ......................................... 102 Auto login ............................................................. 103 Script delay ........................................................ 103 Login timeout ....................................................... 103 Login strings ....................................................... 103 Mini Scripts ........................................................ 104 Users / IEMSI setup .................................................... 105 Edit user profiles .................................................. 106 Username ............................................................ 106 Password ............................................................ 106 Program Pwd ......................................................... 106 Comment ............................................................. 106 User IEMSI settings ................................................. 106 IEMSI ............................................................... 107 Info time ........................................................... 107 Location ............................................................ 107 Phone # ............................................................. 107 Prg. Pwd (Program password) ......................................... 107 Birthday ............................................................ 107 Security ............................................................ 107 Configuration ...................................................... 108 Phonebook .......................................................... 108 Point system ....................................................... 108 File manager ....................................................... 108 Screen blanker ..................................................... 108 Comm Parameters .................................................... 108 Security menu ...................................................... 108 Fax manager ........................................................ 108 Encrypt logfile .................................................... 109 Secondary logfile ................................................. 109 Password .......................................................... 109 Decrypt/View logfile .............................................. 109 Prevent shells ..................................................... 109 Host password ...................................................... 109 Network lock ....................................................... 109 Lock .............................................................. 109 EXE ............................................................... 109 KEY ............................................................... 110 CFG ............................................................... 110 The Pointsystem ........................................................ 111 Poll ................................................................ 112 Request ............................................................. 112 Netmail ............................................................. 113 Echomail ............................................................ 113 Hold ................................................................ 113 Snailmail ........................................................... 113 Alt-O,N ............................................................. 114 System name ......................................................... 114 Main address ........................................................ 114 Boss setup .......................................................... 115 Dial ............................................................... 115 Boss comment ....................................................... 115 Boss phone ......................................................... 115 Boss device ........................................................ 115 Boss prefix ........................................................ 116 Boss password ...................................................... 116 Boss synch ......................................................... 116 Boss autodial ...................................................... 116 Boss baudrate ...................................................... 116 Nodelists ........................................................... 116 Phone convert ....................................................... 117 Device control ...................................................... 117 Redial tries ........................................................ 118 Handshake ........................................................... 118 Allow ZedZap ........................................................ 118 Ask device .......................................................... 118 Pick up mail ........................................................ 118 Zone match .......................................................... 118 Send AKA's .......................................................... 118 Descriptions ........................................................ 118 Call own addr. ...................................................... 118 Files & paths ....................................................... 119 Inbound ............................................................ 119 Outbound ........................................................... 119 Password file ...................................................... 119 Mail editor ........................................................ 119 Import ............................................................. 119 Export ............................................................. 119 After mail ......................................................... 119 Alt-F7 Using the point system ....................................... 120 The outbound window ................................................. 120 BBSnext ............................................................. 121 Call Boss ........................................................... 121 Call system ......................................................... 121 TERMINAT /CALL:search-string, the search-string can be a ........... 121 Call all ............................................................ 121 Send files .......................................................... 122 File requests ....................................................... 122 Kill mail (DELete) .................................................. 122 Auto request { Only in registered version } ......................... 122 Zoom mail ........................................................... 123 Main address ........................................................ 123 Send message ........................................................ 123 Change mail ......................................................... 123 Mail editor ......................................................... 123 Import .............................................................. 123 Export .............................................................. 123 Configuration ....................................................... 123 V View logfile ...................................................... 124 Manual { Only in registered version } ............................... 124 Cost management ........................................................ 125 Calculate costs ..................................................... 125 Cost file 1 Cost file 2 Cost file 3 ............................... 125 Currency string ..................................................... 125 Decimalpoint ........................................................ 126 Cost editor ......................................................... 126 INSert entry ....................................................... 126 A Add entry ........................................................ 126 C Comment .......................................................... 126 K Keyword .......................................................... 126 ENTER Edit a costline .............................................. 126 Phone # ........................................................... 127 Days:MTWTFSS ...................................................... 127 D Edit days/date field ............................................ 127 Hours ............................................................. 127 Costs in units/minute / Add Y units every X second ................ 127 External editor ..................................................... 127 Show at connect ..................................................... 127 Show costs after .................................................... 127 Show in pointsystem ................................................. 127 Show when faxing .................................................... 127 Max costs per day ................................................... 128 2. currency string .................................................. 128 2. currency calc. ................................................... 128 2. calculator ....................................................... 128 Keyword defaults .................................................... 128 Start costs @START ........................................... 128 Connect costs @CONNECT ......................................... 129 Minimum charge @MINIMUM ......................................... 129 Maximum @MAXIMUM ......................................... 129 Connect seconds @CONNECTSEC ...................................... 129 Charge second @CHARGESECOND .................................... 129 Start at once @STARTATONCE ..................................... 129 Pay by period @PAYBYPERIOD ..................................... 129 Discount rate @DISCOUNT ........................................ 130 The Phonebook .......................................................... 131 Insert .............................................................. 131 Delete .............................................................. 131 A Add new entry ..................................................... 131 D (RETURN) Dial number(s) ........................................... 131 Add 15 seconds ..................................................... 132 Untag entry ........................................................ 132 Edit entry ......................................................... 132 Retry .............................................................. 132 Space=cycle ........................................................ 132 Return=abort ESC=hangup/abort ...................................... 132 M Manual dial ....................................................... 133 F Find entry ........................................................ 133 SPACE Tag/untag ..................................................... 133 + Tag all ........................................................... 133 - Untag all ......................................................... 133 * Invert all ........................................................ 133 S Sort menu ......................................................... 134 I Import ............................................................ 134 BBSlist ............................................................ 135 Import from nodelists .............................................. 135 Import/Export comma separated files ................................ 135 Export: Phonebook to printer/textfile .............................. 135 P Change phonebook .................................................. 135 O Other functions ................................................... 135 Phonebook comment .................................................. 136 Phonebook password ................................................. 136 G Global changes .................................................... 137 V Save phonebook .................................................... 137 L Voicecall ......................................................... 138 C Copy menu ......................................................... 138 T (Alt-L) Edit capture file ......................................... 138 N (Alt-N) Edit note file ............................................ 138 W Warn days ......................................................... 138 Alt-J DOS-shell ..................................................... 138 Alt-X Exit .......................................................... 138 E Edit entry ........................................................ 139 System name ........................................................ 139 Phone number ....................................................... 139 Device ............................................................. 139 User profile ....................................................... 139 Password ........................................................... 139 Opening hours ...................................................... 140 Terminal ........................................................... 140 Dial prefix Dial suffix ........................................... 140 Clear last call .................................................... 140 Autologin .......................................................... 140 Comment 1 Comment 2 ............................................... 140 Download path ...................................................... 140 Keyboard mapping ................................................... 140 Translation table .................................................. 141 Capture file ....................................................... 141 Note file .......................................................... 141 Baud information ................................................... 141 Time used/Connects ................................................. 141 Transfer guess ..................................................... 141 Costs used ......................................................... 142 Local Echo ......................................................... 142 StripHigh .......................................................... 142 Erase backspace .................................................... 142 Color .............................................................. 142 File tagging and tagmenu ............................................... 143 File tagger keys .................................................... 143 File tagger cursor movements ........................................ 143 Tag menu ............................................................ 144 A Edit tagfile ...................................................... 144 C Clear all ......................................................... 144 D Delete (þ) ........................................................ 144 L Load tagfile ...................................................... 144 S Save tagfile ...................................................... 144 E Edit entry ........................................................ 145 I Import dir ........................................................ 145 F Filelist .......................................................... 145 Turbo Search ....................................................... 146 View filelist ...................................................... 146 Tag from list ...................................................... 146 Pack filelists ..................................................... 146 Unpack filelists ................................................... 146 Filemanager ........................................................ 146 M Magic ............................................................. 146 G GenTag ............................................................ 147 B Sort .............................................................. 147 U UnTag ............................................................. 147 Del Remove entry .................................................... 147 þ=Sent / þ=Request .................................................. 147 Space / Return ...................................................... 147 + All+13 - All+32 / +-* Toggle all .................................. 147 The Filemanager ........................................................ 148 Changing directory .................................................. 148 Favourite paths ..................................................... 148 Drive colours ....................................................... 148 K Mask .............................................................. 148 P Enter/create path ................................................. 149 Movements ........................................................... 150 Left cursor (< An arrow pointing to the left) ....................... 150 Right cursor (> An arrow pointing to the right) ..................... 150 . Reread ............................................................ 150 \ Change to root .................................................... 150 + Tag all ........................................................... 150 - Untag all ......................................................... 150 * Invert all ........................................................ 150 SPACE Tag ........................................................... 151 TAB Change window ................................................... 151 T Enter CPS ......................................................... 151 S Sort files ........................................................ 151 C Copy file(s) (Print textfiles) .................................... 151 M Move file(s) ...................................................... 151 R Rename file ....................................................... 151 D (DEL) Delete file(s) .............................................. 151 A Change attributes/time/date ....................................... 151 J DOS-Shell ......................................................... 152 U Compare paths ..................................................... 152 N Send filename ..................................................... 152 Z Tree-size ......................................................... 152 V View file ......................................................... 152 E Edit file ......................................................... 152 F Find file(s) ...................................................... 152 W Window display style .............................................. 152 I Disk information .................................................. 152 X Edit extensions ................................................... 152 O DOS-command ....................................................... 153 B Both paths ........................................................ 153 Q Quiet ............................................................. 153 Alt-Shift-K ......................................................... 153 Fido-style address .................................................. 153 The Fax manager ........................................................ 154 Introduction to the faxmanager ...................................... 154 The fax manager menu ................................................ 154 Receive faxes ....................................................... 155 Force receive ....................................................... 155 Send fax ............................................................ 155 Quick note ......................................................... 155 File selector ...................................................... 155 Pick phone entry ................................................... 155 Accept fax info .................................................... 156 Send with cover page / Send without cover page .................... 156 To ................................................................. 156 Number ............................................................. 157 From ............................................................... 157 Current cover page ................................................. 157 Multi fax ........................................................... 157 Start multifax ..................................................... 157 Phonelist .......................................................... 157 File to fax ........................................................ 157 Multi cover page ................................................... 157 Reset phonelist .................................................... 157 Cost estimate ...................................................... 158 Convert ............................................................. 158 View faxes .......................................................... 158 Print files ......................................................... 158 File manager ........................................................ 158 Fax phonebook ....................................................... 158 View logfile ........................................................ 158 Encryption menu ..................................................... 158 Password ........................................................... 158 Auto encrypt ....................................................... 158 Encrypt any file ................................................... 158 Decrypt any file ................................................... 158 Fax configuration ................................................... 159 Auto config ........................................................ 159 Fax device ......................................................... 159 Class .............................................................. 159 Receive class ...................................................... 159 Fax bps rate ....................................................... 159 Slow init .......................................................... 159 Initstring ......................................................... 160 Error correction ................................................... 160 Local ID ........................................................... 160 Fine resolution .................................................... 160 Page width ......................................................... 160 Page header line ................................................... 160 Pagesize & margins ................................................. 161 Dial prefix ........................................................ 161 Dial timeout ....................................................... 161 Forced timeout ..................................................... 161 Send retries ....................................................... 161 Ring counter ....................................................... 161 Incoming control ................................................... 161 Filenames & paths .................................................. 161 Fax path .......................................................... 161 Fax receive path .................................................. 161 Fax transmit path ................................................. 162 Font .............................................................. 162 HP LaserJet font .................................................. 162 CAS PCX Logo file ................................................. 162 Cover page ........................................................ 162 Fax phonebook ..................................................... 163 Fax viewer ........................................................ 163 Printer setup ...................................................... 163 Printer ........................................................... 163 Printer path ...................................................... 163 Auto print ........................................................ 163 Use scaling ....................................................... 163 Suppress blanks ................................................... 163 Print header ...................................................... 163 External printing ................................................. 164 Fax command line switches ........................................... 164 Send a fax ......................................................... 164 /FAX /SEND Filename Number-to-dial [To-user] [From-user] .......... 164 Receive faxes ...................................................... 164 /FAX /RECEIVE ..................................................... 165 Send multifaxes .................................................... 165 /FAX /MULTI filename file-with-numbers /RESET ..................... 165 Convert files ...................................................... 165 /CONVERT filename ................................................. 165 Print files ........................................................ 165 /PRINT filename ................................................... 165 PreScription language .................................................. 166 PreScription, The Terminate Programming Language .................... 166 List of all system commands, functions and variables ............... 166 What can a script do for me ? ...................................... 167 Compiling scripts .................................................. 167 Include files ..................................................... 167 Language syntax .................................................... 167 Comment lines ...................................................... 168 Program structure .................................................. 168 Variables .......................................................... 168 Numbers ........................................................... 168 Strings ........................................................... 169 Arrays ............................................................. 169 InitArray (Command) ..................................... 169 PutArray (Command) ..................................... 170 GetArray (Function) .................................... 170 FreeArray (Command) ..................................... 170 Example of array .................................................. 170 Expressions and operators .......................................... 170 User defined functions ............................................. 171 Statements ......................................................... 172 If Else Endif ..................................................... 172 Goto Labels ....................................................... 172 Gosub Labels Return ............................................... 173 Loops .............................................................. 173 For Next .......................................................... 173 While EndWhile .................................................... 174 Repeat Until ...................................................... 174 Stopping a script SHIFT-ESC, K ..................................... 174 Built-in commands and functions .................................... 174 Screen, sound handling ............................................ 175 Attr (Variable) .................................... 175 AttrBlock (Command) ..................................... 175 Box (Command) ..................................... 175 CharBlock (Command) ..................................... 175 ClearScreen (Command) ..................................... 175 Cursor (Command) ..................................... 175 FillBlock (Command) ..................................... 176 GetAttrXY (Function) .................................... 176 GetCharXY (Function) .................................... 176 GotoXY (Command) ..................................... 176 InWindow (Variable) .................................... 176 Mouse (Command) ..................................... 176 MouseDetected (Function) .................................... 176 MouseGotoXY (Command) ..................................... 176 MouseLeft (Function) .................................... 177 MouseRight (Function) .................................... 177 MouseWindow (Command) ..................................... 177 MouseX (Function) .................................... 177 MouseY (Function) .................................... 177 NoSound (Command) ..................................... 177 Print (Command) ..................................... 177 PrintLn (Command) ..................................... 177 RemoveWindow (Command) ..................................... 177 ScrCol (Variable) .................................... 177 ScrLen (Variable) .................................... 178 Scroll (Command) ..................................... 178 SelectBar (Function) .................................... 178 SetAttr (Command) ..................................... 178 SetBarTxt (Command) ..................................... 178 Sound (Command) ..................................... 178 WhereX (Function) .................................... 178 WhereY (Function) .................................... 179 Window (Command) ..................................... 179 WriteAStr (Command) ..................................... 179 WriteAttr (Command) ..................................... 179 WriteChar (Command) ..................................... 179 WriteColorStr (Command) ..................................... 179 WriteStr (Command) ..................................... 179 Keyboard control .................................................. 179 AltPressed (Function) .................................... 180 CtrlPressed (Function) .................................... 180 Getkey (Function) .................................... 180 Input (Function) .................................... 180 Key (Variable) .................................... 180 KeyPressed (Function) .................................... 180 ShiftPressed (Function) .................................... 180 WaitEnter (Command) ..................................... 180 Variable manipulation ............................................. 180 BlankAfter (Function) .................................... 180 BlankBefore (Function) .................................... 181 Chr (Function) .................................... 181 Copy (Function) .................................... 181 Delete (Function) .................................... 181 Grabword (Function) .................................... 181 Integer (Function) .................................... 181 Length (Function) .................................... 181 Numchars (Function) .................................... 181 Ord (Function) .................................... 182 Parameter (Function) .................................... 182 Pos (Function) .................................... 182 Round (Function) .................................... 182 Set (Command) ..................................... 182 StLocase (Function) .................................... 182 StUpcase (Function) .................................... 182 Stacks and queues ................................................. 182 QueueLook (Command) ..................................... 183 QueuePop (Command) ..................................... 183 QueuePush (Command) ..................................... 183 StackLook (Command) ..................................... 183 StackPop (Command) ..................................... 183 StackPush (Command) ..................................... 183 Serial interface handling ......................................... 183 Carrier (Function) .................................... 183 CharsWaiting (Function) .................................... 184 CloseCom (Command) ..................................... 184 ClrLastIncoming (Command) ..................................... 184 DeviceResult (Variable) .................................... 184 DeviceResultStr (Function) .................................... 184 FlushInBuffer (Command) ..................................... 184 GetBaud (Function) .................................... 184 GetChar (Function) .................................... 184 GetCharTimeout (Function) .................................... 184 GetData (Function) .................................... 184 GetInterface (Function) .................................... 185 GetParity (Function) .................................... 185 GetPort (Function) .................................... 185 GetStop (Function) .................................... 185 Hangup (Command) ..................................... 185 InitDevice (Command) ..................................... 185 InitDirect (Command) ..................................... 185 LastIncoming (Variable) .................................... 185 Send (Command) ..................................... 186 SendRaw (Command) ..................................... 186 WaitFor (Command) ..................................... 186 File handling ..................................................... 186 IOResult (Variable) .................................... 186 Text files ....................................................... 186 CloseText (Command) ..................................... 186 EndOfTextFile (Function) .................................... 187 OpenText (Command) ..................................... 187 PosText (Function) .................................... 187 ReadText (Function) .................................... 187 SeekText (Command) ..................................... 187 SizeText (Function) .................................... 187 WriteLnText (Command) ..................................... 187 WriteText (Command) ..................................... 187 Binary files ..................................................... 188 Close (Command) ..................................... 188 Eof (Function) .................................... 188 FilePos (Function) .................................... 188 FileSize (Function) .................................... 188 Open (Command) ..................................... 188 Read (Function) .................................... 188 Seek (Command) ..................................... 188 Write (Command) ..................................... 189 DOS commands ...................................................... 189 DeleteFile (Command) ..................................... 189 Exec (Command) ..................................... 189 FindFirst (Function) .................................... 189 FindNext (Command) ..................................... 189 FindNextSize (Variable) .................................... 189 FindNextAttr (Variable) .................................... 189 FindNextTime (Variable) .................................... 189 Rename (Command) ..................................... 190 Date, time handling ............................................... 190 GetDate (Variable) .................................... 190 GetDateRaw (Variable) .................................... 190 GetTime (Variable) .................................... 190 ResetTimer (Command) ..................................... 190 SetDate (Command) ..................................... 190 SetTime (Command) ..................................... 190 TimeElapsed (Function) .................................... 190 TimerExpired (Function) .................................... 190 Wait (Command) ..................................... 191 File transfers .................................................... 192 Download (Command) ..................................... 192 Upload (Command) ..................................... 192 Emulations ........................................................ 192 SetTerminal (Command) ..................................... 192 WriteTerminal (Command) ..................................... 192 Terminate control ................................................. 192 Dial (Command) ..................................... 192 GetUserName (Variable) .................................... 193 GetUserPassword (Variable) .................................... 193 MainLoop (Command) ..................................... 193 Direct hardware control ........................................... 193 FreeMem (Function) .................................... 193 StackFree (Function) .................................... 193 Interrupt (Function) .................................... 193 Mem (Function) .................................... 193 PortIn (Function) .................................... 194 PortOut (Command) ..................................... 194 PutMem (Command) ..................................... 194 VarFree (Command) ..................................... 194 VarNum (Function) .................................... 194 VarSeg (Function) .................................... 194 VarOfs (Function) .................................... 194 Fax commands ...................................................... 194 SendFax (Command) ..................................... 194 Numeric conversion ................................................ 195 Binary (Function) .................................... 195 BinToInt (Function) .................................... 195 ByteToHex (Function) .................................... 195 HexToInteger (Function) .................................... 195 LongToHex (Function) .................................... 195 WordToHex (Function) .................................... 195 Other commands .................................................... 195 ExitTerminate (Command) ..................................... 195 GetCrc (Function) .................................... 195 GetCrcLong (Function) .................................... 195 Random (Function) .................................... 196 Randomize (Command) ..................................... 196 CommentNum (Function) .................................... 196 CommentStr (Function) .................................... 196 Terminate (Command) ..................................... 196 CD audio player ........................................................ 197 Play ................................................................ 197 Stop ................................................................ 197 Resume .............................................................. 197 Next ................................................................ 197 Previous ............................................................ 197 Eject ............................................................... 197 Close tray .......................................................... 198 Lock CD door ........................................................ 198 MSCDEX Version ...................................................... 198 CD in drive ......................................................... 198 Door locked ......................................................... 198 Raw and cooked ...................................................... 198 Data and Audio ...................................................... 198 HSG and Red book .................................................... 198 Audiomanipulation ................................................... 198 Volume size ......................................................... 198 Track ............................................................... 198 Track start ......................................................... 198 Total track time .................................................... 198 Track time .......................................................... 198 Track time left ..................................................... 199 Copyrighted track ................................................... 199 International information .............................................. 200 International information ........................................... 200 Unit of measurement ................................................ 200 Numeric sizes ...................................................... 200 Linear measure ..................................................... 201 Square measure ..................................................... 201 Cubic measure ...................................................... 202 Weight ............................................................. 203 Temperature ........................................................ 203 Decimal/Hexadecimal/Binary numeric systems ......................... 203 Hexadecimal (hex) -> Binary ........................................ 204 Binary -> Hexadecimal (hex) ....................................... 204 Decimal -> Hexadecimal ............................................ 204 Hexadecimal -> Decimal ............................................. 205 Decimal -> Binary .................................................. 205 Binary -> Decimal ................................................. 206 Alfa, Bravo, Charlie ............................................... 206 End of manual .......................................................... 207 Information about SHAREWARE/LITE/PLUS versions ...................... 207 SHAREWARE versions: ................................................. 207 LITE versions: ...................................................... 207 PLUS versions: ...................................................... 207 PROFESSIONAL versions: .............................................. 207 EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY .............................................. 208 Special thanks ...................................................... 208 Trademarks .......................................................... 209 The story about the Terminate trademark ............................. 209 TerMail message editor ................................................. 211 TerMail Overview .................................................... 212 BLIND SUPPORT ....................................................... 212 Main menu keys ...................................................... 212 F1 This help file .................................................. 212 F2 List of external utilities ...................................... 212 F6 Forms ........................................................... 212 F7 Show/create groups .............................................. 212 F8 Nodelist lookup ................................................. 213 F11 Nodelist search ................................................ 213 ENTER Enter message area ........................................... 213 Fast area selection ................................................ 213 Esc Exit TerMail ................................................... 213 Alt-X Exit TerMail without asking .................................. 213 Alt-V View log ..................................................... 213 Alt-P PID serial number check ...................................... 213 Alt-Z Mega search .................................................. 213 Alt-J Shell to DOS ................................................. 214 Alt-E Edit configuration and external files ........................ 214 Alt-F File/Areafix manager ......................................... 215 These special functions are available: ............................ 215 Echofile .......................................................... 216 Select areas ...................................................... 216 Alt-M Message base maintenance ..................................... 216 Pack area(s) ...................................................... 216 Purge messages .................................................... 216 Link area(s) ...................................................... 217 Unlink area(s) .................................................... 217 Index JAM area(s) ................................................. 217 Undelete JAM area(s) .............................................. 217 Secure area ....................................................... 217 Convert area to JAM ............................................... 217 DELete Remove messages or entire area .............................. 217 Alt-S Scan all areas ............................................... 217 Message reader ...................................................... 218 Mouse support ...................................................... 219 F1 Help system ..................................................... 219 F2 (Shift F1..F12) External utilities .............................. 219 F6 Forms ........................................................... 219 F7 Show/create groups .............................................. 219 F8 Nodelist lookup ................................................. 219 F10 Address book system ............................................ 220 Name .............................................................. 220 Fidonet ........................................................... 220 Crash ............................................................ 220 Internet .......................................................... 220 Organisation ...................................................... 222 Address ........................................................... 222 Comment 1 Comment 2 Comment 3 Comment 4 Comment 5 ................. 222 Data phone ........................................................ 222 Voice phone ....................................................... 222 Fax phone ......................................................... 222 First date ........................................................ 222 Last date ......................................................... 222 Times written ..................................................... 222 Charset ........................................................... 222 Homepage .......................................................... 222 Group ............................................................. 222 A Leave area (Esc) ................................................. 222 B Clean/renumber (Ctrl-R) .......................................... 223 C Change message (Alt-C) ........................................... 223 D Delete message(s) (Alt-D, DELete) ................................ 223 E Create new message (Alt-E, INSert) ............................... 223 Internal message editor ........................................... 223 F Request files (Alt-F, Ctrl-F) .................................... 224 G Quote-reply to message (TO-name) (Alt-G) ......................... 224 H UU-encoding/decoding ............................................. 224 I Fidonet kludges (Special keywords in messages) ................... 224 J Jump to DOS (Alt-J, Alt-O) ....................................... 225 K Toggle kludge information (Ctrl-K) ............................... 225 L List area (Alt-L, F9) ............................................ 225 M Forward/Copy/Move (Alt-M) ........................................ 225 N Reply to this message in another area (Alt-N, F5) ................ 225 O Change origin for group (Ctrl-O) ................................. 225 P Change attributes (Ctrl-S) ....................................... 226 Q Quote-reply to message (FROM-name) (R, F4, Alt-R, Alt-Q) ......... 226 S Search/Mark menu (Alt-S) ......................................... 226 Message Range ..................................................... 226 Set range to last 500 messages .................................... 226 Search only marked ................................................ 226 Header From/To/Subject ............................................ 227 Header From ....................................................... 227 Header To ......................................................... 227 Header and text ................................................... 227 Personal mail ..................................................... 227 Read mail ......................................................... 227 Mark all messages ................................................. 227 Unmark all messages ............................................... 227 Toggle marks ...................................................... 227 Mark messages first->current ...................................... 227 Mark messages current->last ....................................... 227 Mark current range ................................................ 227 T Change template for group (Ctrl-T) ............................... 227 U Temporarily change user for group (Ctrl-U) ....................... 228 V View nodelists ................................................... 228 W Export message(s) (Alt-W) ........................................ 228 X Area statistics, message tracking and address finding ............ 228 Y Message statistics ............................................... 228 Z Zap to next area ................................................. 228 Alt-A SmartNote .................................................... 228 SmartNote commands ................................................ 229 SmartNote cursor-movement commands ................................ 229 Alt-B BossKey ...................................................... 230 Alt-K String grabber ............................................... 230 Alt-P View picture of sender ....................................... 230 Alt-V View all pictures ............................................ 230 Alt-X Exit TerMail ................................................. 230 Alt-F10 CDROM player ............................................... 231 Play .............................................................. 231 Stop .............................................................. 231 Resume ............................................................ 231 Next .............................................................. 231 Previous .......................................................... 231 Eject ............................................................. 231 Close tray ........................................................ 231 Lock CD door ...................................................... 231 MSCDEX Version .................................................... 231 CD in drive ....................................................... 231 Door locked ....................................................... 231 Raw and cooked .................................................... 231 Data and Audio .................................................... 232 HSG and Red book .................................................. 232 Audiomanipulation ................................................. 232 Volume size ....................................................... 232 Track ............................................................. 232 Track start ....................................................... 232 Total track time .................................................. 232 Track time ........................................................ 232 Track time left ................................................... 232 Copyrighted track ................................................. 232 Marking messages ................................................... 232 Cursor LEFT/RIGHT Next/previous message ............................ 232 Jump to next/previous marked message < > ........................... 232 Reading reply links ................................................ 233 Msg movement ....................................................... 233 Ctrl-Home Go to first message ...................................... 233 Ctrl-End Go to last message ........................................ 233 0,1,2..9 Go directly to a specific message ......................... 233 Shift-Esc Runtime information ...................................... 233 TAB Bookmark ....................................................... 233 Cross-posting ....................................................... 233 Carbon Copy ......................................................... 234 Translation editor Alt-W ............................................ 235 Semaphore files ..................................................... 235 TMRESCAN.NOW ....................................................... 235 TMFREEZE.NOW ....................................................... 235 TMNOTE.NOW ......................................................... 235 Errorlevels ......................................................... 235 Information for blind people ........................................... 236 Additional Features when you Register... ............................... 240 Licence agreement ...................................................... 242 Introduction to the Final Terminal Welcome to Terminate's On-Line Manual. This manual is designed so anyone can add comments or even change the language as easily as possible. Once you have upgraded, you may change the help files (*.HLP) for your own purposes, but you are NOT allowed to distribute any modified files without permission. If you do translate files into your own language, please send a copy to DAN BBS ApS, Kastanie alle 14, 2620 Albertslund, Denmark or to a Registration Site so other users can benefit from your work. What is a terminal program? A terminal program is used for communicating with other computers via special hardware. Terminate takes care of the hardware interface - whether it's a data modem, ISDN adapter or fossil - via its various inbuilt device layers and leaves you free to concentrate on the message rather than the medium. Terminate's various emulations and protocols will interpret colour codes and draw your screen appropriately and transfer files from and to your system. Other terminal programs will cope with this basic job too, but we like to think that what makes Terminate different is the helpful human interface and added features to help you communicate quicker and easier. This did not happen by accident. Terminate is better because of the suggestions from our hundreds of thousands of users all over the world. Please tell us if there is anything we need to change or add to make it better for YOU! Online help In almost every menu you are able to press F1 to get help for the current menu. If you want to change the help file, you can press E to edit the file directly. To speed things up, you can press F and enter a keyword to find. This function will only search forwards - so if you want to search the entire helpfile, you must press HOME first. I have chosen to use this form of On-line Help, because then the entire manual can be loaded directly from the menus where it is needed. You can run MANUAL.EXE, which will compile all the help files into one big manual without colorcodes, and then you can print it out. In this way you don't have to waste disk space on both help files AND a manual since you can always delete TERMINAT.DOC and run the MANUAL.EXE program later. TERMINAT ? will give you a list of all available parameters You are now in terminal mode and have configured the system. If you have not configured Terminate, press Alt-O now. Remember that you can press F1 in any menu where you need more help. Editing input fields When you start editing a field/number/string, you can modify the previous - 2 - contents by first pressing cursor left/right. The field will then change colour and you can append/insert new characters. If you just start typing immediately, the field will be blanked and the cursor placed on position 1. Terminate will always remember the last 16 fields you have typed. That way, if you type something new in a field and want to change it back, just edit the field again and press CURSOR-UP or DOWN and you are now able to cycle between the last 16 fields. In every input field where all characters are allowed, you can also press Alt-A and the character selector will appear, showing all characters from #0..#255. If you want a return sign, just move to #13 and press return. To see all 16 strings, press Alt-F9 from terminal mode. Alt-1 will UPPERCASE the entire string. Alt-2 will lowercase the entire string. The following section outlines all Terminal mode commands and gives some useful tips and tricks. We advise you to read all of this if you are not familiar with modems and communication programs. If you are an advanced user you can probably guess what most functions are used for and settle for the quick reference at Alt-Z and the help lines at the bottom line in the menus. Mouse The mouse system in Terminate provides some nice features and allows you to move around easily in menus and even start downloading without touching the keyboard. You must have already installed a mouse driver, of course, eg: MOUSE.COM v9.00 (MicroSoft) or LMOUSE.COM v6.10 (LogiTech) or similar. Old mouse drivers may conflict with our communication driver - so if your screen messes up, try turning off the mouse. If that does not work, then try using another mouse driver. Old mouse drivers are also only able to support 80x25,80x43,80x50 and not all the extended modes like 100x40, 132x60 etc. In menus, pressing the left button will be the same as pressing return on that line. The right button will simulate the escape key and will leave the menu. In terminal mode, left button on an empty line will send a return (ASCII 13). Right button on an empty line will send a space (ASCII 32) Pressing on any character on the terminal screen, will send that character exactly as if you typed it yourself. You do not have to position the cursor directly - if you click on a blank place, Terminate will find the nearest character on the screen and send that instead of the space. The mouse can be turned on/off in the Toggles menu. Send 'F' | ScreenLine = ' M Messages F Files ' | | Send 'M' Send 's' Pressing right button in the statusline will allow you to toggle between 3 different statusbars, allowing you to send all possible characters. If you hold down one of the buttons, and mark a piece of the line, the marked piece area will be sent by the modem; useful if a BBS program wants you to type an areaname already shown on the screen! SHIFT-ESC Runtime information - 3 - Pressing Shift-Esc will bring you to the Runtime information menu. This menu can be called from all other menus and will give you all kinds of information. Like current drive. Last incoming characters. Costs. Memory left etc. look for yourself. Alt-A SmartNote If you use The Internet or some other network where you need to remember hundreds of different strings or note down lots of information, then you cannot live any longer without the SmartNote! The SmartNote function is better than a very long piece of paper because it is always ready for writing down anything needed at a later time. Backups will be made automatically. For example, you see something on the screen you wish to note: 1. Press Alt-K and grab the text with the string grabber - this can be adjusted in size and position with Shift and cursor-keys. 2. Then enter SmartNote by pressing Alt-A and import by pressing Alt-G at the place you want the grabbed text to appear. NB: It does not matter where you see something on the screen, just so long as you are inside Terminate. The Alt-K string grabber will work everywhere. If, for example, you want to copy something to another note file, just follow the procedure above. If you want to test this powerful feature, you could go into Alt-O, press Alt-K and grab some of the menu. Then start up SmartNote with Alt-A and insert the grabbed text with Alt-G. (You can grab from any of the Manual Files and insert in a note file.) You can adjust the grabber's size by holding down Shift and then using the cursor movement keys (Arrow up, down, right or left). Z will Zoom the grabber to maximum size. Once you try this, you will soon understand how powerful and useful this feature can be! The editor inside SmartNote has the following functions: SmartNote commands (Many of these commands are the same as Qedit by SEMWARE) Alt-1 Uppercase line Alt-2 Lowercase line Alt-A Select character from ASCII-selector Alt-C Clear/erase all lines Alt-D Do it for you. Simulate a fast typist Alt-E Edit file with the external editor Alt-F Search after keyword Alt-G Import the last block you grabbed with Alt-K Alt-I Import all history strings at cursorline Alt-J Jump to DOS Alt-K String grabber Alt-L Load another note file Alt-R Send from cursor position and Rest of line Alt-S Send line without carriage return (#13) Alt-T Send from position 1 To cursor position Alt-U Import textfile into cursor position Alt-W Send Word under cursor Alt-Z Turbo Search in all note files - 4 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Searching for 'YOU' ÿ ³ INTERNET ³ Here you can place any command you like or just want to r ³ ³ INTERNET ³ The following lines are only examples of what you could s ³ ³ SMARTNOT ³ used by default. If you want to use another note file with ³ ³ SMARTNOT ³ it will be used when you are online at that system. ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Turbo Search will allow you to search through all note files very fast and let you choose your match and jump to the place in the notefile where the match was found. If several matches were found, then you will be asked which match to use, like the above example. Ctrl-Enter Send line to device with a carriage return (#13) Ctrl-Y Delete current line Ctrl-T Delete right word F2 Add line F4 Duplicate line F6 Delete from cursor until end of line Alt-F9 History strings SmartNote cursor-movement commands Home Goto start of line End Goto end of line Ctrl-Home Goto first screen line Ctrl-End Goto last screen line Cursor Up Move 1 line up Cursor Down Move 1 line down Cursor Left Move one position left Cursor Right Move one position right Ctrl-Left Move one word to the left Ctrl-Right Move one word to the right PageUp Go 1 page up PageDown Go 1 page Ctrl-PageUp Goto top of file Ctrl-PageDown Goto bottom of file Insert Toggle Insert/Overwrite Delete Delete character under cursor Backspace Delete character before cursor Alt-B (Shift-CursorUp) Scrollback buffer Terminate will save the last incoming screen in a special buffer. The size of this buffer can be set in the configuration and you should decrease it if you are running short of memory. Both text and colours are saved in this buffer. Alt-C Clear Screen Clears screen, sets default colours and cleans up. Alt-D Dialing directory The dialling directory. From here you can store all your phone numbers and all kinds of other information. The phonebook also holds information on how much your phone bill will be for up to one year. Alt-E Local echo - 5 - Echo all characters sent to the modem on the screen. Normally this is always turned off. Alt-F The File Manager Also calls external utilities and has almost every function that Norton Commander(TM) has - and then a little more :-) Alt-G Scripts Jumps to the Script menu Alt-H Hangup Hangs up the 'phone. The hangup string is determined in the Modem & Dialling Menu. You can also set a toggle so you will be asked to confirm hangup, before actually hanging up. Alt-I Screen image Will save the current screen in the capture file (default is TERMINAT.CAP). You can define other capture files for each phonebook entry and the current capture file will always be used to save images. Alt-J DOS-Shell Calls COMMAND.COM (COMSPEC) and invokes a dos-shell. You can set Terminate up to not swap out memory first. Type EXIT to return. Alt-K String grabber Grabs any string and saves it in the history strings. You can adjust the grab size by pressing Shift and move cursor keys right, left, up or down. You can use this function EVERYWHERE in Terminate. So if you call a system, and want to remember a phone number: Grab the number, go into the phonebook, add a new entry, edit phone number, press cursor up and recall the grabbed number. This should save you cluttering your desk with thousands of small pieces of paper! Alt-L Capture file Opens or closes the current capture file; the capture files can be defined for each phonebook entry. If you define a capture file and call a system, the capture file will be opened upon connection. You can turn the auto-capture system off by pressing Alt-0 and toggle if off permanently. You can also force Terminate to always overwrite old capture files by turning on a toggle. Use PRN or LPTx to capture directly to printer. - 6 - Alt-M Miscellaneous functions Õµ Miscellaneous functions Ƹ ³ Modem reset/Init device ³ ³ Answer call at once ³ ³ Hostmode (Alt-F8) ³ ³ Fax Manager (Alt-F12) ³ ³ Run Download Manager... ³ ³ Keyboard lock ³ ³ Blanker (screen) ³ ³ Choose char to send ³ ³ S-registers (read/write) ³ ³ Terminal mode simulation ³ ³ List of countries ³ ³ GMT & time zones ³ ³ Privacy Insurance ³ ³ Date of birth ³ ³ ISDN Fossil Menu ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ 25 lines ³ ³ 30 lines ³ ³ 43/50 lines ³ ³ V Tseng 4000 100x40 ³ ³ O XGA 132x25 ³ ³ E Reset 80x25 ³ ³ X 132 columns 132x25 ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; M First reset device, then allows you to select which init string to send to the modem A Pick up phone (send the auto answer string) H Startup hostmode, look in configuration for more information You can also start the hostmode directly: TERMINAT /HOST F This menu will allow you to send and recieve faxes, please refer to the information later in this manual or press F1 in the menu. Alt-F12 from terminal mode will also start this menu. R Run Download Manager K Locks keyboard with password B Activate the screen blanker C Choose a char from the ASCII selector to send directly to port S Show/change S-registers in a HAYES(tm) compatible modem. T Simulate characters received from modem or other device. With this function you can first capture some screens with Alt-L and then replay the screens later in the current emulation to see if they display correctly. With this you can test if your ANSI, AVATAR etc. screens are working properly. L Show list of countries that are directly supported in Terminate. G Watch the time all over the world. P Privacy Insurance. D Send date of birth. I ISDN Fossil Menu. Please read the DOCS\ISDN.DOC. 2 Switch to 25 lines screen mode 3 Switch to 30 lines screen mode (VGA only) 4 If EGA, then switch to 43 lines; if VGA, then 50 lines V Startup screen mode if using custom screen modes O Another definable screen mode E Mode to use when exiting Terminate and using custom mode X Mode to use for 132 columns by emulations like VT-220 - 7 - Greenwich Mean Time ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Greenwich Mean Time (G.M.T.) & time zones Ƹ ³ ³ ³ Greenwich Mean Time 23.15.29 ³ ³ ³ ³ Your country 45 Denmark / Danmark ³ ³ ³ ³ Time zones ³ ³ Lowest GMT+1 00.15.29 ³ ³ Highest GMT+1 00.15.29 ³ ³ Your zone GMT+1 00.15.29 ³ ³ ³ ³þOther country 1 United States / Canada ³ ³ ³ ³ Time zones ³ ³ Lowest GMT-11 12.15.29 ³ ³ Highest GMT-3 20.15.29 ³ ³ Zone used GMT-7 16.15.29 ³ ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ TAB Move between lines C Country list ³ ³ LEFT/RIGHT Change GMT time or time zone ³ ³ UP/DOWN Change country ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ This function does not handle daylight saving time (summer time) ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; From this menu will you be able to view the current time in many countries. The GMT must be adjusted if it is not correct. Terminate will guess your time zone, but in some countries that have several time zones like USA and Russia you must adjust the GMT to the right time. GMT is the exact time in a part of London called Greenwich, which lies next to the river Thames. Press TAB to move the 'þ' around and the cursors to change time or zone. C will show you the entire list of countries that Terminate supports. Here is the list over the current timezones: Timezones complete list -1000 AHST Alaska-Hawaii Standard Time -0900 HDT Hawaii Daylight Time -0800 PST Pacific Standard Time -0700 PDT Pacific Daylight Time -0700 MST Mountain Standard Time -0600 MDT Mountain Daylight Time -0600 CST Central Standard Time -0500 CDT Central Daylight Time -0500 EST Eastern Standard Time -0400 EDT Eastern Daylight Time -0100 WAT West Africa Time +0000 GMT Greenwich Mean Time +0000 UTC Universal Time +0100 CET Central European Time +0100 BST British Summer Time +0200 CEST Central European Summer Time +0200 EET Eastern European Time +0700 WAST West Australian Time +0800 WATD West Australian Daylight Time - 8 - +0800 CCT China Coast Time +0900 JST Japan Standard Time +0930 CAST Central Australian Standard Time +1000 EAST East Australian Standard Time +1030 CADT Central Australian Daylight Time +1100 EADT East Australian Daylight Time +1200 NZST New Zealand Standard Time +1300 NZDT New Zealand Daylight Time Privacy Insurance With this function, Terminate will pretend that you are home. It will pick up the phone randomly after 1 to 5 rings and hang up immediately. Every call is noted in the logfile. Prevent annoying phonecalls If someone wants to bother you by calling in at odd hours, this function will avoid any disturbance. After a while the would-be prankster will become bored and quit. Prevent burglary By enabling this function you make sure that thieves who are calling you to check if you're home can not be sure whether you are home or not. They might think that you are home and don't want to talk to any one - in any case, they will certainly be uncertain and possibly change their mind. WE CAN NOT GUARANTEE OR PROMISE THAT THESE FUNCTIONS GENERATE THE DESIRED RESULTS. USE AT OWN RISK. Alt-N Send username Sends the user name from the current user profile. You will normally use this function where Terminate can not log on automatically. Alt-O Configuration All the configuration menus. Alt-P Adjust comm. parameters Quick change of device, comport, baudrate, databits, parity, stopbit. You can also save the chosen setup directly as the default startup settings. Alt-Q Quit autologin Quits current autologin script. If you see a flashing A in the statusline then probably Terminate did not logon properly. Try correcting the login scripts in the configuration menus or turn them off. Alt-R Select download path Terminate has 8 download paths available. At startup, number 1 will always be the default - but you can change this manually or change it for each phone entry. There is also the wildcard system you can read more about in the configuration. Alt-S Send password - 9 - If you have called a system, then the password from the phonebook is sent. If that password entry is blank you will be asked to either input a new password directly or send the default password from the current userprofile. Alt-T Terminal emulation Change the current terminal emulation. The first one - called 'ANSI-BBS' - can be used on most systems. Terminal emulations determine how the control codes and colours are processed and displayed on your screen. Alt-U System information Which multitasker, processor, graphics card, speed index etc... Alt-V VISIBLE FAST (tm) access menu This menu allows fast access with the mouse to all functions from just one screen. For access, you can also just click a mouse button in the lower right corner. - 10 - Alt-W Translation editor Handles how characters are changed before they are sent to the remote system or what to change before displaying the character on the screen. This function is mostly used when calling Hosts or systems that cannot handle 8-bit characters. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Translation editor Ƹ ³ Filename : .XLT ³ ³ Comment : Default translation tables for terminate ³ ³ ( 0) ( Incoming table ) ³ ³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ³ ³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ³ ³ ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / ³ ³ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? ³ ³ @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O ³ ³ P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ ³ ³ ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o ³ ³ p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~  ³ ³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ³ ³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ³ ³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ³ ³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ³ ³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ³ ³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ³ ³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ³ ³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ³ ³ ³ ³ R Reset L Load S Save T Incoming/outgoing U ASCII/Value ³ ³ X Translate a file using this table ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Comment Since it is important to know what the table is used for it is strongly advised that you enter the description here. R Reset Remove all changes and clean the board. L Load Load a table S Save Save table T Incoming/outgoing A table consists of an incoming and an outgoing table. The incoming table will be used when you receive something from the other end. The outgoing is used when you send something. U ASCII/Value Toggle values instead of character apperance. - 11 - X Translate a file using this table Translate a complete file using the current table. This can be used if you have files from other non PC's (Amiga, MAC, etc) Alt-Y Chat mode If you are connected to another Terminate and press Alt-Y, Terminate will send '**EMSI_CHTF5D4'+#13 to the other end. This is normally used by IEMSI sessions, but a Terminate at the other end will change automatically - even when NOT in IEMSI mode. When you press Alt-Y again to exit chatmode the string '**EMSI_TCH3C60'+#13 will be sent to the other end so both ends exit chat mode. Chatmode works just like a terminal emulation so you can use all other functions while you are chatting, including starting to up/download. Alt-X Exit Terminate A function you hopefully only will use once a day :-) If you are online (Carrier detected) you will be asked what to do: Exit, Hangup & exit, or Not exit. You can also turn on a toggle that will ask you if you are sure you want to exit Terminate. Alt-Z Quick reference menu Here you can see a short description of all functions - and see which functions are On or Off. Alt-= Load a keyboard table This key is different on some international keyboards. It is the key next to the BACKSPACE. Hold down Alt and press the = (the key to the left of the backspace). Keyboards can be customized in the configuration. You can setup a default keyboard for each terminal emulation, but you can also specify a keyboard file to be loaded for each phonebook entry. Ctrl-End Break Will send a break to the other end. Breaks are rarely used anymore, but Terminate will both detect and send breaks. A break is a condition in which the data line is filled with zero bits for as long as it takes to send one character. Some switchboards will need a break to hangup the line. It can also be used to reset the buffers in your modem, if the modem has been setup to act this way. If you are not an advanced user you will never use this. ScrollLock Doorway mode This is a special mode (originated by Marshall Dudley) to allow you to send keyboard scan codes, instead of normal ASCII characters. The statusline will be removed so the entire screen can be used. If you need to use a menu, you must first disable Doorway mode, use the menu and then enable Doorway mode again. The reason is that when you press, for example, Alt-O then the scancode for Alt-O is sent and the remote site can use the Alt-O as if that key had been pressed at the remote site. The technical idea behind this Doorway mode is quite simple: If normal ASCII character, then send character; else, if special key, send a ASCII 0, send scancode. - 12 - PageDown Download Here you can select which protocol you want to use for the file transfer. Download means receive files. A file transfer protocol is a way of sending/receiving data between the remote site and ourselves. Zmodem is the best to use for normal users where it is available... PageUp Upload When you want to send a file to the remote site, you will have to use a file transfer protocol. First you will be placed in the filemanager. From here you can select a file or files (if the file-protocol allows batch transfers, meaning more than 1 file at the time). Just press RETURN on the selected file then the transfer will start. If you are using a batch protocol, lets say Zmodem, then you can select several files by marking the files first. You can select files in both windows. Alt-1..Alt-0 Change different toggles These are toggles that can be set permanently in the configuration. Alt-1 Sound Turns beeps/alarms/alerts on/off Alt-2 ANSI music Turns ANSI music on/off. If any remote sites have ANSI music it may be played. Terminate supports full ANSI music. Pressing Alt-2 while music is playing will reset the music buffer. Alt-3 Statusline Turn the statusline on/off. You can select in Emulation Setup not to have the statusline, but since the statusline gives you important information you should not need to turn it off. Alt-4 Usagelog The usage log is normally always turned on at startup, so you can later see where you have called and which files you have downloaded. But you can turn it off here, if there is a reason for not having something logged. Alt-5 Add linefeed You can add a linefeed (#10) when Terminate receives a carriage return (#13). This is normally not used and should be turned off as the default. Alt-6 IEMSI Turn on/off IEMSI logins. IEMSI logins will allow you to fast login to systems that support IEMSI (RemoteAccess, SuperBBS, Maximus, EzyCom). You can setup options to rescan files, clear screen, etc, before calling the system. Look in the Users/IEMSI setup for more information. Alt-7 Ctrl-Status Toggle if you want the statusline to show information about CTRL-keys. This can be turned off if you think it annoying that it changes all the time. - 13 - Try also pressing both shift keys at the same time or Alt+Shift for other keys available from current keyboard mapping. (eg. if you use the CTRL key a lot in terminal mode.) You can also turn this off in the configuration. Alt-8 Alt-Status Turn on/off information in statusline about the Alt-F1..Alt-F10 keys - although there is normally no reason for turning this off. Alt-9 Ctrl-Shift-Status Turns on/off information about the keys Ctrl-Shift-F1..F10. This will show you the abbreviated status of your external utilities. There is no reason to turn this off. Alt-0 Auto capture Auto capture on/off. If you have defined a capture file for the phonebook entry you have dialled, the capture file will be opened automatically at connect. If you don't want to capture anything you can turn this off. Alt-F1 Status left Will toggle the information in the statusline to the left. The startup setting and how to change on connect can be setup in configuration. It has 4 states: Alt-Z for help just Help Information. dsrdtr cd sdrd ctsrtsri Modem lights: capital letters mean that the line is high. If cd is in big letters:'CD', then carrier detect on the modem is high (red/on). System Name Name of the system called or `Manual' if connection was not made via the dialer. Current device Which device is in use. Alt-F2 Status right Will toggle the information in the statusline to the right. The startup setting and how to change on connect can be setup in configuration. It has 6 states: Time Current local time Online time Online time in mm:ss format Costs How much money you have used this call Online time Online time in hh:mm format Secondary currency Show costs in secondary currency Cursor position Show x,y position of cursor on screen Alt-F3 Pause function - 14 - Pause. Many systems will log you off if you don't do anything for 2-3 minutes. This function will allow you to send a predefined character every x seconds, to make the system at the other end think you are active. The default is to send a RETURN (ASCII 13) every 30 seconds. This is useful if the doorbell rings and you have just connected to a very busy system, which would take hours to get back onto, if you didn't have Terminate. Alt-F4 IEMSI information Will show you the same information as you see just right after an IEMSI connection. It will tell you exactly which BBS system and version number the remote is running. Also the system name, sysop name, location and what the local time is at the remote location. Alt-F5 File tagger This function will identify possible filenames anywhere on the screen. You can tag the files you want to download so you don't need to write them down on paper. You can also use the scrollback buffer Alt-B and tag files from there. Alt-F6 Tagmenu When you have tagged some files, and selected a protocol at the remote site, then you will normally be asked which files to download. The tagmenu will have stored all the files you want and will then send the filenames, so you will not have to do this manually. The tagmenu has many, many more functions such as tagging from file lists. Alt-F7 Point system The point system is a system were you can send/get mail or files. It can connect to any other program using a mailer that has EMSI. At the present time: Frontdoor, d'Bridge, Binkley, Portal of Power etc. Note that you will not actually get online to the system, but only connect to the remote mail system. From here you can request files from that system, without even getting online. You can also write a netmail message directly to sysops. But please, refer to the point manual for more. Alt-F8 Hostmode For more information about the hostmode, see the section about hostmode or enter hostmode and press F1. Alt-F9 History strings Here you can edit or send old strings to the modem. Every time you edit a string anywhere in Terminate, the last string will be saved and you can recall old strings in an input field, by pressing Cursor Up/Down. RETURN will edit the strings, and SPACE will send the string to the modem. Here also the description for files is saved when uploading and a FILES.BBS /DESCRIPT.ION file exists. You can also save and load the last 16 history strings. If you have a FILES.BBS/DESCRIPT.ION file in the same directory as the files, Terminate can find the description and import from the line where the description for the file is found and the subsequent 16 lines (Only FILES.BBS and in case of several description lines). When pressing 'I', the filemanager will be called, just find the file and press 'RETURN' with the cursor positioned above the filename. - 15 - Alt-F10 CD Audio player If you have an audio CD-ROM, and have installed MSCDEX (Microsoft CD Extension). Then you will be able to play normal music CD's. You can view the start and length of every track on the CD. Alt-F11 External editor Calls the external editor. This could be Q.EXE (Qedit) or whatever editor you might like to use. Alt-F12 Fax manager. See the documentation for the fax manager. NETWORK To use Terminate on a network drive you must set the file to be shareable. With Novell you can use the FLAG command. FLAG TERMINAT.EXE srw, then the file will be set to shareable. On networks that do not support sharing directly (eg Lantastic), you must load SHARE.EXE on the server ONLY. A lot of people think they must load SHARE.EXE on the work stations also. But this is a mistake!!!! SHARE.EXE should only be loaded on machines that allow others to access the hard disk. So if you have a workstation that only accesses the server, you should NEVER waste memory on loading SHARE.EXE. Unfortunately a lot of programmers have misunderstood this idea and demand that SHARE is present. The only problems that occur when running Terminate from several stations at one time is that you cannot write to the same logfile and use the same swapfile. This can be helped by either turning the logfile off or setting an environment variable in your AUTOEXEC.BAT like this: SET NET=1 Then define TERMINA%NET%.LOG. When opening the logfile TERMINA1.LOG will be used. If SET NET=2 then TERMINA2.LOG etc. will be used. Note that Terminate will always replace environment variables with the correct values. The same goes for the swapfile. You can also use different configuration files using this system. TERMINAT /C:TERMINA%NET%.CFG Then TERMINA1.CFG will be used for this station, if SET NET=2 then TERMINA2.CFG will be used. If you are a network administrator then I bet you have had these problems with configuration files many times before, but this should solve any problems that you might get. Terminate Thesaurus Terminate: abort, bring or come to an end, cease, close, complete, conclude, cut off, discontinue, end, expire, finish, issue, lapse, put an end to, result, run out, stop, wind up. And in our case the word Terminate does mean to come to an end (a happy) conclusion & completion - an attainment of goals. :-) - 16 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Configurating Terminate °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ -=> T E R M I N A T E C O N F I G U R A T I O N <=- Setting up Terminate is the easiest thing in the world. All options and features are already set to give best performance - all you should do is to adjust the few things you would like to function in ways other than standard. Remember: If you do not understand something - then leave it alone and do not change it! If you make some kind of mistake and your machine hangs, because of a wrong device or something like that, you can start Terminate with the /CONFIG parameter. This will only access the configuration and then exit Terminate again, without initializing the comport or anything. Read below for all commandline switches. ÕÍ͵ Change configuration Ƹ ³ Screen and colors ³ ³ Communications setup ³ ³ General options ³ ³ Toggles ³ ³ Modem and dialling ³ ³ Filenames and paths ³ ³ Protocol options ³ ³ Emulation/keyboard setup ³ ³ Host settings ³ ³ Login strings/scripts ³ ³ Users/IEMSI/Security ³ ³ Point system ³ ³ Cost management ³ ³ Fax configuration ³ ³ Registration info ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Screen and colors Here you can setup all screen related options. Colours, windows, videomode, codepage, etc. Communications setup One of the most important menus. Setting up your serial connection is actually the first thing you always should set up in a terminal program, so that communication is fully functional and no errors occur. General options Set up Terminate exactly as you like it and define external programs that can be called by pressing Ctrl+Shift F-keys. Toggles Toggles that can be turned on or off - 17 - Modem and dialling After setting up the device you should now configure your modem to give best performance. Many popular modems already appear in the picklist which is continually being expanded. Filenames and paths Define Download/Upload directory, external editor / lister, etc. Default files to load when starting Terminate. Protocol options Setting up internal and external protocols. Protocols are used for transfering files between your system and other systems. Most used is Zmodem. As well as being extremely efficient and starting a download automatically, it can also recover a file not fully transfered. If the connection was lost it can `pick up' again where transmission ceased and continue where it left off without having to send the whole file again. Emulation setup How Terminate should react to incoming characters. ANSI is one of the most used emulations in the world, because it is simple. If you have chosen ANSI and Terminate gets a sequence ESC2J (ESC=#27) then the screen will be cleared. Terminate will default to using ANSI-BBS. Host settings Host mode means that you set up Terminate to handle incoming calls and allow specific users to logon to your computer. Login strings/scripts Instead of having complicated scripts that have to be compiled, Terminate has a lot of built-in mini-scripts, which should log you on to almost every normal BBS system. This version additionally has a comprehensive and sophisticated script language (see the Prescription help file). You can define in Strings all possible questions you want Terminate to recognise like 'WHAT IS YOUR NAME','PASSWORD', etc. Users/IEMSI/Security Define 12 different users. Each can be used for dialling a system, settings for a user that calls the host mode or when you use the point system. Point system All settings for the fido point system allowing you to send/receive mail and files. Cost management Allows you to calculate very exactly how much you spend, when calling other systems. Fax configuration Install and setup the fax system. - 18 - Registration info If this is the PROFESSIONAL version, check that your personal details are correctly embedded. This menu option will also show you how you can quickly upgrade your software to PROFESSIONAL standard... Command line switches /Config Only configures the .CFG file then exits again without initializing anything at all. /F Only starts up the filemanager, then exits again. /Host Start Terminate normally, then enter hostmode. This could be used in an AUTOEXEC.BAT if you want to start in hostmode when accidentally rebooted by some external program called while in hostmode. If you call Terminate from a mailer, like Portal of Power, you should also use the /LOGIN switch, which will login a user, then exit hostmode and Terminate. Commandline for mailer: TERMINAT /HOST /LOGIN /Point Startup directly in point system, then exit to DOS when ESC is pressed. /C:filename.ext Use alternate configuration file. You can also use environment variables in the filename, these will be replaced when opening the file. (Network:/C:TERMINA%NET%.CFG) /NoCard Do not test or use any soundcards. (Maybe your machine would hang if this was not turned off if you have no card. But this could also be turned off when running windows, otherwise windows would say something like `device already in use.) /Skip Skip systeminfo tests, PS/2 test. Again this takes microseconds to check, and should only be turned off if you have problems with your machine hanging when starting Terminate. /Disk Force the overlay file to stay on disk. If you have a fast harddisk, you don't need to load the overlays into memory, but it will, of course, improve the speed of the menus. /Buf:xxx If you do not load the overlays into memory, then you could increase the - 19 - overlay buffer, but this will grab normal low memory. The xxx value is how many kilobytes to add to the previous buffer. The buffer can never be lower than the smallest overlay file. /NoXMS Terminate will always try XMS first because it is faster than EMS. But if you, for some reason, never want Terminate to try XMS or want to force Terminate into using EMS memory, you can use this switch. /Dial:xxx After startup, dial this number from phonebook and connect. /Boss[:x] Call Boss and send/receive mail/files. The x is which Boss to call, if /BOSS or /BOSS:0, then Terminate will dial all Boss's that have the autodial enabled. /Call:node/name Search nodelist for nodenumber or search string and call the first match found. /Fix Search/Update BIOS data area for serial ports. Will save the normal values for the COM-ports into low memory and the bios equipment flag so it would look like you have 4 COM-ports. Terminate does not need this but some external utilties might. /ScrLen:xxx /ScrCol:xxx If you are using the custom videomode or a videomode that Terminate cannot detect, you will have problems with the screen size. So these parameters allow you to force a screen size. Please do not set the size bigger than the screen, because it could give unpredictable results. /Device:x Force a Terminate device at startup /Port:x Force a COM-port at startup /Baud:x Force a baudrate at startup /Init:"string" Send a specific string to the modem after the normal init string. Example: /INIT:"AT&V^M" /Task:x If Terminate cannot detect the multitasker for some reason, you can force Terminate to think it is using a multitasker, which means it - 20 - will release timeslices calling the routine for that multitasker. 1 = OS/2 2 = Windows 3 = DESQview 4 = TaskView 5 = TopView 6 = DoubleDos 7 = Virtual /Mode:x Force videomode 0=Mono,1=CGA,2=EGA,3=MCGA,4=VGA If you use the /MODE Terminate will not try to detect the videoadapter, but assume you are right. /Upg Will generate an UPGRADE.CFG with all default values. This file is used when upgrading from old versions, but you can also use it for testing and start Terminate with TERMINAT /C:UPGRADE.CFG /NoImport Do not auto-import any configuration from other program. Look in INSTALL.DOC for information on importing /Script Start up script directly from commandline. Parameters (up to 255 characters) | /Script START.TSL 28800 | Script file in script directory Errorlevels Fatal errors 255 Out of memory, runtime errors, fatal read error from disk. Overlay errors 254 If a problem occur when loading or using overlays. Password error 253 If the startup password was not correct. Lock error 252 If the program was started up from a different path than allowed Out of diskspace 251 If less than the specified minimum diskspace available. Inactivity 250 - 21 - If Terminate was inactive for longer than specified. Semaphore exit 249 The semaphore file was created or changed filetime, which forces Terminate to exit. Hostmode shutdown 248 If pressing Alt-X or using the /LOGIN /EXIT command No errors 0 Normal exit and closedown, no errors were detected - 22 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Screen and Colors °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Screen and colors Ƹ ³ Colors ³ ³ ³ Auto palette ³ Color 0 Mono 0 ³ ³ Windows sound ³ Off ³ ³ Exploding windows ³ Off ³ ³ Direct writes ³ Yes ³ ³ Snow checking ³ Off ³ ³ Screen blanker ³ 300 External blanker UTILS\BLANKER.EXE ³ ³ Show snakes ³ On ³ ³ VGA Fadeout ³ Off ³ ³ Use SND files ³ Off ³ ³ Screen size ³ Auto Ax Bx Cx Dx ³ ³ ÃÄStart mode ³ Tseng 4000 100x40 Registers: 002A ³ ³ ÃÄOther mode ³ XGA 132x25 Registers: 0014 ³ ³ ÃÄExit mode ³ XGA 132x25 Registers: 0014 ³ ³ ÀÄ132x25 mode ³ 132 Columns 132x25 Registers: 0055 ³ ³ Big phonebook ³ Off ³ ³ Force CP-850 ³ Off ³ ³ Find textmodes ³ ³ ³ Use intensity ³ Off ³ ³ Only low ASCII ³ Off ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Colors Define all colours used inside Terminate's menus. Palette There are 14 predefined colour palettes - choose the one you like the most!. A colour palette is a complete set of colours that will be loaded into the default colour record, then you can change some of the colours again. If you are blind you should use the last palette, press END and return in this menu. The Intense requires that you have a graphic adapter that can show background color intense instead of blink/flash. (EGA,VGA etc.) Auto palette At startup, test if colour or monochrome screen. You could enter a '1' at Color and a '8' at Mono, then if you start Terminate from a machine with a colour graphics card, then palette 1 will be choosen and if it has Hercules monochrome then palette 8 will be used. This is useful if you are on a network and want to use the same configuration. Windows sound Make annoying sounds when popping in or out of windows. Exploding windows Try it! (Visual effect) - 23 - Direct writes Should always be turned ON (except in special cases) because using BIOS calls is MUCH slower than direct screen writes. Some blind people can benefit of using the 'Only menus' function. Which will use direct screen writes all other places than in terminal mode. It depends on which speech thing you use. Snow checking When writing directly to the screen, then remove snow. Should only be turned on with old CGA cards, because it can slow down screen writes. Screen blanker Blank screen after X seconds if nothing has happened. If you enter '0' here, then the screen would never blank out. The second field is for use of external screen blanker, please be aware that external screen blankers cannot return on incoming characters from the modem and use of this only should apply when you are only using Terminate for out-going calls. Fax or hostmode will force the use of the internal blanker. Show snakes When blanking screen, you could allow a lot of snakes to eat your screen. The number of snakes will be decided according to how big your screen is and how fast your machine is. If using a multitasker you should turn this off, since then all timeslices will be released. VGA Fadeout Fade down colours on VGA and MCGA cards when leaving Terminate. Looks real nice, but not all VGA cards will support this. Use SND files If you want different sounds inside Terminate, you can define your own. All the sound files must be placed in the utility directory. Look in UTILS\CONNECT.SND for information on making a sound file. - 24 - Screen size ÃÄStart mode ÃÄOther mode ÃÄExit mode ÀÄ132x25 mode Screensize has 4 values, Auto, 25, 43/50 and Custom. Auto will just use whatever videomode is current. 25 will force 25 lines when starting and exiting Terminate. 43/50 will force 43/50 lines if you have a EGA or VGA card installed when starting or exiting Terminate. Custom will call the BIOS videomode routine with the parameters you give. In CUSTOM.DOC you will find the codes for several VGA cards. Start mode will then be used at startup or when returning from shell. Exit mode will be used when exiting Terminate or calling an external utility. If you do not want Terminate to change videomode, but always use some other kind of videomode (also when calling external utilities), just set the videomode before calling Terminate and set Screen size to Auto. Big phonebook If ON, when entering the phonebook, Terminate will switch into 43/50 lines and back into 25 lines when exiting the phonebook. This should not be used together with custom screen size. Force CP-850 Use framechars only from Codepage 850. Only use this if your windows look funny and have strange characters in the frames. Find textmodes Run an external program called SCANMODE (in UTILS\), which detects all textmodes your VGA card is able of showing. This information is saved in MODEINFO.DAT and can afterwards be imported by Terminate. You can also run this program manually directly from DOS. Use intensity EGA and VGA cards have the possibility of using background intense colors, instead of blink/flash. This feature will be turned on/off automatically when you select a color palette. Only low ASCII Some countries use special codepages where the use of high-ASCII causes improper display of the graphical boxes. If you live in such a country, turn this toggle on, but be aware that Terminate will not look like its former self after this. This toggle activates the next time you enter the configuration menu. - 25 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Communications °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Communications setup Ƹ ³ Device name ³ Device Port Baud Com Address IRQ Vector ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Async Modem COM1 8N1 ³ 16550A fifo 1 19200 8N1 $03F8 4 $0C ³ ³ Async Modem COM2 8N1 ³ 16550A fifo 2 57600 8N1 $02F8 3 $0B ³ ³ Async Modem COM3 8N1 ³ No UART 3 19200 8N1 $03E8 4 $0C ³ ³ Async Modem COM4 8N1 ³ No UART 4 19200 8N1 $02E8 3 $0B ³ ³þISDN CAPI 1.1 ³ CAPI 1.1 ISDN 1 64000 8N1 ³ ³ ISDN-device (cFos) ³ Fossil 1 64000 8N1 ³ ³ Fossil ³ Fossil 1 38400 8N1 ³ ³ Interrupt 14h ³ Interrupt 14h 1 64000 8N1 ³ ³ Fax device ³ 16550A fifo 1 19200 8N1 $03F8 4 $0C ³ ³ Async Modem COM2 7E1 ³ 16550A fifo 1 19200 7E1 $03F8 4 $0C ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Configure comports ³ Async Professional 2.03 enhanced ³ ³ Check IRQ ³ ³ ³ Set default values ³ ³ ³ Auto installation ³ þ = Default device ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Maximum baud rates Since setting up the serial port is one of the most important things in any terminal program, you must remember the following rules: Maximum bps rates: 4.77 MHz PC (8088) 9600 bps 8 MHz PC (8088) 19200 bps 8 MHz PC (286) 57600 bps 16 MHz PC (386) 115200 bps When to use a fast 16550A serialchip with FIFO buffer You need 16550A serial UART chips if you want to have error free connections when using: an 8 MHz PC (8088); any kind of multitasker - eg: OS/2, Windows, DESQview, etc; a modem connected to a network drive. It does not matter how fast your machine is, a 486DX2-66 still give errors when there is no FIFO buffer in the machine. And this happends with baud rates even at 38400. If you have problems, set the speed to 19200 and see if that works. The 16550A UART chip gives you a small 16 byte FIFO buffer - which means the chip does not have to generate an interrupt every time a character arrives. Most PC's are delivered with the old 8250 or 16450 chips (almost the same), so if you get CRC errors, you should buy such a card. (Ask us or one of our Registration Sites where to obtain them.) All good internal high speed modems already have a 16550A UART implemented. When buying an internal modem make sure it has one! - 26 - Device setup ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Device setup Ƹ ³ Serial interface ³ UART/Serial ³ ³ Comport ³ 2 ³ ³ Device name ³ Async Modem COM1 ³ ³ Baudrate ³ 57600 ³ ³ Lock port ³ Yes ³ ³ Databits / Stopbits / Parity ³ 8,1,N ³ ³ Phonebook ³ TERMINAT.FON ³ ³ Costfile ³ TERMINAT.CST ³ ³ Receive buffer size ³ 2048 ³ ³ Transmit buffer size ³ 4096 ³ ³ Software flow control (Xon/Xoff) ³ Off ³ ³ Hardware flow control (CTS/RTS) ³ On ³ ³ Hardware flow control (DSR/DTR) ³ Off ³ ³ Use 16550 fifo if available ³ 14 ³ ³ Keep 16550 fifo on in shell ³ No ³ ³ RTS low while writing ³ No ³ ³ Auto RTS low trigger ³ 2 ³ ³ Carrier detect mask ³ 128 ³ ³ Init string ³ ATZ^M ³ ³ Restore port on close ³ No ³ ³ Close port in shell ³ No ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Serial interface Terminate supports 4 different interfaces. UART/Serial Direct serial chips Interrupt 14h Via BIOS int 14h max 9600 baud Fossil Resident serial devices, like X00/BNU or ISDN fossil devices. Digiboard Very fast intelligent multiport adapter. Comport Select which port to assign for this device, COM1..COM8 can be selected. Device name Enter the string to be shown everywhere the device is shown. You should enter your modem name here, 'Spirit II 19200 8N1' or whatever you have. Baudrate Which baudrate to use for this device as default. Note that if you want to use a special baudrate that is not shown in the list, just press D and define it. Lock port When using a high speed modem (bps>=9600) you should always choose to lock the port. Databits / Stopbits / Parity Databits - 27 - A data byte can contain 5,6,7 or 8 bits. The vast majority of applications will use either 7 or 8 bits since most of the data we are used to dealing with is expressed in 8-bit bytes (although text data can often be expressed in only 7-bits). Many time-sharing systems, such as CompuServe, work with only 7 data bits because that's all they need to display text data. When transfering binary data though, for example with a file transfer protocol, you usually switch to 8 data bits. If you use 8N1 and 7E1 on different systems, you must define 2 different devices and select the correct device in the phonebook. Create 2 devices which looks the same. They could be called: Device 1:MODEM COM2 2400 8N1 Device 2:MODEM COM2 2400 7E1 Stopbits Stop bits follow the data bits in the serial stream. The value for stop bits will always be either 1 or 2. Generally, 1 stop bit is used. Parity Parity describes a bit checking scheme. When used, all of the bits in a data byte are added together. A final bit, called the parity bit, is added such that the sum of all bits will be either odd or even (whichever you specify). The transmitter calculates and transmits a parity bit. If it is correct then it is assumed that the characters were received without error. If not, then it is assumed that there was some sort of error during transmission. Possible choices are determined by the remote system: None No parity is added, default Even A parity bit is added such that the bit sum is always even Odd A parity bit is added such that the bit sum is always odd Mark A parity bit of value one is always added Space A parity bit of value zero is always added Phonebook When this device is selected, then use this phonebook. This will only work when starting up Terminate. Costfile Which costfile to use when using this device. Receive buffer size Transmit buffer size Size of internal buffers used by Terminate. Only used with an interface that is buffered, otherwise these buffers are ignored. Only the UART/Serial interface is buffered. Do NOT change these values unless you are absolutely sure that you know what you are doing! Software flow control (Xon/Xoff) This option controls the automatic software flow control. (Receive flow control - where Terminate tells the remote to stop transmitting characters, and Transmit flow control - where Terminate responds to the remote's request to stop transmitting characters as its input buffer fills. Whenever the input buffer is more than 75% full, an Xoff (#19) character is sent to the remote. It is up to the remote to recognize the Xoff (#19) and cease sending data. When the input buffer - 28 - empties again to below 75% of buffer size, Terminate will send an Xon (#17) character to the remote. It is then up to the remote to recognize this character and resume sending data.) Hardware flow control (CTS/RTS) Hardware flow control is always preferred when available, because it is faster and much safer. Hardware flow control works with lowering and raising the modem lines. First you need to setup your modem to work with CTS/RTS hardware flow control. CTS means Clear-To-Send and when using hardware flow control the CTS line must be high (with the CTS light in modem lit) before anything will be sent to the modem. When the receive buffer is more than 90% full the RTS (Request-To-Send) line will be set low telling the modem not to send again until the buffer is less than 90% full. Hardware flow control (DSR/DTR) Some strange modems need DSR (Data-Set-Ready) instead of CTS and DTR (Data-Terminal-Ready) or both options together, but it is not advised to ever use this option unless you are sure you know what you are doing. Data-Set-Ready is sometime refered as Modem-Ready (MR) on your modem. Use 16550 fifo if available Tests whether a 16550A is available in the serial chip and, if it is, uses its' FIFO buffer. Windows cannot use this by default. Keep 16550 fifo on in shell When calling an external program or exiting Terminate, we normally disable the FIFO buffer. Some utilities cannot detect the 16550A chip or do not support the FIFO. The best thing is to disable (No) and let external utilities detect for themselves. RTS low while writing If you do not have a 16550A chip and have problems with errors, you can try to set RTS low while writing. This means Terminate will stop receiving while writing protocol blocks to the disk. This will slow down performance a little, but is safer and could prevent hangups. Auto RTS low trigger If you get more than X errors then the Auto RTS low function can be set to go into progress, a good way of keeping up performance to a maximum and only turn on RTS low when really needed. Carrier detect mask When checking the modem status register this determines which bit should be used for checking carrier detect. Normally bit 7 (128) is used and you should only change this if you really know what you are doing. Init string Select which init string you want to sent to the modem after changing device and before dialing. This string is also sent to modem at startup if it is the current device. Restore port on close - 29 - After Terminate closes the port you can choose to restore the port as it was before. But this means that you will get hung up if Terminal ready was low at startup and you call any external program. You should only turn this on if you really know what you are doing. Close port in shell Normally there is no reason for closing the ports while shelling to DOS. But some external protocols might need this. Closing the port will save you a little in swap space, but if you are using fossil/ISDN you might get hung up if you close the port. Configure comports ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Configure comports Ƹ ³ Address IRQ Vector ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ COM1 ³ $03F8 4 $0C ³ ³ COM2 ³ $02F8 3 $0B ³ ³ COM3 ³ $03E8 4 $0C ³ ³ COM4 ³ $02E8 3 $0B ³ ³ COM5 ³ $4220 3 $0B ³ ³ COM6 ³ $4228 3 $0B ³ ³ COM7 ³ $5220 3 $0B ³ ³ COM8 ³ $5228 3 $0B ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; When using the UART/Serial interface, you can change the actual port IO address, the hardware IRQ and the software interrupt. You should not need to change anything here, but if you do, you must beware of potential hardware conflicts. Do not try to change the IRQ on your internal modems or serial card without knowing exactly what you are doing. If you have an internal modem and 2 external comports, you should always choose COM1 for the mouse and COM4 for the modem. If you choose COM3 you will conflict with IRQ4. Do not try changing the hardware jumpers/ switches without help and a manual for the modem. Before you change anything on the modem, always make a note of the current jumper settings so you always can go back. If your internal modem is capable of using IRQ 5 or 7, please be aware that the modem could conflict with other hardware, like netcards or SoundBlaster cards. If it does not work at once with the internal modem, please seek professional help. It is your hardware supplier that is responsible for ensuring the modem works. Terminate uses only standard calls, so if the default settings do not work, contact your hardware supplier. Please always remember to turn off the power before doing anything. The vector number is where to install the software interrupt, this number should always be IRQ + 8. IRQ>7 = IRQ+$68 IRQ0 , Vector $08 ( 8) Timer IRQ1 , Vector $09 ( 9) Keyboard IRQ2 , Vector $0A (10) Screen IRQ3 , Vector $0B (11) COM2,COM4 IRQ4 , Vector $0C (12) COM1,COM3 IRQ5 , Vector $0D (13) Free IRQ6 , Vector $0E (14) Floppy IRQ7 , Vector $0F (15) Free IRQ8 , Vector $70 (112) Real-Time clock - 30 - IRQ9 , Vector $71 (113) Free IRQ10, Vector $72 (114) Free IRQ11, Vector $73 (115) Free IRQ12, Vector $74 (116) Free IRQ13, Vector $75 (117) Math Coprocessor IRQ14, Vector $76 (118) Fixed IRQ15, Vector $77 (119) (Reserved) These are the defaults for normal machines. If you have an internal modem that is capable of using IRQ 5 or 7, you should consider this. If you try to use IRQ0, IRQ1 or IRQ6 you could get in serious trouble and your machine could hang. Check IRQ ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Check IRQ Ƹ ³ Found COM1, $03F8, testing...uses IRQ 4 ³ ³ Found COM2, $02F8, testing...uses IRQ 3 ³ ³ Found COM3, $03E8, testing...uses IRQ 4 ³ ³ Found COM4, $02E8, testing...uses IRQ 5 ³ ³ No chip COM5, $4220 ³ ³ No chip COM6, $4228 ³ ³ No chip COM7, $5220 ³ ³ No chip COM8, $5228 ³ ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; This function tries to determine which hardware IRQ the comports are using. Even if this routine fails to find the IRQ, it will work anyway, if you specify the correct IRQ. Not all machines will show the correct IRQ. Set default values Set all devices to the default parameters. If you make some kind of mistake and cannot remember what you did wrong, you could use this function. Auto installation Detect IRQ's on ports and finds on which port your modem is connected. Test for maximum baudrate on device and select initstrings. - 31 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Using Terminate on ISDN lines °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Using Terminate on ISDN lines First of all if you want to test or download the newest Terminate, the ISDN number for DAN BBS and many other dealers is in SITES.FON. Terminate supports internally CAPI version 1.1. The internal support for CAPI 1.1 has the following benefits. * No fuss installing or using, it just works like a modem * No need for using memory for extra drivers * Directly controls the ISDN channels from Terminate * Charging and time information directly supported * It is built in as a part of Terminate * Future additions easier to implement However you will not be able to run Doorway or other external functions that require a fossil driver and you will not be able to use all the advanced features that a fossil driver like cFos could offer. However since Terminate supports both CAPI and cFos-support you can start with the internal functions and if you have special needs or want more ISDN functions you can install a fossil driver like cFos later. Using the internal CAPI 1.1 support When you select the device CAPI, Terminate will simulate a standard HAYES modem and accept commands just like a normal modem. A simply test is to start Terminate and type ATI + ENTER and you will see the name CAPI driver information. " ATI (ENTER) TERMINATE -- ISDN CAPI 1.1 driver version 1.0 Copyright (c) 1996 by Strathrory Systems Limited. CAPI by: TELES GmbH, Berlin Version: Version 1.1, Profil A, Release 3.05 S/N: SA941081 OK " Please be aware, that all settings are optimized for maximum performance and for general use. As usual no setup is required from your side. Terminate CAPI 1.1 Hayes Command Interpreter This document describes the valid commands and their parameters in the Terminate CAPI 1.1 Hayes Command Interpreter, which accepts commands in standard Hayes AT format and converts them into CAPI calls. To make a call with Teles-bundling (15000 CPS) - 32 - Bundling of B-channels. Terminate currently only supports Teles-bundling. That means only cards made by Teles or supports the Teles bundling can use this function. It requires that the BUNDLE.EXE or the Bundle-protocol is enabled in the OS/2 or Windows CAPI-setup. You will only be able of detecting if the bundling is in progress if you transfer a file and the CPS rate gets above 8000-9000. ATB3D number-to-dial Remember to set it back to B0 afterwards. ISDN AT-commands supported (all starting with AT) $ Displays general help, jumps to location in online manuals. B0 Originating calls use X.75 64000 bps (ISDNC) [Default]. B1 Originating calls use V.110 38400 bps (ISDNB) B2 Originating calls use V.110 19200 bps (ISDNA) B3 Originating calls use X.75 128000 bps (ONLY Teles Bundling) Dn Dials number. n=phone number. All dial modifiers are ignored. E0 Disables command echoing. E1 Enables command echoing (default). H0 Modem on-hook - disconnects if online H1 Modem off-hook - has no effect. I Return driver information, manufacturer id, CAPI version/serial-num I2 Return last dialed number L Dial last called number again Mn Monitor (speaker) control. 0=No sound, 1=Connect/hangup sound Qn Result codes display. Has no effect. Always same. Vn Verbal/Numeric result codes. Has no effect. n=0..1. Xn Result codes options. Has no effect. n=0..9. Z Resets interpreter and loads user-defined NVRAM settings (default at startup, reads CAPI.CFG from disk). &C0 Override DCD signal (forced on) &C1 DCD follows true state of line &D0 Override DTR signal (forced on) &D1 Same as &D2 &D2 DTR follows true state of CAPI &E EAZ to use for outgoing call. EAZ=0 is default &F Resets interpreter and loads factory-defined settings &L EAZ to monitor. &L* all EAZ's, &L- no EAZ, &L123 only EAZ 1+2+3 &Tn Syncronise time with ISDN date/time after hangup. Please note that the time will only be set if seconds are provided by your telephone company. In Germany you do not get the seconds The date is always set. 0=No timesync, 1=Attempt to syncronise &Un Charging information units, use for cost calculation if available. Please note that this was tested in Germany. In Germany this is a service you have to pay extra for at the telephone company. 0=Never use, 1=Use if possible (overwrite normal cost-calculation) &V Displays current modem settings. To make it as simple for you as possible, only important settings and registers are shown. &W Writes user-defined (current) settings to NVRAM (CAPI.CFG) S0=v Sets the ring counter for incoming calls (default is 1, disabled). S1=v Number of incoming rings (read only) (default is 0). - 33 - S2=v ASCII value of ESCAPE character (default is 43). S3=v ASCII value of CARRIAGE RETURN character (default is 13) S4=v ASCII value of LINE FEED character (default is 10). S5=v ASCII value of BACKSPACE character (default is 8). S7=v Number of seconds when waiting for connect during dialling (default is 20). S14=v Serviced SI mask, services to answer (default = 128) Bit 0 Videophone Bit 1 Telephony Bit 2 a/b services Bit 3 X.21 services Bit 4 Fax (Group 4) Bit 5 Videotex (64 kbit/s) (*) Bit 7 Data (64 kbit/s) Bit 8 X.25 services Bit 9 Teletex 64 Bit 10 Mixed mode Bit 13 Remote control Bit 14 Graphic telephone service Bit 15 Videotex (new standard) S19=v Seconds without activity before hanging up, 0 = never hangup (default = 0) S26=v TX Windows default = 2 (Setting this to 1 will decrease speed) S27=v RX Windows default = 2 (Setting this to 1 will decrease speed) To repeat last command use A/ (A+slash) Supported replies from the interpreter: OK BUSY ERROR NO DIALTONE NO CARRIER NO ANSWER RING [caller-id] CAPI-error codes (/CAUSE=) 1001: Error on API_REGISTER 1002: Illegal application-id 1003: Illegal message 1004: Illegal command or subcommand 1005: Queue is full 1006: Queue is empty 1007: Queue overflow 1008: Deinstall error 1009: Windows address error 2001: Illegal Controller 2002: Illegal PLCI 2003: Illegal NCCI 2004: Illegal type 3101: B-channel erroneous 3102: Infomask erroneous 3103: Serviced-EAZ-mask erroneous 3104: Serviced-SI-mask erroneous 3105: Illegal B2 protocol 3106: Illegal DLPD 3107: Illegal B3 protocol 3108: Illegal NCPD 3109: Illegal NCPI 310A: Illegal flags 3201: General controller error 3202: non-unique LISTEN_REQs 3203: function not supported 3204: PLCI inactive - 34 - 3205: NCCI inactive 3206: B2 protocol not supported 3207: can't select B2 protocol now 3208: B3 protocol not supported 3209: can't select B3 protocol now 320A: illegal DLPD parameters 320B: illegal NCPD parameters 320C: illegal NCPI parameters 320D: data length not supported 3301: D channel layer 1 setup error 3302: D channel layer 2 setup error 3303: B channel layer 1 setup error 3304: B channel layer 2 setup error 3305: D channel layer 1 shutdown 3306: D channel layer 2 shutdown 3307: D channel layer 3 shutdown 3308: B channel layer 1 shutdown 3309: B channel layer 2 shutdown 330A: B channel layer 3 shutdown 330B: B channel layer 2 reestablished 330C: B channel layer 3 reestablished 3400: Normal disconnect, no cause given by network 3480: Normal disconnect, no cause given by network 3481: Invalid CR value 3483: Bearer service not implemented 3487: Unknown caller identity 3488: Call Identity already suspended 3489: No channel available 348a: No channel available 3490: FAC Code unknown in this network 3491: requested service rejected 34a0: Outgoing calls barred 34a1: User access busy 34a2: Nonexistent CUG 34a3: Nonexistent CUG 34A5: Invalid or unknown destination 34b5: Destination not obtainable 34b8: Number changed 34b9: Out of order 34ba: No user responding 34bb: User busy 34bd: Incoming calls barred 34be: Call rejected 34d8: Invalid destination address 34d9: Network congestion 34da: Remote user initiated 34f0: Local procedure error 34f1: Remote procedure error 34f2: Remote suspended 34f3: Remote not suspended 34ff: Local reject of User to User info 4001: Stollmann: too many applications 4002: Stollmann: block size too large 4003: Stollmann: error on init of message queue 4004: Stollmann: no PLCI cntl block available 40ff: Stollmann: function not allowed in current context 4101: Verlust der Frame-Synchronisation 4201: Stollmann: can't deinstall, not on top of int chain 4202: Stollmann: can't deinstall, application still active - 35 - Using cFos ISDN fossil driver with Terminate Terminate offers you control and information on the ISDN fossil driver. However, only cFos currently supports the ISDN appendage since it is special calls developed by the authors of cFos. The coordination between cFos and Terminate has been tested by the authors of cFos and together we managed to boost the performance to the max. Thanks to Chris Lueders and Martin Winkler for their help on Terminate. The following menu will be displayed on Alt-M, I or "Ctrl-End" and can be accessed both when you are online or offline. ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ISDN Fossil Menu (cFos) ÿ ³ B-channels in use ³ 2 ³ ³ B2 Control flow ³ Yes ³ ³ B2 Error correction ³ Yes ³ ³ Caller number/ID ³ 7669913 ³ ³ Total charges ³ 0 0 ³ ³ ISDN time / Our time ³ 12:00:00 12:00:05 5 seconds ³ ³ Statusline control ³ Yes ³ ³ Reset driver ³ ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ cFos - ISDN MultiPort FOSSIL Driver for DOS Keys: Cursor Up Add a B-channel Cursor Down Remove a B-channel T Synchronize your machine with ISDN time S Statusline control. The status will be displayed in line 1 while in this menu and while transfering files. Disable it if you do not want Terminate to change the statusline. This is only available with cFos versions > 1.05. R Reset cFos (hangup) cFos is a FOSSIL driver for DOS, so any application with FOSSIL support (e.g. Terminate) can use it. cFos emulates a modem with AT commands and "translates" these commands to the CAPI 1.1 standard, Profil A compliant calls for the CAPI (Common-ISDN-API), a standard supported by most ISDN boards. Using this technique, it's easy to use standard software with ISDN and archive high transfer rates (7500 cps and more). cFos is a TSR driver and has lots of features and fine-tuning options. For instance, it offers dynamic B-channel bundling, can time-sync the computer with date/time info from the ISDN network, has a big status bar informing you about what is going on on the ISDN line and much more... To install cFos in memory before loading Terminate and unloading the driver after exiting, you could use the following: ISDN.BAT Sendbuffer Rcvbuf | aux port (for bundling) | | | cFos i -c1 -r4k -t6k -a0 <- -c0=COM1, -c1=COM2 etc. Terminat /Device:6 <- Run Terminate with ISDN device cFos d <- Remove fossil driver As an example you could use the following setup: - 36 - Statusline Factory | Listen Disconnect after 2 minutes if no activity | | | | Setup: AT &F &D2 &L* &E0 S10.3=1 S19=2 X6^M Dial: AT&B1&M0D Dial using 1 B-channel Dial: AT&B2&M0D Dial trying to connect with 2 B-channels If you dial out with 2 B-channels and only one B-channel is free you will still get connected with 1 B-channel. Then you can run the Alt-M, I menu and increase the number of B-channels as soon as the other line gets free. However, remember that you will of course be charged twice the cost when using twice the speed. To automatic bundle channels when using cFos/Pro: Init: AT &B2 &M1 S64=5000 S65=7000^M This will make cFos bundle an extra channel when getting above 7000 CPS per channel and disconnect when dropping below 5000 CPS. In other words: If you are running a 7500 CPS connection, a new channel will be added, if the CPS rate falls to under 12000 CPS, it will be disconnected. NOTE that CAPI bundling is NOT the same as cFos Channel Bundling and there is no reason to load BUNDLE.EXE for cFos-bundling. If you are using the TelesS0 cards REMark the BUNDLE.EXE in DOS (STARTS0.BAT) or the Bundling under the OS/2 CAPI setup and simply use the instructions above. -a0 and &B2 is really all it takes. Terminate was tested with two Teles cards and we had no problems getting CPS rates of 15000+ using 2 B-channels and even higher using 3 or 4 channels. IMPORTANT is to press I to toggle "Info off" while uploading, since the screenwrites use up a lot of interrupts. With a 386-33 machine, you should have no problems sending with 15000 CPS. We have successfully tested Terminate under DOS, OS/2, Windows (and Win95) using channel bundling and 15000 CPS. We even tested various combinations DOS->OS/2, DOS->Win95, OS/2->DOS, OS/2->Win95, Win95->DOS, Win95->DOS, all successfully. For more information on cFos read the cFos documentation. ISDN calls to normal modems are not possible without special ISDN hardware that can emulate modems. This is how it is supposed to work. - 37 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° General options °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ General options 1 ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ General options 1 Ƹ ³ Swap method ³ XMS/EMS/Disk ³ ³ Swap when shelling ³ On ³ ³ Warning days ³ 30 ³ ³ ScrollBack buffer kb ³ 32 ³ ³ Time format ³ 24-hour ³ ³ Country code ³ 45 Danmark ³ ³ Pause time / char ³ 30 . ³ ³ Minimum diskspace ³ 250000 ³ ³ Tag char ³ þ ³ ³ Edit background ³ ° ³ ³ Online warn minutes ³ 15 ³ ³ Information time ³ 15 ³ ³ Max log size kb ³ 64 ³ ³ Inactivity seconds ³ 1800 ³ ³ Audio control ³ 00:00 - 00:00 ³ ³ Auto password ³ 8 ³ ³ Separators ³ Thousand . Decimal , Date - Time . Lines Ä ³ ³ Filefinder drives ³ ³ ³ Scan drives ³ ³ ³ Release buffer ³ Yes ³ ³ Menu background ³ ± ³ ³ OS/2 timeslices ³ 1 ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Swap method ÚÄ´ Select swap method ÿ ³ XMS/EMS/Disk ³ ³ EMS/XMS/Disk ³ ³ XMS/Disk ³ ³ EMS/Disk ³ ³ Disk ³ ³ None ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Select the preferred way of swapping out memory when calling external utilities or invoking a shell to DOS. Remember that XMS is faster than EMS. Swap when shelling Swap out memory when shelling to DOS. If you don't have much memory left, you will need to enable this. Disabling this option will swap faster, but you will not have as much memory left in the DOS shell. Warning days Pressing W in the phonebook with this set means all entries you have not called in x days flash. ScrollBack buffer kb - 38 - How big the scrollback buffer Alt-B should be in bytes. The range that can be choosen is 16-128k, but don't use too great a value if you also have a big phonebook. If Terminate needs memory badly this buffer will be decreased to release resources to other functions. Time format Select 12 or 24 hour time format. Country code Selects your country code, installs international dial prefix and phone conversion for the point system. Currently Terminate supports almost 100 different countries, when showing timezones and using international dial prefixes. Pause time / char The pause option Alt-F3 will send the defined character every x seconds. The character to send every x seconds when using the pause function Alt-F3 Minimum diskspace Terminate will check every 60 seconds the diskspace where TERMINAT.EXE is located and exit if below this value. If you never want Terminate to exit because of low diskspace enter a '0'. Tag char Enter here the globally used character for tagging (in menus, etc.) Edit background Which character to use as a background in editing fields. Online warn minutes After how many minutes would you like to be warned that you have spent too much time on-line. 0 will disable warnings. Information time How long (1/10 second) some windows remain on screen. Increase this value if you think Terminate is too fast. Max log size kb When the logfile exceeds x kb it will be automatically reduced to half of the current size. This means you will never have to worry about deleting your logfile if it should get too big. 0 will disable this auto adjust. Inactivity seconds How many seconds in Terminal mode without any activity before Terminate automatically exits to DOS. 0 = disable. Audio control During which time period sound is allowed. 00:00 - 00:00 means that sound - 39 - is always allowed. Auto password When you edit any password and the field is blank, a random password is created with length x. This password will only consist of characters 'a..z' and '0..9'. If you never want these random passwords you can disable this feature by entering a zero here. Separators Separators for numbers, time and date vary according to your country codepage: Denmark USA Thousand : . , Decimal : , . Date : - / Time : . : Lines are used in many places and are normally the graphics char 'Ä' which will give you lines like this: ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ in most places (phonebook report etc.). But if for some reason you want to change this, you can... Filefinder drives / Scan drives Õµ Drives Ƹ ³ C: þ ³ ³ D: þ ³ ³ E: ³ ³ F: þ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; When using the internal filefinder or the filemanager you can switch off testing of some drives (eg: CD-ROM drives or mapped network drives.) Release buffer If you want to free the scrollback buffer when calling any external program This allows you to swap faster, because less bytes have to be swapped to memory or disk, the buffer will still be saved if autosave scrollback is on (toggles), so if you never use the scrollback, turn auto save off. Menu background The character that will be used to fill out the background of the screen in the configuration menus and in hostmode. OS/2 timeslices Various OS/2 systems react differently to releasing timeslices in DOS-tasks. To find the best way we provide you with the 4 known but yet undocumented system calls and you need to try each one and see which one that works best for you. 1=Sti/Hlt/35h/cah 2=Int 28h 3=Int 15h 4=Int 2fh - 40 - General options 2 ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ General options 2 Ƹ ³ Status start offline ³ Alt-Z for Help ³ ³ Status start online ³ System name ³ ³ Status end offline ³ Time 11:59:59 ³ ³ Status end online ³ kr 3,75 ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; This menu controls what to show in the statusline and when to show it. You can manually change it with Alt-F1 (Start) and Alt-F2 (End). Status start offline : When No Carrier, show this at start of statusline Status start online : When Carrier, show this at start of statusline Status end offline : When No Carrier, show this at end of statusline Status end online : When Carrier, show this at end of statusline External support ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ External support Ƹ ³ ³ ³ F1 Help @HELP ³ ³ F2 Memo MEM /D |More !W ³ ³ F3 Frmt FORMAT A: ³ ³ F4 Vira C:\U\SCAN C: !M !E ³ ³ F5 GSet GSETUP !M ³ ³ F6 Echo ECHO %COMSPEC% %FD% %RA% %DIRCMD% %PATH% !W ³ ³ F7 VPic VPIC !F !M ³ ³ F8 Pack SHEZ !M ³ ³ F9 Run @SCRIPT TEST.TSL !C ³ ³ F10 NCD NCD !M ³ ³ F11 ³ ³ F12 ³ ³ ³ ³ !P=COM1-8 !C=COM0-7 !0=DownPath !E=NoShell !@=listfile ³ ³ !M=Swap !W=Wait !B=Baud !L=Link !I=Irq !A=Addr !H=Hex ³ ³ !Q=Ask !F=FileName !CD=Cd first !25,!30,!43,!50=Screen size ³ ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Setup the utilities that can be called with Ctrl or Shift F1..F12 from terminal mode or in the filemanager. The first word is what will appear on the status line when holding down Ctrl and Shift. The parameters will be replaced with the correct value or turn on the option. !P Replace with current comport. !C Replace with current comport-1. COM1=0 COM2=0 !0 Replace with current download path. !E - 41 - Call program directly without using COMMAND.COM. !M Swap out memory if program needs a lot of resources. !W Wait for return to be pressed before returning to Terminate. !B Replace with current baudrate. !L Replace with current linkrate (14400) !F Name under cursor in filemanager. !CD Change to path where program is located before starting program. !25,!30,!43,!50 Change screen size to 25 lines, 30 lines, 43 lines or 50 lines. Only possible on some systems. !@ When running external utilities that handle a lot of filenames on the command line you can use the listfile feature. It will save all the filenames in a listfile and use it instead. Example: Pkzip SAVE @!@listfile.txt !m Will pack all tagged files in both the filemanager windows into SAVE.ZIP !Q Asks user to input string and replace string with !Q. Powerful when used with the !@ command. Example: Pkzip !Q @!@listfile.txt !m First asks you to input a string which is replaced with !Q. Then pack all tagged files in both the filemanager windows into the filename you entered. @SCRIPT Instead of running an external utility you can start a script. The syntax: @SCRIPT script-name parameter1 parameter2 ... @SCRIPT RUNME.TSL !C 28800 - 42 - Save configuration Save configuration now. If autosave config is on, you will not need to save your configuration. - 43 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Toggles °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Toggles ÆÑÍÍÍÍ͸ ³ Blind support ³ Off ³ Auto save config ³ On ³ Show when Ctrl ³ On ³ ³ Deaf support ³ Off ³ Auto save his. ³ On ³ Show when Alt ³ On ³ ³ Blind transfer ³ On ³ Auto update baud ³ On ³ Show when Ctrl+S.³ On ³ ³ Sound ³ On ³ Backup cfg/phone ³ On ³ Baud in status ³ On ³ ³ Connect alarm ³ On ³ Second backup ³ On ³ ³ ³ ³ Transfer t. beep ³ Off ³ Save before dial ³ Off ³ Mouse ³ Off ³ ³ Key click ³ Off ³ Save scrollback ³ On ³ Enhanced keyb. ³ On ³ ³ Show ScrollText ³ On ³ Save tagfile ³ On ³ ³ ³ ³ Opening screen ³ On ³ Open logfile ³ On ³ ³ ³ ³ Closing screen ³ On ³ ³ ³ Flush Cache ³ On ³ ³ Ask start device ³ Off ³ Auto-open cap. ³ On ³ Import descript. ³ On ³ ³ Start in phone ³ Off ³ Overwrite cap. ³ Off ³ RegInfo bright ³ On ³ ³ Start in top ³ Off ³ Append capture ³ Off ³ Select Sort ³ Off ³ ³ Ask phone ³ On ³ Ctrl in capture ³ Off ³ Shell info. ³ On ³ ³ Phonebook after ³ Off ³ Capture keystrok.³ Off ³ Tag advance ³ On ³ ³ Jump back t. phone³ Off ³ Special capture ³ Off ³ Transfer info ³ On ³ ³ Dialer auto untag ³ On ³ ³ ³ Transfer slice ³ On ³ ³ Quick dialing bar ³ Off ³ Hide passwords ³ On ³ Wrap word chat ³ On ³ ³ Return aborts ³ Off ³ Password check. ³ Off ³ EMSI debug info ³ Off ³ ³ Show big CONNECT ³ Off ³ Crypt cfg/fon ³ Off ³ Alt-K infoscreen ³ On ³ ³ Numlock carrier ³ Off ³ Ask at Alt-X ³ Off ³ ³ ³ ³ Private dialing ³ Off ³ Ask at Alt-H ³ Off ³ Reset toggles ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍ; Blind support Read BLIND.DOC for more information. Deaf Support Flash screen before making alarm or other bells generated by Terminate. Blind transfer Use the special transfer window when Blind support is enabled. This function can be turned off for those blind persons that want the full transfer window even though it can be a little confusing. Sound Turn on/off all alarms/beeps. You can also set a time period where sounds could be disabled. Connect alarm Make a sound when carrier is received. Transfer then beep Keep on beeping until any key is pressed after a file transfer is completed, will timeout after 60 seconds. Key click - 44 - Make a click sound when pressing any key. Show ScrollText You can disable the scrolltext in the Alt-O menu if you think it is annoying and want to have a quiet screen. Opening screen Skip the TERMINATE picture when starting (only registered users). Closing screen When leaving Terminate you can disable the last screen. Ask start device If you are using several devices, it might be a useful feature for you to select the current device when starting up Terminate. Start in phone Jump directly to the phonebook at startup. Start in top After loading a phonebook, place menubar at the top. Ask phone When changing phonebooks (Alt-D) with P, this will ask if this phonebook should be default for the current device. If you think it is annoying just turn it off and it will make it the current book every time you change book. Phonebook after When you get hung up by the system you just called or logoff the system, this function will allow you to force Terminate directly into the phonebook afterwards. Jump back to phone Upon a no connect string like BUSY or NO CARRIER, dialling is aborted and returns to phonebook. Dialer auto untag When you connect to a remote system, Terminate will untag all entries that have the same 5 first characters in the system name. Quick dialing bar Use Quick Dialling Bar in phonebook. Return aborts If enabled then Return will hangup the line instead of Escape when dialing from the phonebook. - 45 - Show big CONNECT When carrier is detected a gigantic CONNECT picture will be shown. Numlock carrier Turn on numlock when a carrier is detected and off when carrier drops. Private dialing If you do not want to show others the prefix, number or suffix you are using when dialing, you can turn this on. It could be to protect confidential numbers or dialing code passwords. Auto save config Makes sure your configuration is always saved. Only disable when special testing is needed. Auto save history Save and load the contents of history strings at startup/closedown Look in Alt-F9 for more information. Auto update baud Update baudrate in phonebook to show the last connect rate obtained on that system. Backup cfg/phone Make backup files of: Configuration (.CBK) Phonebooks (.PBK) Note files (.NBK) Second backup The configuration and the phonebooks are the most important datafiles for Terminate. When you enable this function Terminate will create an extra backup of these files if Backup cfg/phone is enabled. Here is what actually is done: 1. Erase TERMINAT.2BK 2. Rename TERMINAT.PBK -> TERMINAT.2BK 3. Rename TERMINAT.FON -> TERMINAT.PBK 4. Write new TERMINAT.FON The same procedure is followed for the configuration and note files. Save before dial When you are installing a new device or setting up new drivers, you should save your phonebook before dialing, because if your driver does not work it could hang the machine and you would lose your changes. When you are sure everything works, you should turn off this function. Save scrollback - 46 - Save the entire scrollback buffer and position in TERMINAT.SBK and reload next time you startup Terminate. Save tagfile Load latest tagfile at startup. The file is called TERMINAT.TBK and is placed in the Terminate directory. With this function enabled both filenames and tagged filenames are remembered for next time. Open logfile Enable logfile at startup. Auto-open capture Enable the auto-open capture feature. Overwrite capture Force overwrite of capture when the auto-open feature is used. Append capture Force appending to the old capture file when the auto-open feature is used. Ctrl in capture If disabled, then Ctrl codes will be filtered off in capture files. Capture keystroke When capturing with Alt-L or Autocapture. By turning this on, all the keystrokes that were pressed in terminal mode are recorded. Special Capture Capture keystroke must be enabled to use this. If you press an A then [A,65] will be saved in the capture file. The 65 is the ASCII value for 'A'. Please do not abuse this function. Hide passwords If hide is on, all characters typed will be shown as dots on the screen when any password is entered. Password checking Use the password checker, when entering passwords. Terminate will warn you when your password that is too easy to guess. Terminate will search through the file of bad passwords called PASSWORD.BAD (Normally in the utility directory). You should never use passwords that only consist of numbers or the same letter like '911' or 'AAAA'. You should also never use your wife/girlfriend/children or any other human names, because they are the first names a hacker will try with. If you have a dog called Fido, you can mix in some numbers like: 'F0I1D2O3' nobody will then guess it because the combinations are too high and will take too many tries. If you only use this type of password, the only way a person can get your passwords is if he gets direct access to your computer or access - 47 - the system you are calling. Crypt cfg/fon Encrypt configuration file and all phonebooks next time they are saved. The encryption will change each time. Ask at Alt-X Ask: "Are you sure?" when pressing Alt-X in Terminal mode. Ask at Alt-H Asks if you are sure you want to hangup the line when pressing Alt-H. Show when Ctrl Change status line when holding down Ctrl, Left+Right Shift or Alt+Shift in terminal mode. Show when Alt Change status line when holding down Alt in terminal mode. Show when Ctrl+Sh Change status line when holding down Ctrl+Shift in terminal mode. Baud in status When enabled Terminate will show the connect bps in the status line when you are online. The device speed is really not important because normally the port is locked at 19200 or 38400 (If using a modem faster than 2400 baud). If for some reason you don't want the connect bps to be shown you can turn it off here. Mouse Allow use of mouse. Enhanced keyboard Allow use of F11 and F12 on enhanced keyboard (AT). Flush Cache Flush diskcache immediately after saving configuration and any phonebooks, to make sure nothing is lost. Import descript. When uploading, Terminate will search FILES.BBS/DESCRIPT.ION for a description of the file. When you are finished uploading and the system asks you for the description, you can press Alt-F9 and send that descript- ion. This will only operate if you select 16 or fewer files to upload. RegInfo bright If you bought Terminate PROFESSIONAL the registration information will be shown when pressing Alt-O. If you want to use dark gray when - 48 - showing the information (almost invisible) turn this off. Does not work with all colours. Select sort When selecting for example phonebooks (FON) a small selector will pop op on screen. Yes, will sort the files alphabetically. No, will sort on time and put the newest on top. Shell information Show information on screen when calling external programs. Tag advance When anything is tagged, then jump to next line. Transfer info Enable/Disable statusbar, activity bar and block information. If you suspect something is slowing down the system, then turning this off might improve the speed a little. Transfer slice Release some timeslices while transfering files, giving more time to the other tasks. Wrap word in chat Use wordwrap in chat mode. EMSI debug info Appends EMSI/IEMSI information to EMSI.TXT. This function should only be turned on for debugging purposes or if you are simply just curious about what actually goes on. This function will not work if network lock has been performed:- to protect the security on larger installations. Remember to turn it off it you don't use it and erase EMSI.TXT. Alt-K infoscreen To help you understand the Alt-K function, a window is displayed with useful information the first time you press Alt-K from terminal mode. After a while you don't need this information anymore and should disable it here. Reset toggles Sets all toggles to 'factory' settings. These settings are the same as the first time you accessed this menu. - 49 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Modem and dialing °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ When sending strings to your modem, you can do some extra things: ~ 1/2 second pause ^~ Send the character ~ << DTR low (should be set so your modem will hangup) >> DTR high ^A..^Z This allows you send control characters. A ^A will only send an ASCII #1, because the ASCII value of a 'A' is 65, then Terminate will deduct 64 and send that value instead. ^M = #13 = Carriage return. Most terminal programs allow you only to enter these values, but in Terminate you also press Alt-A to call the ASCII selector. Instead of having ATZ^M, you could enter ATZ and press Alt-A and choose the ASCII #13 sign. ^^ will send a ^ in case you need that. | Carriage return (#13). || will send a single |, sometimes you might need this if your username has a |. (Used at some 7-bit systems) Example: '<<~~~>>~ATZ^M' will lower DTR, wait 1.5 seconds, raise DTR, wait 0.5 seconds, send modem reset+#13. (DTR means Data-Terminal-Ready and is sometimes also refered to as TR on some modems.) ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Modem and dialling Ƹ ³ Install modem ³ ^M Return ~ « sec. pause << DTR low >> DTR high ³ ³ Init string ³ ³ ³ Dial prefix/suffix ³ ³ ³ Exit string ³ ³ ³ Connect string ³ CONNECT ³ ³ No connect strings ³ ³ ³ Hang-up ³ 100 ^M~~~+++~~~ATH0^M ³ ³ Ring/Ok string ³ RING^M^J OK^M ³ ³ Dial time ³ 45 seconds ³ ³ Dial cancel string ³ ^M~^M~ ³ ³ Redial timers ³ Delay: 2 Pause: 60 seconds ³ ³ Auto-answer string ³ ATA^M ³ ³ Auto answer ³ Off ³ ³ Baud change ³ Before: ~~~+++~~~ After: ATO^M ³ ³ Modem string delay ³ 0 ³ ³ Force initstring ³ No ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; - 50 - Install modem Õµ Total modems : 237 ÆÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Modem Quick install Ƹ ³ USRobotics 16800 Dual Standard w/FAX ³ ³ USRobotics 16800 HST or Dual Standard ³ ³ USRobotics Sportster 14400 ³ ³ USRobotics Sportster 14400 FAX/modem ³ ³ USRobotics Sportster 9600 v.32 ³ ³ ZOOM/Modem HC2400R ³ ³ ZOOM/Modem MX2400R ³ ³ ZOOM/Modem HC2400S (SendFax) ³ ³ ZOOM/Modem MX2400S (SendFax) ³ ³ ZOOM/Modem V.42bis (2400 baud) ³ ³ ZOOM/Modem 14400 FAX/modem ³ ³ ZyXEL U-1496, U-1496B, U-1496E V.32bis V.42bis ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Choose one of the default modems, from the modem database. Some of the settings will also allow you to save the configuration inside your modem, if the modem supports this. If you have already set up your modem you should not need to run this. The main reason for having this setup is because the factory defaults of most modem manufacturers do not give best performance. My first good old USRobotics Dual Standard modem took me around a month back then to get the best performance out of it. Newer modems like ZyXEL and others have now learned how important it is to setup the modems correctly as burnt-in factory defaults that can be recalled with AT&F if a user makes a mistake. Setting up the modems from the factory will save many support calls to your modem distributor and allow them to sell the modems even cheaper. Including your own modem in Terminate's database You can install your own TERMINAT.MOD file if you sell a modem that is not listed in the database using the TERMINAT.INS installation script. Look in DOCS\MODEMSET.DOC, create the structure in the file called TERMINAT.MOD. You cannot change TERMINAT.MOD yourself, but you can create your entries and send them directly to us or to the nearest registration site. - 51 - Init strings ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Init strings Ƹ ³ Init 1 ³ Default ³ ATZ^M ³ ³ Init 2 ³ Definable ³ ATZ^M~~~AT S7=60 S0=0 V1 X4^M ³ ³ Init 3 ³ Definable ³ AT&C1&D2S0=0S7=60V1X4Z^M ³ ³ Init 4 ³ ³ ³ ³ Init 5 ³ ³ ³ ³ Init 6 ³ ³ ³ ³ Init 7 ³ ³ ³ ³ Init 8 ³ ³ ³ ³ Init 9 ³ ³ ³ ³ Init 10 ³ ³ ³ ³ Send all ³ No ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; An init string will be sent right after startup and Terminate will not wait for any response from the modem. The best thing is to always save your setup inside the modem, if the modem supports that, and then only send an "ATZ^M" to reset the modem. Some modems are not capable of saving these settings and require the setup to be sent each time it has been turned off. You should always first try to make the modem hangup when lowering DTR. This is normally done by giving the command AT&D2, but look inside your manual to be sure. Then you should set the carrier detect to follow DCD (Data-Carrier-Detect) line, this is normally done by sending an AT&C1 to the modem. Another good init string that works with most modems: ATZ^M~~~AT S7=60 S0=0 V1 X4^M Reset modem, Set dial timeout to 60 seconds, set modem not to pickup phone, enable verbal response codes, enable extended response codes (like BUSY). All these command are HAYES commands, which almost every modem in the world supports. If you have a non-HAYES and no manual, you are in trouble... Here are some others you can try out if that does not work: ATS0=0Q0E1X4^M , ATE1X1Q0V1S7=60^M If you want Terminate to always start dialing a certain number you could also insert @DIAL 4 6 8. Where numbers are the entry numbers in the phonebook. Look below for more information on HAYES commands. Send all This function will allow you to send all init strings to the modem when starting up Terminate. This can only be used when you only have 1 modem attached. Remember to put some ~ characters after the init strings, otherwise your modem might not be fast enough for the commands. Remember if you have several devices (modems) attached only the line for that device will be sent. Blank init strings will not be sent to the modem. - 52 - Dial prefix/suffix ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Prefix / Suffix Ƹ ³ Dialing prefix 1 ³ Default ³ ATDT ³ ³ Dialing prefix 2 ³ Alternate ³ ATDT ³ ³ Dialing prefix 3 ³ Force 9600 ³ ATDT ³ ³ Dialing prefix 4 ³ Force 14400 ³ ATDT ³ ³ Dialing prefix 5 ³ Disable VFC ³ ATDT ³ ³ Dialing prefix 6 ³ Disable V34 ³ ATDT ³ ³ Dialing prefix 7 ³ Disable V42b ³ ATDT ³ ³ Dialing prefix 8 ³ Disable MNP ³ ATDT ³ ³ Dialing prefix 9 ³ Pulse ³ ATDP ³ ³ Dialing prefix 10 ³ ISDN-bundling ³ ATB3DT ³ ³ International code ³ ³ 00 ³ ³ Dialing suffix 1 ³ Default ³ ^M ³ ³ Dialing suffix 2 ³ ³ ^M ³ ³ Dialing suffix 3 ³ ³ ^M ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; When dialing, the modem wants a dial command. The complete string it will build will look like this: prefix+number+suffix. Example: ATDT43623990^M The international prefix is for calling a system abroad. The different suffixes can be used if you have some kind of calling card and have to call another number first and enter a code or number. Remember when you are calling a system, that the terminal program is not responsible for getting the connect. Any terminal program just sends these commands to the modem, and waits for a reply from the modem. The reply is either a connect string and a carrier detect signal, or a no connect string like 'BUSY' or 'NO DIAL TONE'. So if you cannot get a connection you should never blame the terminal program. It is your modem that is not set up correctly. You must remember that not all modems will connect with each other and maybe need a special dial string to turn off MNP compression or something like that, but it depends on which modem you have. Generally if you cannot connect with a system, try turning all error correction and compression off and try again, that will allow you to connect to many systems anyway. Look in the modem manual for instructions on how to turn this off. If you have these problems with your modem, it will not help changing terminal programs, because it will not change anything at all. Sending 'ATDT' is done in the exact same way in all terminal programs. International code All you international phone numbers in the phone must be prefixed with this code to ensure that the cost management will function properly. This code is only for use with the point system when using international nodelists and when creating new phone entries in the phonebook. Exit string When leaving Terminate this string can be sent to your modem. Some pocket modems require the DTR to be set low, so it will turn off the use of the battery. This can be done by giving the command '<<'. Connect string All normal Hayes compatible modems will give you a result code starting - 53 - with CONNECT when getting a carrier. Terminate will wait for this string and grab everything after it until a return (#13) or a maximum of 4 seconds. This will be placed in the connect string which can be seen by pressing Shift-Esc everywhere. From this connect string the modem speed will be decided by Terminate. With a "CONNECT 14400/ARQ/V32", the connect speed will be set to 14400, which will be used for calculating CPS rates, performance percentages, etc. No connect strings When dialling another system, your modem will send back some strings to inform you that a connection could not be established. If your modem is non-standard, you might need to change these. NO CARRIER This string will be returned if the timer S7 runs out. BUSY If the line is busy, this string will be returned, this may not always work. Old analog lines can have problems detecting busy at all, even though the modem should be able to. Some modems will even abort dialling if the BUSY response is enabled. If you have problems just change your dial command to ATX1DT instead of ATDT. VOICE Some modems can detect if it is a human answering the phone, then quickly abort the dial and pick up the phone. Some modems will try to trick you and sometimes tell you that you got a voice call, so if you have problems turn it off like the busy command or look in your manual. NO DIAL TONE When starting to dial, if the modem does not get a dial tone before the time set in the S6 register (default 2 seconds), then the modem will give you this response. NO ANSWER If no-one answers the phone, some modems will return this string. BLACKLISTED In some countries like Germany the modems are required by law not to call the same number too often in a short time. For example in Germany if you call the same number more than 12 times without waiting 30 seconds between each call, the modem has to take a 30 seconds break for you, before it can dial the that number again. Hang-up It is very important for your modem to be capable of hanging up correctly. The best way is to set your modem to drop the carrier when the DTR (Data-Terminal-Ready) goes low. This is the fastest way of hanging up and is always preferred. You need to have a proper modem serial cable with all the correct pins connected and your modem correctly set (AT&D2 normally). The number you can edit is the time to hold down DTR before raising the line again in 1/100 seconds. 100 is 1 second and should be enough. If your modem is faster you can decrease this value. If there is no possible way to hang up by lowering DTR, you can send a string to your modem that should force the modem to hangup: ^M~~~+++~~~ATH0^M (Send return, wait 1.5 seconds, send +++ (go into command mode), wait 1.5 seconds, send on-hook command.) - 54 - If this does not work you need to consult your manual. Ring/Ok string The Ring string is used for identifying incoming calls in Terminal and in Host mode. When an incoming call arrives in terminal mode, a window will pop up and allow you to pick up the phone within 10 seconds. The OK string will be used in the hostmode to be sure that the modem has been reset correctly. Dial time Timeout for dialling in Terminate, remember you also must set the S7 register. You should always set the S7 register to more than the Dial Time in Terminate, otherwise the modem will abort first with a NO CARRIER instead of Terminate saying timeout. Dial cancel string Hayes modems, will normally abort dialling when they receive a return (#13). The default for Terminate is ^M~^M~, send return, 1/2 second delay, send return, 1/2 second pause. But if your modem does not respond to this you could enter <~~> to hangup the line first before dialling. Redial timers The delay timer is the pause time between calls. The pause timer is for how long to wait in seconds when all tagged numbers have been dialled before starting over. This means that after first calling all the tagged entries (with only the delay time between the calls), Terminate will then wait for the pause time. A good feature if you are calling a system with x lines and they are all busy since you can first try all the lines quickly and then delay some minutes and try all the lines again. Auto-answer string This string will tell your modem to try connecting when an incoming call arrives or to connect in the hostmode. Auto answer When an incoming call arrives in terminal mode, if OFF then you will be asked to pick up the phone, if ON then the Auto-answer string will be sent to the modem. Baud change When a connection has been made and you have told Terminate to change baudrate (only when using 2400 baud and calling a 1200 baud system). Then this command must be used. Modem string delay If your modem reacts very slowly, you can insert a delay when sending strings to the modem. Also all Function keys will then have this delay. Force initstring - 55 - Normally Terminate will not send the init. string if the modem has detected carrier, but you can force Terminate to send the string at startup even if the carrier is high. This is useful when you have a modem that cannot save the setup and the carrier (&C0) is set when turning on the modem. - 56 - RS-232C INTERFACE DB-25 (25 pin connectors) Pin Assignment Short Signal Flow ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ 1 Chassis Ground GND Terminal <-> Modem 2 Transmit data TR Terminal --> Modem 3 Receive data RD Terminal <-- Modem 4 Request to send RTS Terminal --> Modem 5 Clear to send CTS Terminal <-- Modem 6 Data set ready DSR Terminal <-- Modem 7 Signal ground GND Terminal <-> Modem 8 Carrier detect DCD Terminal <-- Modem 20 Data terminal ready DTR Terminal --> Modem 22 Ring indicator RI Terminal <-- Modem DB-9 (9 pin connectors) Pin Assignment Short Signal Flow ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ 1 Carrier detect DCD Terminal <-- Modem 2 Transmit data TR Terminal --> Modem 3 Receive data RD Terminal <-- Modem 4 Data terminal ready DTR Terminal --> Modem 5 Signal ground GND Terminal <-> Modem 6 Data set ready DSR Terminal <-- Modem 7 Request to send RTS Terminal --> Modem 8 Clear to send CTS Terminal <-- Modem 9 Ring indicator RI Terminal <-- Modem Lines 2,3,4,5,6,8,20,22 (DB-25) or line 1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9 (DB-9) are sometimes referred to as 'The big eight'. - 57 - HAYES There is no guarantee that all the commands will work with your modem, but if you have some special needs, you might like to change the settings. It is not possible to make a complete list of all commands, since most modem manufacturers have their own special settings. ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ HAYES STANDARD COMMANDS ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Command ³ Parameters ³ Function ³ Default ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ AT ³ ³ Attention code; indicates start ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ of command line. ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ +++ ³ ³ Escape code; changes modem from ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ on-line to command state; see ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ registers S2 and S12. ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ D ³ ³ Dial ³ DP ³ ³ ³ s = 0..9 # * ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ () - . / ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ P ³ Pulse dial ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ R ³ Dial an "originate-only" ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ modem (reverse mode) ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ T ³ Touch Tone(tm) dial ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ , ³ Pause when dialing ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ; ³ Return to command state ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ after dialling ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ A/ ³ ³ Repeat command; redial; the ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ only command neither preceded ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ by AT nor followed by a ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ carriage return ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ A ³ ³ Answer call immediately ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ E ³ n = 0,1 ³ 0 = no echo ³ E1 ³ ³ ³ ³ 1 = echo ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ F ³ n = 0,1 ³ 0 = half-duplex ³ F1 ³ ³ ³ ³* 1 = full-duplex ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ I ³ n = 0..? ³ information ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ L ³ n = 0..? ³ volume control ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ M ³ n = 0..2 ³ 0 = speaker OFF ³ M1 ³ ³ ³ ³* 1 = speaker ON until carrier ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ 2 = speaker always ON ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ O ³ ³ Return to on-line state ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Q ³ n = 0,1 ³ 0 = result codes sent ³ Q0 ³ - 58 - ³ ³ ³ 1 = result codes not sent ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ S? ³ r = 0..17 ³ Read register r ³ None ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ S= ³ r = 0..17 ³ Set register r to value n ³ None ³ ³ ³ n = 0..255 ³ ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ V ³ n = 0,1 ³ 0 = digit result codes ³ V1 ³ ³ ³ ³* 1 = word result codes ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ X ³ n = 0..? ³ 0 = basic result code set ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ 1 = extended result code set ³ X0 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Z ³ ³ Reset ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ C ³ n = 0,1 ³ 0 = transmitter OFF ³ C1 ³ ³ ³ ³* 1 = transmitter ON ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ H ³ n = 0..1 ³ 0 = ON hook (hang up) ³ None ³ ³ ³ ³ 1 = OFF hook ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ &C ³ n = 0,1 ³ 0 = carrier always on ³ &C0 ³ ³ ³ ³* 1 = carrier follow DCD line ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ &D ³ n = 0,1,2,3 ³ 0 = Do not hangup when DTR is low ³ &D0 ³ ³ ³ ³ 1 = return to command-state DTR ³ ³ ³ ³ ³* 2 = when DTR low, hang up modem ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ 3 = same as 2, but also resets ³ ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ * = advised ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ HAYES STANDARD REGISTERS ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Register ³ Range ³ Units ³ Function ³ Default ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ ³ ³ --DIALLING-- ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ S6 ³ 2..255 ³ seconds ³ Wait time for dial tone ³ 2 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ S8 ³ 0..255 ³ seconds ³ Length of pause (caused ³ 2 ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ by comma) ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ S11 ³ 50..255 ³ milli- ³ Duration and spacing of ³ 70 ³ ³ ³ ³ seconds ³ Touch-Tones (tm) ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ ³ ³ --ANSWERING-- ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ S0 ³ 0..255 ³ rings ³ Number of rings on which ³ 0 ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ modem answers call ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ S1 ³ 0..255 ³ rings ³ Number of rings occurred ³ 0 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ ³ ³ --DIALING & ANSWERING-- ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ S7 ³ 1..255 ³ seconds ³ Wait time for carrier ³ 30 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ S9 ³ 1..255 ³ .1 second ³ Carrier detect response time ³ 6 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ S10 ³ 1..255 ³ .1 second ³ Time between loss of carrier ³ 7 ³ - 59 - ³ ³ ³ ³ and hang up ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ ³ ³ --CHARACTER DEFINITIONS-- ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ S2 ³ 0..127 ³ ASCII ³ Escape code character ³ 43 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ S3 ³ 0..127 ³ ASCII ³ Carriage return character ³ 13 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ S4 ³ 0..127 ³ ASCII ³ Line feed character ³ 10 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ S5 ³ 0..32,127³ ASCII ³ Backspace character ³ 8 ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ - 60 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Filenames and paths °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ For Paths that do not start with a \ or a drive:\, (C:\) is assumed always to be within the Terminate home path. So DOWNLOAD\ would actually be: C:\TERMINAT\DOWNLOAD\, so you will save a little typing: ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Filenames and paths Ƹ ³ Download manager ³ ³ ³ Upload directory ³ UPLOAD\ ³ ³ Script directory ³ ³ ³ Translation file ³ .XLT ³ ³ Phonebook directory ³ PHONE\ ³ ³ Capture directory ³ CAPTURE\ ³ ³ Capture file ³ TERMINAT.CAP ³ ³ Log file ³ TERMINAT.LOG ³ ³ Editor filename ³ Q.EXE !M ³ ³ Line command ³ -N@LINE ³ ³ Viewer filename ³ LIST.COM ³ ³ Protocol directory ³ PROTOCOL\ ³ ³ Shell directory ³ ³ ³ Swap file ³ TERMINAT.SWP ³ ³ Utility directory ³ UTILS\ ³ ³ Manual directory ³ MANUAL\ ³ ³ Run after download ³ ³ ³ Run after upload ³ ³ ³ Qwk reply files ³ DANBBS.REP ³ ³ Semaphore directory ³ ³ ³ Exit file ³ TER-EXIT.NOW ³ ³ Filelist manager ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; - 61 - Download manager ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Download manager Ƹ ³ Default download ³ Use wildcards ³ ³ Download paths ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ *PICTURES ³ DOWNLOAD\PICTURES\ ³ ³ *SOUND ³ DOWNLOAD\SOUND\ ³ ³ ³ DOWNLOAD\PICTURES\ ³ ³ ³ DOWNLOAD\PICTURES\ ³ ³ ³ DOWNLOAD\PICTURES\ ³ ³ *.QWK ³ C:\QWK\ ³ ³ *.OPX ³ C:\XPRESS\ ³ ³ NODEDIFF.* ³ C:\TERMINAT\UTILS ³ ³ Z?-DIFF.* ³ C:\TERMINAT\UTILS ³ ³ ³ DOWNLOAD\ ³ ³ ³ DOWNLOAD\ ³ ³ ³ DOWNLOAD\ ³ ³ ³ DOWNLOAD\ ³ ³ *MAIL ³ IN\ ³ ³ *ARCHIVE ³ DOWNLOAD\ARCHIVES\ ³ ³ *.* ³ DOWNLOAD\OTHER\ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Terminate allows you to have 3 different download directories, which can be set for each phonebook entry, so if you call systems with one kind of file, lets say OS/2 files, you would surely not want them to get mixed up with your normal DOS files. The wildcard system in Terminate allows you to specify any DOS wildcard (*,?) and the directory where to save the files. This will also work when using the point system. If you change the first wildcard path you will be asked if this path should be copied to all wildcard paths. *MAIL Is a wildcard for mailpackages MO#, TU#, WE#, TH#, FR#, SA#, SU# where the # is a number from 0-9 and .PKT files. *ARCHIVE Is a wildcard for the most popular archivers, currently supported: ARC,ARJ,ZIP,LHA,LZH,DWC,SQZ,ZOO,PAK,HYP,RAR,EXE Will also match when the two first characters matches and the 3 is a number from 0-9, like: AR1, ZI5 etc. *PICTURES Wildcard for the following picture formats: GIF, PCX, JPG, GFB, BMP, TGA, EPS, LBM, APF, PCL, TIF, WPG *SOUND Wildcard for the following sound formats: WAV, MOD, VOC, MID, SND If use wildcards is the default download path, the download manager will be started right after each download using an external protocol, and this will move all the downloaded files to the correct locations just as if you had downloaded with an internal protocol. If you run the Download manager from Alt-O, R then the current download path will be used. That means if you have a directory you want to get sorted using the wildcards. Press Alt-R select the directory. Then press Alt-O, R and run the function. Upload directory When starting an upload, you can force the filemanager always to start in - 62 - this directory. Script directory This is where the PreScription files, (Terminate's new script language) will be placed. These are files of type .TSC and .TSL as well as the Include files (see PreScription help for more details) Translation file Which XLT file should default to be loaded at startup. No filename here means no translation, which is normal. Phonebook directory Where to place phonebooks (*.FON), phonebook backups (*.PBK), translation files (*.XLT) and keyboard mapping files (*.KBD). Capture directory Where all the capture files should be stored *.CAP Capture file Which file should be the default when pressing Alt-L (capture) or Alt-I (Screen image) Log file Name of the logfile. Terminate will keep this file open all the time if the logfile toggle is ON. A problem could occur when using networks because you cannot write to the same file from several Terminates. You will have to define different logfiles or turn it off. You could enter the name TER%NET%.LOG and then have an environment variable in your AUTOEXEC.BAT: SET NET=04 and then have a separate number for each machine. Terminate will then replace the %NET% so the filename would be TER04.LOG Editor filename An external editor is something you must have. I admit that people are used to different editors and hate learning new keys. Qedit seems to be one of the most used and is surely one of the best. You can request or download QEDIT from DAN BBS. You should put a !M on the line, so memory will be swapped out before calling the editor. Line command The @LINE is where the line number is replaced when needed. This is for example used when you edit one of the manual files. Then Qedit can start up and place the cursor on the same line as in Terminate. Viewer filename A viewer is a program that will allow you to look in big files without editing. Terminate has a built-in filelister, which works almost like the original LIST.COM program by Vernon D. Buerg. Use @LIST for the internal lister or give the entire filename here. Just remember that with the internal lister, you can grab and import to all other functions like the SmartNote (Alt-A) or the history strings (Alt-F9). - 63 - The internal lister Use normal cursor movements to browse the file. F Search for a keyword F3 Search for same keyword again F9 Search for same keyword again backwards H Toggle hexmode Alt-K String grabber (Shift cursor to adjust size) T Tag files Protocol directory If you do not give any path with the external protocols, this directory will be assumed. Shell directory When shelling to DOS with Alt-J, change to this directory. You could enter a C:\ if you want to have the root directory as current when shelling. If blank, then the Terminate directory will be used. In the filemanager Terminate will always change to the current directory in the current window. Swap file If you do not have enough XMS or EMS memory, Terminate will swap the memory to a swapfile. You should define a different swapfile for each person that runs Terminate if you are on a network. Use the environment variables to fix this like the logfile: TER%NET%.SWP Utility directory When opening some files, this directory will first be searched. Place all other files that have nothing to do directly with Terminate in this directory and don't ever allow the Terminate home directory (eg: C:\TERMINAT) to be filled with all kinds of garbage. Some of the files that should be placed in here are: MAGIC.TXT List of magic names for the point system NODELIST.000 Nodelists for the point system PASSWORD.BAD Bad passwords for the password checker PASSWORD.TXT Passwords for the point system TERMINAT.CST Costfile TERMINAT.EXT Extensions for the file manager TERMINAT.LGO File to show at startup if registered TERMINAT.MOD Quick modem install WELCOME.ASC Welcome picture for the hostmode Manual directory Where to search for the help and manual files, if you run several Terminate's on a network you can save diskspace by using the same manual files. Run after download Run after upload After an internal or external download/upload, this program or batch file can be called. This could be useful if you have some kind of program - 64 - to import descriptions into a FILES.BBS file, for example. !0 on commandline will be replaced with the current download directory. Qwk reply files When you write offline mail with an offline reader like TerMail or other QWK readers. Then your messages will be saved in a file. This file should be specified here. When you then upload the file Terminate will delete it afterwards. Semaphore directory This directory will contain the exit file, look below for more information. Exit file The exit file is used to force Terminate to shutdown without actually being at this workstation. Terminate will look if the exit file exists at startup and will only exit if someone touches (change filedate/time) this file. You can also delete the file and create it again in a batchfile like this: DEL C:\TERMINAT\TER-EXIT.NOW ECHO 100>C:\TERMINAT\TER-EXIT.NOW (Exit with errorlevel 100) On a network you should turn this off or have the directory point a place where Terminate only has read access, so the users cannot force other tasks down. If you want to be able to shut a particular Terminate down use SET NET=1 and have TER-EXIT.NO%NET% as exit file. The places from where you can shut Terminate down: The hostmode The point system The fax receive Terminal mode Filelist manager You will probably download a lot of filelists from a lot of different systems. To quickly access and tag files from these filelists, you can press Alt-F6 and F, select the filelist and tag files with T. You MUST have a separate directory for the filelists, which ONLY contain filelists and information that can be packed into the archives. Please do not try to mix up other files. For security reasons you cannot use the Terminate path or the ROOT of any drive. The Pack and Unpack commands are used to save space on your hard disks, since filelists are not used all the time and can easily be stored in a way that only uses half or less diskspace. - 65 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Protocols °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Protocol options Ƹ ³ Internal ³ ³ ³ External ³ ³ ³ Default ³ Zmodem ³ ³ Allow auto ³ Yes ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Default Where to put the cursor as the default when pressing Page-Up or Page-Down. Allow auto Global switch for allowing auto-download for all protocols. Internal protocols ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍѵ Internal protocols Ƹ ³ Enable protocols ³ ³ ³ CPS adjust ³ 5 % ³ ³ Hangup after time ³ 10 ³ ³ Hangup default ³ No ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ Zmodem/ZedZap: ³ ³ ³ Allow CRC-32 ³ Yes ³ ³ Allow recovery ³ Yes ³ ³ Check file date ³ No ³ ³ Touch file ³ No ³ ³ Increase filename ³ Yes ³ ³ Always overwrite ³ No ³ ³ Zmodem signature ³ rz..** ³ ³ Auto upload ³ Yes ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ASCII send/receive ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Enable protocols ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍ͵ Enable/disable protocols Ƹ ³ þ Z Zmodem ³ The most used protocol ³ ³ þ P ZedZap ³ Zmodem 8k for 2 Terminates ³ ³ þ A Ascii ³ Text files ³ ³ þ X Xmodem ³ Not good, last choice ³ ³ þ 1 Xmodem 1k ³ Not good, last choice ³ ³ þ E Xmodem 1k-G ³ Fast, but not good ³ ³ þ Y Ymodem Batch ³ Ok, but Zmodem is better ³ ³ þ G Ymodem-G ³ No correction, only with MNP ³ ³ þ K Kermit ³ Host/Server/Unix ³ ³ þ C CIS Quick B+ ³ CompuServe ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Press SPACE to toggle use, if you disable some of these protocols, then they will also be disabled in the hostmode. Press RETURN to change - 66 - the hotkey. CPS adjust If you think your CPS rate is a little wrong you can adjust the values by telling what percentage Terminate should add. Many external protocols will claim that they get a much higher CPS rate than possible or use other expressions like 'throughput', 'speed' etc. and then people will think that their protocol is much faster. Don't be fooled, Zmodem is still one of the fastest, and it is normally not worth the work to setup an external protocol, unless it is a full duplex protocol like BiModem, HSLink, Janus or HydraCom, which transfers files both ways at the same time. Remember even if an external protocol gives you 1-2% faster transfers that time will be lost just by swapping out memory and calling the protocol. Hangup after time When using the internal protocols you can toggle if you want to hangup right after the transfer. This option allows you to choose how many seconds to wait before hanging up. Hangup default When transferring files, which value should be used as default. If Yes, then Terminate will try to hangup after every transfer. You can also change this value while transfering files by pressing 'H', only available with internal protocols. If Yes then after a download with an external protocol, Terminate will countdown and hangup if not aborted. Please remember that you should only hangup after a transfer if you are allowed by the sysop. A lot of sysops do not like this, so please ask him/her first. Zmodem/ZedZap: Zmodem is the most used protocol in the world now, it has many special features and allows you to control a few things. When auto-downloading with ZedZap 8k, instead of Zmodem, the other end must send a 'ZAP' before the normal Zmodem string, then Terminate will start up ZedZap instead. This is currently only supported by the internal hostmode in Terminate. Allow CRC-32 CRC means 'cyclic redundancy check' and is for checking if a block received or sent was error free. A very few, old Zmodems might only support CRC-16 check, which is less secure than the CRC-32 check. You should only turn this off in very rare cases. Allow recovery If a file transfer is aborted, you can resume the transfer where you left off if this feature is enabled. Check file date When resuming a transfer, Terminate will test to see if the filesize is the same this time, but you can also set Terminate to test the file date / time. (In this case, Touch File should not be enabled.) - 67 - Touch file Zmodem will also transfer the original file date/time stamp. If you enable this option, all files received will be touched with the current date/time. Increase filename If the file already exists and Terminate decides not to recover the file, Terminate will increment the filename like this: DANBBS.ARJ -> DANBBS.AR1 If DANBBS.AR1 exits Terminate will keep on incrementing, first 1..9, then A..Z, then abort. Always overwrite With this option Terminate does not check if the file already exists and simply overwrites the existing file. Zmodem signature In terminal mode Terminate will scan for this string if autodownload is enabled. When Terminate gets this string Zmodem download will start. On some systems you need to shorten this string into: 'rz'+#13 , but normally you should not change this. Auto upload When a '**'#24'B01' is received then Terminate will assume an upload is wanted and enter the protocol selection menu. ASCII send/receive ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ ASCII transfer Ƹ ³ Settings for Receive/view and Send/view ³ ³ ³ ³ Strip high bit Off ³ ³ Remote abort char 24 (ASCII) ³ ³ ³ ³ Ä Send Ä ³ ³ ³ ³ Local echo On ³ ³ Blank line -=> 1 Space On ³ ³ Line pacing 0 (1/10 seconds) ³ ³ Character pacing 0 (1/10 seconds) ³ ³ CR translation None ³ ³ LF translation None ³ ³ ³ ³ Ä Receive Ä ³ ³ ³ ³ CR translation None ³ ³ LF translation None ³ ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Strip high bit Strip away characters with ascii values above 127. Remote abort char - 68 - If this option is not #0 then the remote can abort the transfer by sending this character (normally #24 (Ctrl-X) is used). Local echo When transferring a file, this allows you to see what it is you are sending. Blank line -=> 1 Space Some BBS editors will abort on blank lines, so this option will take blank lines and turn them into a single space. #13#10 -=> #20#13#10 = Blank, carriage return (CR), linefeed (LF) Line pacing How many 1/10 second to wait between each line. Some BBS editors are not fast enough to accept all the characters if you just send a lot of lines without a pause. Character pacing If you want it to be real slow, you can also make a pause between each character - but this is slow and is not advised. CR translation LF translation When sending or receiving carriage returns and linefeeds you can change or strip them with this option. This is only used in special cases and should not normally be changed. A CR can be either stripped or changed into either a LF or CR+LF. Same goes for a LF. External protocols ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ External protocols Ƹ ³ þ Puma/Mpt ³ ³ þ BiModem ³ ³ þ HSlink ³ ³ þ Super Zmodem ³ ³ þ Lynx ³ ³ þ CMP - Chatmanager ³ ³ þ Jmodem ³ ³ þ Zmodem external ³ ³ þ Zmodem GIFLINK ³ ³ þ Fax receive ³ ³ Free slot ³ ³ Free slot ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; External protocols are often used by experienced comms. users. Transferring files has become some kind of artform, where everybody tries to outdo each other. The internal Zmodem is often the preferred protocol, since otherwise it can sometimes be impossible to keep track of how many files have been downloaded. Especially on networks or in multitasking environments, where several people have access to the download directory. Terminate calculates the bytes downloaded by first checking the download directory size before and after the protocol has been called. Then the - 69 - CPS rate is calculated based upon the time from leaving Terminate until back in Terminate again. If you are in a multitasking environment, please do not delete or change any files in the download directory while an external transfer is in progress. I have set up all the most popular protocols and a lot of people have tested the settings, but there can be many, many problems setting up an external protocol if you haven't tried it before. Don't believe that the actual CPS rate that external protocols claim to achieve is always correct, there are some limitations that are impossible to exceed and still some protocols claim to be better than is physically possible. Another reason for using an external protocol is that it offers some special things that are not included in the terminal package, like the BiModem/HSLink which are full duplex protocols (that means you can transfer files both ways at the same time and even chat). These are high-tech protocols and impossible to implement in a terminal program because the specifications are not released. Well, if you are a newcomer, there will be a while before you will need these. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Change protocol Ƹ ³ Protocol name ³ Zmodem external ³ ³ Information ³ The immortal protocol ³ ³ [Path]+Filename ³ GSZ.EXE ³ ³ Ask at downloads ³ No ³ ³ Change to UL dir ³ Yes ³ ³ Change to DL dir ³ Yes ³ ³ Batch ³ Yes ³ ³ Hotkey ³ Z ³ ³ ³ !P=COM1-8 !C=COM0-7 !0=DownPath !E=NoShell !@=lstfile³ ³ ³ !M=Swap !W=Wait !B=Baud! L=Link !I=Irq !A=Addr !H=Hex³ ³ Upload parameters ³ handshake on port !P speed !B sz ³ ³ Download param. ³ handshake on port !P speed !B pB4096 rz -Z -m -rr ³ ³ Auto-download ³ Yes ³ ³ Signature ³ rz.**. ³ ³ Signature hex ³ 727A0D2A2A180000000000000000000000000000 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ If [Path] not is used, protocol path will be used instead. ³ ³ A signature is the chars that the sending protocol is sending to start. ³ ³ Zmodem looks almost like this: rz**B0000000000 You can monitor a new ³ ³ protocol with the ASCII download (PgDn,A), and then convert the bytes to ³ ³ hex. Just a small part of the signature (5-10 chars at most) is needed ³ ³ depending on how redundant it is. All 00 at the end are ignored. ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Protocol name The name that is presented in the menus. Information Any information you would like to see in the menus. [Path]+Filename Filename of the protocol. If no path is supplied then the protocol directory will be used. Ask at downloads Ask the filename, should only be used with non-batch protocols. Change to UL dir - 70 - Before starting the external protocol, change to upload directory. Some external protocols are limited to not allow the upload directory in unregistered versions. Change to DL dir If you change to the download directory, then you will normally not have to enter a path on the command line, because the external protocol will then use the current directory. Batch Batch protocol means that it can transfer several files after each other. Protocols like Zmodem, Bimodem, Hslink and Ymodem Batch are batch protocols while Xmodem is a not. Hotkey Which key should activate this protocol in the protocol menu. Upload parameters / Download param. When using an external protocol you will need to send some parameters to the program, to tell the program the port, baudrate and other information it might need. !P Replace !P with port-number. If you are using COM2 then !P will be replaced with a '2'. !C Same as above but some protocols use port 0..7 instead of 1..8 If you are using COM2 then !P will be replaced with a '1'. !B Replace !B with baudrate. !L Replace !L with connect baud rate. !0 Replace !0 with downloadpath, example: C:\TERMINAT\DOWNLOAD\ !M Swap Terminate out to memory or disk first, try first without this parameter and see if you have enough memory to run it without swapping. This will speed up the start of the protocol. !W Wait for return before returning to Terminate. You can use this for testing the protocol, if the protocol gives you some kind of error message and the screen clears too fast to see it. !E Do not use a second COMMAND.COM, call directly. If you use this parameter then you must give the complete path+filename+ext, like: C:\PROTOCOL\HSLINK.EXE !E !M !I Replace with current comport IRQ. !A Replace with current hardware port address of comport. !H Replace with current hardware port (Hex) !@ When uploading many files you will have a problem using external protocols, since your maximum command line is 255 characters - 71 - and sometimes even less, fortunately some protocols allow you to give a file containing the files to upload. This is a normal text-file with one full path+filename on each line. A command line like: S @!@UPLOAD.LST will save all the filenames in the text file UPLOAD.LST and start the protocol with: S @C:\TERMINAT\UPLOAD.LST Note that the Terminate command !@ will be removed and the Terminate path inserted if no full path is given on the command line. With internal protocols you never use this. Auto-download Test for incoming signature and try to start the protocol without having to press PageDown and select the protocol manually. Signature Signature hex You can either edit the signature as a string and enter special characters with the Alt-A function or you can enter the signature in hexnumbers. Look at all the default external protocols for more examples. Transfering files ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍѵ File transfer Ƹ ³ Protocol ZedZap ³ Total errors ³ ³ ³ Check/size Crc32/8192 ³ Total blocks 444 ³ Request file ³ ³ File name DANBBS.ARJ ³ Blocks rcvd 12 ³ Start file ³ ³ File size 3635942 ³ Blocks left 432 ³ Synchronize ³ ³ Bytes rcvd 98304 ³ Total kr 0,98 ³ Received block ³ ³ Bytes left 3537638 ³ Costs kr 0,02 ³ Received block ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Received block ³ ³ Throughput 15012 CPS ³ Estimated time 4.05 ³ Received block ³ ³ Efficiency 234% ³ Elapsed time 0.07 ³ Received block ³ ³ Diskspace 873.673.728 ³ Remaining time 3.58 ³ Received block ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Received block ³ ³ Progress ³ 2% Û±±±±±±±±°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ Received block ³ ³ Connect ³ CONNECT 64000/ARQ/X75/0700 ³ Received block ³ ³ Status ³ Ok ³ Received block ³ ³ Log ³ ³ Received block ³ ³ Path ³ DOWNLOAD\ ³ Received block ³ ³ Device ³ Fossil ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ ³ Info ³ RTS write Off ³ ISDN B-channels 1 (cFos)³ ³ ³ Hangup N ³ Hardflow Off ³ . Add ³ ³ ³ Skip ³ Softflow Off ³ . Remove ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; DAN BBS ISDN ³ COM2: 64000ú8N1 FX ³ Avatar/ANSI ³L ³kr 0,02 This is the transfer window which is used while transfering files from or to your system. Most of the information is quite obvious, but some entries need an explanation. Total / Costs - 72 - If you are using the cost system in Terminate here you will be able to see how much the file will cost to send for you or the remote site. You can also see in the status line what the total is for this call. Disk space Terminate will only test diskspace before each file and calculate the remaining disk space. Since most files you receive will be compressed you must have as much space as the size of the file you are about to receive, even when you are using compressed drives, like Stacker, DoubleDos or Novell DOS. If you are running out of disk space, you have 20 seconds to abort hangup. If you still are online you will be asked to enter a new download directory, which can also be created here, then the transfer will be continued. Progress Will give you a moving bar when the transfer is in progress. In this way you will know if your computer hangs. Path When you are receiving several files you can change the download path. When you change this path, then the next file(s) will be saved in the new directory. Hangup Pressing H will toggle hangup after transfer. This can be used if you are leaving the house and have a big download or upload in progress. When the transfer is finished then a window will appear and you will have 10 seconds to abort the hangup. Skip rest of file When downloading several files with Zmodem, you can sometimes skip the current file and proceed with the next one. Not all Zmodem protocols will accept this skip command, so if it does not work you should abort the transfer and select the files again, without the unwanted file. S will activate the skip function in Zmodem/ZedZap. Music while transfering Simply press F10 while transfering files and you will jump to the CD-player. Select a song and return quickly to the transfer screen as fast as possible. RTS low while writing Request-to-send can be set low if your system gets too many CRC-errors. Setting this line low, means that the modem will not accept anything from the other modem, and it can then save without also having to receive bytes in the receive buffer at the same time. The Auto-RTS function in Terminate will allow you to setup how many errors you will accept before enabling. If triggered you will see the word 'AutoOn' instead of 'Off'. For more information look in the communications setup menu. - 73 - ISDN channel bundling While you are downloading or uploading files you can add additional B-channels by pressing cursor up/down. This is however only available if your fossil driver supports it and is installed to bundle channels. The other end must also support channel bundling. Currently these functions are only supported by cFos. Using ISDN datalines are now quite normal in Europe (Euro-ISDN) and can give you much higher CPS rates than any modem can ever achieve. A single B-channel which normally costs the same as a normal call will give you CPS rates from 7500-8000 CPS per channel or in other words 500k per minute. To increase speed further you can increase the number of B-channels while you are still online. With cFos it is possible to reach 15800 CPS with 2 B-channels, 22500 CPS with 3 B-channels and more than 30000 CPS with 4 B-channels or in other words 2 megabyte per minute. An ISDN2 line has as standard 2 B-channels which can give 15800 CPS depending on how fast your machine is. Of course you pay extra per channel, but if you have 100 megabyte, it is actually possible to get them to a fast machine in around 1 hour. Batch upload PgUp,Alt-B To prepare a list of files to upload before calling a system, use this function. Remember that it will only work with protocols like Zmodem that are capable of sending several files at the same time. The list of files to be uploaded will be stored in the utility directory as UPLOAD.TXT Commands Space Tag/untag file E Edit line manually Insert Insert line Delete Delete line F Filemanager selects a file and inserts name on this line Return Upload file under menubar U Upload all tagged files A Upload all files * Invert tags + Tag all - Untag all - 74 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Emulations °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ -=> E M U L A T I O N S <=- What is an emulation An emulation is the thing in Terminate that handles your screen and keyboard control. It decides how to translate the received data from a system to colors and characters on your screen. If you do not require any special settings everything will already be set to best performance and you will not need to change anything. Emulations available in Terminate ANSI ANSI is the most used protocol in the world. ANSI uses the same control codes as ANSI.SYS. The special variation called ANSI-BBS is the prefered and should be used for normal BBS use. The ANSI emulation supports the VT-102 scrolling commands, but you remember not to turn on ANSI music codes since there are escape codes that conflict. ANSI-BBS is the default protocol in Terminate, which will ensure that you can connect to most systems without changing anything. Avatar Avatar is a emulation that is used now by much BBS software. The benefit of Avatar is that the control codes are fewer characters (binary) and there are compression codes for multiple characters normally speeding up the screens 100% compared to ANSI. However Avatar has a problem with using the XonXoff codes as screen commands and therefore you must be sure to disable software flow control if you want to use this emulation. Using Avatar with ANSI-BBS fallback will ensure you fast screen updates whenever possible and both Avatar and ANSI commands are accepted at the same time. If you log onto places only using ANSI or ANSI-BBS codes, you could select the ANSI-BBS or ANSI emulation instead for faster internal performance. Other variation are also available, but should only be used in special cases where the others give you problems. VT-52 Is a very old emulation that is hardly used anymore. It is only provided to you for backwards compatibility. VT-100 The original VT-100 emulation in Terminate has been developed to follow the DEC standards very carefully. The strict mode will therefore not allow any highbit characters. You can however use the relaxed mode to get around this. Only a few screen attribute functions are defined in VT-100 which includes Bold, Underline (special color), Blink and reverse. Definable colors are not a part of the VT-100 specifications and if you will need it you should select the ANSI emulation which is a relaxed VT-100 with colour codes. - 75 - National character sets Both the VT-100 and VT-220 support automatic by default the following codepages: 437, 850, 857, 860, 863, 865 and all the national characters for each codepage automatic for all the languages defined in the DEC standards making Terminate having the best international VT emulations and will work in most cases in the following languages. British Dutch Finnish French Canadian German Italian Danish Spanish Swedish Swiss In other words, we support 11 languages each 6 codepages supporting a total number of 66 combinations, which is an unheard of number that we have not seen matched in any DOS communication program. A translation table is no longer needed and everything will in normal cases be automatic. VT-220 The original VT-220 in Terminate has as well as the VT-100 been developed to follow the DEC standards very carefully. VT-220 is a more advanced emulation than VT-100 and have some special functions like 132 columns on screen, use of 8-bit characters, re-programming of keyboard, selective erase and much more. We have tried to include the complete VT-220 with as many features as possible to give you the best possible emulation. The host might request your keyboard type and if you need to force a certain keyboard you can force the following: British, Flemish, French-Canadian, Danish, Finnish, Dutch, Italian, Swiss French, Swiss German, Swedish, Norwegian, French Belgian and Spanish. Please note that colours are not a part of the VT-220 specifications. Debug emulations The two debug emulations found in Terminate have various purposes only needed by developers of host systems or other communication packages. In hex mode you will see the the received characters as [xx] where xx represents the value in hex. An "A" would become [41] In Ascii mode characters in the picture to the right will replaced with the mnemonic that represents the value of the incoming character. Only use this emulation when you are testing. All the data on the screen will be saved to the capture file if the capture file is open. - 76 - Value Mnemonic Value Mnemonic Value Mnemonic Value Mnemonic 0 [NUL] 10 [LF] 20 [DC4] 30 [RS] 1 [SOH] 11 [VT] 21 [NAK] 31 [US] 2 [STX] 12 [FF] 22 [SYN] 255 [0xFF] 3 [ETX] 13 [CR] 23 [ETB] 4 [EOT] 14 [SO] 24 [CAN] 5 [ENQ] 15 [SI] 25 [EN] 6 [ACK] 16 [DLE] 26 [SUB] 7 [BEL] 17 [DC1] 27 [ESC] 8 [BS] 18 [DC2] 28 [FS] 9 [HT] 19 [DC3] 29 [GS] ÕÍÍÍ͵ Emulation setup Ƹ ³ Default terminal ³ ³ Setup terminal ³ ³ Edit keyboard ³ ³ Doorway setup ³ ³ Reset all terminals ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Terminate provides 16 terminal slots and each of these slots can be setup to act in different ways. Each terminal slot can be assigned one emulation and different settings. For example you could have 3 different VT-100 emulations each with a different base color. This terminal slot can then be assigned to a phonebook entry and used whenever you dial that entry. To make it easier to understand please look at the following picture: Terminal slot 1 ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ> Emulation 1 Terminal slot 2 ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ Emulation 2 Terminal slot 3 ÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄ> Emulation 3 Terminal slot 4 ÄÄ¿ ³ Emulation 4 . ³ ³ . . ³ ³ . . ÀÄ>ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ> Emulation 10 . . . . . Each terminal slot also has additional settings that can be set for each slot. That means if you need two almost equal VT-100 terminals, you can configure both to different terminal slots and even put in a little comment which will be shown when you select the emulation with Alt-T or assign a terminal slot to a phonebook entry. Default terminal ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Select Terminal ÆÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͸ ³þANSI-BBS ³ ANSI for Bulletin Boards ³ ³ ³ ANSI ³ Normal ANSI ³ ³ ³ Avatar/ANSI ³ Avatar/0* with ANSI-BBS fallback ³ ³ ³ VT-52 ³ Emulate a DEC VT52 terminal ³ ³ ³ VT-100 ³ Emulate a DEC VT100,VT102 terminal ³ Strict ³ ³ VT-100 ³ Emulate a DEC VT100,VT102 terminal ³ Relaxed ³ ³ VT-220 ³ Emulate a DEC VT220 terminal ³ Strict ³ ³ VT-220 ³ Emulate a DEC VT220 terminal ³ Relaxed ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Which terminal slot should be default when starting up Terminate. - 77 - The þ marks the default startup slot. Setup terminal Depending on which emulation you select you can change various options. For ANSI/Avatar/VT-52 the following menu is used: ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Terminal setup 1 Ƹ ³ Emulation ³ ANSI-BBS ³ ³ Comment ³ ³ ³ Keyboard file ³ ANSI .KBD ³ ³ Statusline ³ Yes ³ ³ Default color ³ þ ³ ³ Numlock ³ No change ³ ³ Options ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Scroll screen ³ Yes ³ ³ Local echo ³ No ³ ³ Add linefeed ³ No ³ ³ Strip high ³ No ³ ³ Erase backspace ³ Yes ³ ³ Ignore null ³ Yes ³ ³ ANSI music ³ Yes ³ ³ Center screen ³ Yes ³ ³ Auto ANSI ³ Yes ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ For VT-100 the menu looks like this: ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Terminal setup 10 Ƹ ³ Emulation ³ VT-100 ³ ³ Comment ³ Strict ³ ³ Keyboard file ³ VT100 .KBD ³ ³ Statusline ³ Yes ³ ³ Default color ³ þ ³ ³ Numlock ³ No change ³ ³ Options ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Code page ³ 865 Auto-detection ³ ³ Relaxed mode ³ No ³ ³ Erase backspace ³ Yes ³ ³ Scroll screen ³ Yes ³ ³ Wrap line ³ Yes ³ ³ Add linefeed ³ No ³ ³ Terminal ID ³ VT-100 ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ - 78 - For VT-220 the menu looks like this: ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Terminal setup 12 Ƹ ³ Emulation ³ VT-220 ³ ³ Comment ³ Strict ³ ³ Keyboard file ³ VT220 .KBD ³ ³ Statusline ³ Yes ³ ³ Default color ³ þ ³ ³ Numlock ³ No change ³ ³ Options ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Code page ³ 865 Auto-detection ³ ³ Relaxed mode ³ No ³ ³ Erase backspace ³ Yes ³ ³ Scroll screen ³ Yes ³ ³ Wrap line ³ Yes ³ ³ Add linefeed ³ No ³ ³ Terminal ID ³ VT-220 ³ ³ Keyboard ID ³ Auto-detection Danish ³ ³ VT print file ³ PRN ³ ³ Lock keyboard ³ No ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Settings for emulations Emulation Which emulation should be used for this terminal slot. Comment A small comment that will be shown when you choose default Terminal and Terminal in the phonebook. If you have a terminal without the statusline enabled you could make a comment about it here. Keyboard file If you want a special keyboard file (.KBD) to be loaded when this terminal slot is selected. You can overwrite this in the phonebook by entering another keyboard mapping for that phonebook entry and you can always at any time load a new keyboard with Alt-=. Statusline When using a terminal slot, you can choose to show the statusline on the screen. This is normally always turned on. With this option you can select a terminal slot for a phone entry that has the statusline turned off when you call that system. Remember that switching off the statusline when using VT-100 or VT-220 emulation has no effect since the VT-100 screen is specified to 80x24 and the VT-220 is either 80x24 or 132x24. Line 25 cannot be used when using these two emulation, so there is no need to turn it off there. Default color What color to use as default when selecting terminal. Numlock - 79 - Whenever terminal slot is in use you can force numlock to be turned on/off/unchanged. Scroll screen Normally Terminate will scroll the screen down, but some systems will not need this, so you can just change this setting if you have problems. Local echo Toggles local echo. Local echo is sometimes also called DUPLEX. Local echo off = Full duplex Local echo on = Half duplex When local echo is on, the characters you type will echo on the screen. If you have a modem connected, you may then see the characters twice every time you press a key. You normally always use local echo off (Full duplex) Add linefeed When Terminate gets #13 it is interpreted as if Terminate had also received a linefeed. Strip high Strip all characters above ASCII 127 on incoming traffic. Should not be used normally. Erase backspace When pressing backspace (ASCII 8) then if this option is On, the cursor will move 1 back and erase the character, Off will only move the cursor 1 back. Default is On. Ignore null If a system sends nulls (#0), Terminate ignores them when this is turned on. TTY and VT52 emulations ignore these. ANSI music Allow ANSI music when using this emulation. Note that VT-102 cannot use ANSI music because a scroll command ESC[M starts with the same code as ANSI music. Center screen If you are using a screen size more than 80, lets say 132, and call a system that only uses 80 chars (most systems), then Terminate can center the screen for you. That means position 1 on the screen will be recalculated for all screen writes with (132-80)/2 = 26 as left margin. Auto ANSI Some systems send an ANSI request cursor position; if enabled Terminate will respond and the other end will assume you are capable of ANSI. - 80 - Special VT-100 and VT-220 settings Code page VT-100 and VT-220 will detect your codepage but you can also force the use of a certain codepage is needed. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Select codepage Ƹ ³ 865 Auto-detection ³ ³ 437 United States ³ ³ 850 Multilingual - Latin I ³ ³ 857 Turkish ³ ³ 860 Portuguese ³ ³ 863 Canadian-French ³ ³ 865 Nordic ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Relaxed mode Will VT-100 allow 8 bit characters. Please note that the relaxed mode is not part of the official DEC standard and is only included for compatibility reasons. VT-220 in relaxed mode will send 2 byte escape sequences instead of the normal 8-bit. It has been included for compatibility reasons. Wrap line Allow wrapping at end of line. CR+LF will be sent if last column is reached. Terminal ID VT-100 and VT-220 will return a terminal ID code, telling the other end 'Yes I am a VT-xxx terminal'. However some systems might need your end to respond with a different terminal ID. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Select terminal ID Ƹ ³ VT-100 ³ ³ VT-101 ³ ³ VT-102 ³ ³ VT-220 ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; - 81 - Special VT-220 settings Keyboard ID VT-220 will normally respond to the host with the correct keyboard code, however in certain situations you might need to force the host to think you are using another keyboard and that is what the following menu is used for. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Select keyboard ID Ƹ ³ Auto-detection Danish ³ ³ US ³ ³ British ³ ³ Flemish ³ ³ French-Canadian ³ ³ Danish ³ ³ Finnish ³ ³ German ³ ³ Dutch ³ ³ Italian ³ ³ Swiss French ³ ³ Swiss German ³ ³ Swedish ³ ³ Norwegian ³ ³ French Belgian ³ ³ Spanish ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; VT print file VT-220 has special commands to either print a line or the entire screen on your printer. Terminate supports these commands, but gives you the option of sending the output to a file instead of directly to the printer. If you want to ignore any print command, simply blank out this field. PRN is printer 1, but you can also use LPT1, LPT2 or LPT3. Lock keyboard VT-220 has the option of allowing the host to re-program the following keys on a original terminal: f6..f14, Do, Help, f17..f20. These keys are in Terminate placed at F6..F10 & Shift-F1..Shift-F10 and by enabling this toggle, you can prevent your keyboard from ever being re-programmed. Normally you would not do this since there usually is a good reason for the host to program your keyboard and these keyboard settings are not saved permanently in the keyboard files unless you specifically ask for it by editing after a re-programming and saving afterwards. - 82 - Edit keyboard ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ³ ³ F1 Sh-F1 C-F1 Bo Bendtse ³ Keyboard mapping ³ F2 Sh-F2 C-F2 Kastanie a ³ ³ F3 Sh-F3 C-F3 2620 Alber ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ F4 Sh-F4 C-F4 Danmark^M ³ F5 Sh-F5 C-F5 ATM0 Keypad * ÿ ³ F6 Sh-F6 C-F6 ATM1 Keypad - - ³ F7 Sh-F7 C-F7 ATDT#43# Keypad + + ³ F8 Sh-F8 C-F8 ATDT*43# Keypad . . ³ F9 Sh-F9 C-F9 ATI4 Keypad / / ³ F10 Sh-F10 C-F10 AT&V Keypad<Ù ³ F11 @DIAL 5 6 Sh-F11 C-F11 ATI6 ³ F12 Sh-F12 C-F12 AT$H ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ Tab ³ Keypad 0 0 Grey CUp CurUp Sh-Tab ³ Keypad 1 1 Grey CDn CurDn Insert ³ Keypad 2 2 Grey CLf CurLf Delete ³ Keypad 3 3 Grey CRt CurRt Bckspace ³ Keypad 4 4 Grey Ins C-Home ³ Keypad 5 5 Grey Del Home C-End ³ Keypad 6 6 Grey Home End C-PgUp ³ Keypad 7 7 Grey End C-PgDn ³ Keypad 8 8 Grey PgUp Enter C-Bckspc ³ Keypad 9 9 Grey PgDn Esc = Exit Enter = Edit Grey PgUp/PgDn=Up/Download if blank ³ AVATAR.KBD Each keyboard file contains a complete set of codes that will be sent when you press the function or special keys on your keyboard. Different emulations need special characters to be sent when, for example, you press F1. You have 20 chars for each entry and 40 chars for the Ctrl-F1..Ctrl-F12 keys. C- = Ctrl Sh- = Shift As you can see in this AVATAR.KBD file, I have set up my name on Ctrl-F1. Then my name will be sent in terminal mode when I press Ctrl-F1. It's a good idea to insert your name, address, city, etc, here because most systems will ask you for this information and then you don't have to enter it manually over and over again. A special command is @DIAL, which you can insert anywhere. When you then press this key. Terminate will enter the phonebook, tag the entries and start dialing the numbers. @DIAL 5 6 7 8 9 10 Will tag and then start dialing these entries. If you have a system you call very often, you can enter the entry number from the phonebook here and then you can call this system by pressing just one key. In the example F11 is used. Remember to turn on enhanced keyboard in toggles first or use keys other than F11 and F12. You should not change Grey PgUp/PgDn unless 100% necessary, because these keys are used for the upload and download menu. Another default setting only for Denmark is Ctrl-F7. This turns off something we call "knock on door" or "call waiting". Which means that, on - 83 - digital lines while we are talking to another person, we hear a beep when a 3rd person calls. Since this noise on the line might interfere, we turn it off. Ctrl-F8 turns it on again (at the phone company) If you need any special characters here, just press Alt-A while editing - then you can select from the ASCII selector. Terminate will understand both a #13 and '^M' as the same. The reason that ^M will be translated into a #13 (return) when it is sent, is to remain compatible with old terminal programs that don't have an ASCII selector like Terminate and then it would be impossible to edit that character. The keyboard string and modem strings will understand the ^ parameter. ^@ = 0, ^A = 1, ^M = 13. It is because the ASCII value of a M is 77, from that is deducted 64 (77-64) equals 13. The ~ is normally used for pausing 1/2 second, however the same character is used by the Internet, so to actually send ~ you must enter ^~ ^~ Send the character ~ @PRINTSCR Prints the entire screen if specified for a key and that key is pressed. The following parameters can be used/omitted. Output Direct to other than PRN, example LPT1, LPT2, LPT3 FF Send formfeed (ASCII 12) after page LF Send linefeed (ASCII 10) after each line @PRINT Open the capture file to the printer. You can specify LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 after the command to direct to another printer than default (PRN). Doorway setup Terminate supports of course all Doorway options, including special characters reception and printer redirection and comes fully ready to run. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Doorway setup Ƹ ³ Auto Doorway ³ Yes ³ ³ Remote printing ³ Yes ³ ³ Print file ³ PRN ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Auto Doorway When Doorway sends detection codes, allow automatic switch into Doorway mode. You can press Scroll Lock to jump in and out manually all the time as well. Terminate comes fully provided with both a HOST\DOOR.BAT which is installed as default for supervisors in hostmode and a HOST\DOORMENU which is predefined for DOS-shell, running the maileditor remote and running the filemanager remote. Read those files for more information on running Doorway. If you are using fossil drivers like X00 or cFos (ISDN) you just need to change the DOOR.BAT which has all the examples you will need. Remote printing Allow remote printing from all printers on the computer you are controlling. This means that when you dial into the hostmode of Terminate, - 84 - jump to DOS using Doorway and use any program that prints to PRN,LPT1,LPT2 or LPT3 the data would instead of being printed locally on the host, be sent to the Print file below. Print file Where to send the redirected data. Use PRN for your local printer or a filename to save the data for later use. Reset all terminals Set back all settings to installation defaults. Only use this if you have messed up all the settings and something does not work anymore. - 85 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Host mode °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ The host mode / The Terminate BBS The fastest BBS you will ever install. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Host settings Ƹ ³ Device setup ³ ³ ³ Host path ³ HOST\ ³ ³ Send path ³ UPLOAD\ ³ ³ Receive path ³ DOWNLOAD\ ³ ³ Mailer setup ³ ³ ³ Fax settings ³ ³ ³ Enable IEMSI ³ Yes ³ ³ Callback wait ³ 5 ³ ³ Allow sound ³ Yes ³ ³ Shut down pwd ³ ........ ³ ³ New user ³ ³ ³ Public control ³ Startup in public menu ³ ³ Expire ³ Change to new user defaults ³ ³ User external ³ ³ ³ Host-protocols ³ Internal only ³ ³ After user ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Device setup ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Device settings Ƹ ³ Device 1 ³ Async Modem COM2 8N1 ³ ³ Init string ³ ATS0=0^M ³ ³ Ring string ³ RING^M ³ ³ Ring count ³ 1 ³ ³ Answer string ³ ~ATA^M ³ ³ Answer timeout ³ 60 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Use device 2 ³ No ³ ³ Ring wait ³ 550 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Device 2 ³ ISDN CAPI 1.1 ³ ³ Init string ³ ATS0=0^M ³ ³ Ring string ³ RING^M ³ ³ Ring count ³ 1 ³ ³ Answer string ³ ~ATA^M ³ ³ Answer timeout ³ 60 ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Device 1 & Device 2 Which device to use for host mode. Init string You must not setup the modem to answer the modem automatically. The S0 register holds the number of rings before answering - this should be set to 0, then Terminate rather than the modem will answer for you. - 86 - When Terminate gets the ring-string (RING), the answer-string (ATA) will be sent and Terminate waits for a carrier. Ring string The Ring string is used for identifying incoming calls in Terminal and in Host mode. When an incoming call arrives in terminal mode, a window will pop up and allow you to pick up the phone within 10 seconds. Ring count How many rings before answering, if you enter a 0 here then the phone will never be answered. Answer string This string will tell your modem to try connecting when an incoming call arrives or to connect in the hostmode. Answer timeout After sending the answer string to the device. How many seconds is allowed for connecting before aborting. Use device 2 The most likely reason why you would use this function would be that you have 2 devices connected to the same line. Like an AB-adapter/modem and an ISDN-card. If you use a multitasker you could of course set up 2 tasks each running a Terminate host and get faster responses. However if you are running straight DOS you will not have that ability and this is where this function will come in handy. Ring wait Time to listen on each device. 550 means 5.5 seconds which has been tested successfully in Germany for best results. If it works don't touch it. Host path Where to find all ANSI, ASCII, bulletin screens and all other related files for the host mode. Send path Users that are not supervisors are only allowed to download from this directory. Receive path Users that are not supervisors are only allowed to upload to this directory. Mailer setup ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Mailer Configuration ÿ ³ Mailer enabled ³ Yes ³ ³ Request file ³ OKFILE.TXT ³ ³ Password file ³ PASSWORD.TXT ³ ³ Secure inbound ³ ³ - 87 - ³ Event file ³ T-EVENT.BBS ³ ³ After Receive ³ ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Mailer enabled Detect mail sessions and start mailer when needed. Request file Accept incoming file requests. Look in example OKFILE.TXT. Password file File to check for passwords on incoming/outgoing calls. Secure inbound Save incoming files from unprotected (no password) calls in this directory. Event file Filename of the eventfile. Will always be placed in the hostmode directory. Do not include path, however environment variables can be used for multiline environments. (T-EVT%TASK%). Extension will be included by Terminate (.DAT). After Receive After receiving incoming files and mail you can run a program. This program could put files on hold for the system or whatever is required. After the program is finished, the outbound will be rescanned and then the transfer will start. Please be aware that your program must finish quite quickly otherwise you risk that the other end abort. Fax settings ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Fax host settings ÿ ³ Fax receive ³ No ³ ³ Fax init ³ ³ ³ Fax answer ³ ³ ³ Fax internal ³ Yes ³ ³ Fax command ³ RCVFAX 2 /p:1 /r:0 /w:c:\terminat\fax ³ ³ Fax init 2 ³ ³ ³ Fax 19200 ³ Yes ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Fax receive Enable reception of faxes if you have an adaptive answer faxmodem. If this is enabled, Terminate will first check if it has received one of the default fax answer strings (+FCON, CED, FAX) and then also check the customised fax answer string that has been entered in the 'fax answer field' if any. Adaptive answer: If your modem does not support adaptive answer, then you cannot accept - 88 - both incoming faxes and data calls on the same line at the same time. To test if your modem support adaptive answer, enter in terminal mode: AT+FAE=1 + Enter (Class 1) AT+FAA=1 + Enter (Class 2) If your modem says ERROR or something other than OK, then your modem does not support adaptive answer. However, some modems have other ways of enabling this feature. In this case you will need to have a special fax initialisation string. Fax init Extra string to send to modem, to enable special features like other adaptive answer commands. Fax answer If your faxmodem responds with a string other than FAX, +FCON or CED, you must insert this different response in this field. Note: As long as 'FAX' is contained in the response string this will also work for example: 'CONNECT FAX'. Fax internal Use the internal fax receive in Terminate. Terminate can print out the pages if you enable the auto print in the fax configuration. Fax command If you want to use an external program like BGFAX to receive faxes, you need to specify the program or batchfile to start the external fax receive program. Terminate only supports fax class 1 and class 2, but not class 2.0 which is different. If you want Terminate to answer in class 2.0 mode, you must do the following: 1. Disable Fax internal 2. Remove Fax init string 3. Setup BGFAX (use default) 4. Use the fax init 2 string. An example for a USRobotics V.everything modem: AT+FCLASS=2.0+FAA=1+FNR=1,1,1^M Fax init 2 Send this command to modem after all fax initialisation have been done. Fax 19200 When receiving a fax using the internal fax receive and your modem need to be set to 19200 baud, you must enable this feature. Enable IEMSI Enabling IEMSI in the hostmode, allows users of terminal packages that support the IEMSI-login protocol, fast and automatic logon into the hostmode. (Standard: FSC-0056). Callback wait - 89 - To prevent someone from breaking your callback security. Waiting 90 seconds is normally the maximum time the phone company will hold the line if one of the parties hung up. Normally you would only use this function if you have really important information on your machine and want to be sure no-one guesses your password. The callback function will most likely be used by you, if you have a computer at work and are working from home. Allow sound Make sounds when users disconnects, etc. You can still define the global time period, but to be sure never to make any sound here, turn it off. Shut down pwd If a supervisor logs on, the supervisor can shut down Terminate and exit to DOS, so no one can call the host mode again. New user If you have an open system and allows new users, you can here setup the defaults which new users will get the first time they log on. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ New user settings Ƹ ³ New users ³ Yes ³ ³ Security ³ Normal ³ ³ Time per day ³ 60 ³ ³ Expire days ³ 0 ³ ³ Skip questions ³ Yes ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; New users If the system is closed then only users defined in your setup will be allowed to logon. If you have an open system, all users that call will be able to log on - but only with normal user status and only able to up or download within specified directories. If a supervisor logs on, complete access will be granted whether new users are allowed or not. Security Look under user database for a full explanation. Time per day How many minutes is a new user allowed to stay online per day. Expire days How many default expiry days before performing expire action. Set to 0 will disable this function. Skip questions If you do not care about the users details and just want people to login faster you can skip the questions asked. Public control The public menu is controlled by HOST\T-PUBLIC.BBS. In this file you - 90 - can define which files you want to make directly available. Read T-PUBLIC.BBS for more information on the public menu. Expire For each user you can set an expiry date. If you want to use the host mode for subscriptions a certain action can be performed on the day that the subscription expires. Nothing No action will be taken against this user. Change to normal security Change the security level to normal. Change to new user defaults Change the user record to new user defaults. Delete Set the delete flag on the users record. User external ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ User external Ƹ ³ All users ³ Free ³ ³ ³ All users ³ Free ³ ³ ³ All users ³ Free ³ ³ ³ Privileged 0 ³ Free ³ ³ ³ Co-Sysop ³ Boot ³ UTILS\BOOTW.COM ³ ³ Supervisor ³ Doorway ³ HOST\DOOR.BAT !P !B !H !I !M ³ ³ Supervisor ³ Cleanup ³ HOST\CLEANUP.BAT !M ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ News file ³ ³ ³ Public menu ³ ³ ³ Main menu ³ ³ ³ Door files ³ Yes ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ ³ !P=COM1-8 !C=COM0-7 !0=DownPath !E=No Shell !@=listfile ³ ³ ³ !M=Swap !W=Wait !B=Baud !L=Link !I=Irq !A=Addr !H=Hex ³ ³ ³ Run PreScription script: @SCRIPT scriptfile !G=Ansi ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Here you can define what external programs users can call. Please note that Users can call external utilities on their level and all below. That means Co-Sysop's have access to Privileged and All users utilities as well and the sysops have of course access to everything. You can also call a PreScription script directly by using the @SCRIPT command. News file Program or script to run before showing news file. Public menu Program or script to run before entering public menu. - 91 - Main menu Program or script to run before entering main menu. Door files When calling external programs from the host mode, Terminate will create DOOR.SYS and DORINFO1.DEF, these are standard formats which most BBS utilities understand. If you do not want these files to be created simply disable this function. The files will be created in the Terminate home directory. If you want to place the files in another directory simply create a batchfile that first copies the door file to a directory and then calls the external program. Please remember that many doors use a serial fossil driver like cFos or X00. Note that the accesslevel is translated into the following in these files: Terminate Door-files ------------------------ Normal 1 Privileged 10..19 Cosysop 50 Sysop 100 Host-protocols Allows you to select if you want only to use the internal protocol, only the external protocols or all enabled protocols. After user Run a program or batchfile whenever a user logs off. Eg if some processing needs to be done after a user uploads a special file. AFTERHST.BAT example, print a specific incoming file: IF EXITS C:\TERMINAT\DOWNLOAD\PRINTME.TXT GOTO PRINT GOTO END :PRINT COPY C:\TERMINAT\DOWNLOAD\PRINTME.TXT PRN :END (In DOS with no spooler, use PRINT.EXE to avoid out-of-paper problems) Using the host mode The host mode in Terminate is fully built-in, so you will not have to setup anything at all. Just define the password for a user and you are ready to go. The host mode is a mini-bbs which will do the most important functions that a full BBS system will do. ANSI is detected automatically at login. You can use an ANSI editor, like TheDraw, to edit .ANS files. However if you do not want to bother about colours you can simply delete all .ANS files (DEL HOST\*.ANS) and Terminate will just use the .ASC files, which are normal ASCII files that can be edited with a normal editor. The host mode will use the following files: - 92 - WELCOME.ANS/ASC The welcome file shown at login. NEWUSER.ANS/ASC File shown if you allow new users to log on. EXPIRE.ANS/ASC File to be shown to users when their account expires. NEWS.DOC Instructions to create your own news file. NEWS.TXT, NEWS.ANS/ASC The data file for the news file. Use an editor to change. The host mode will check if the NEWS.TXT has changed and compile NEWS.ANS and NEWS.ASC. If you do not want a news file, simply delete NEWS.TXT, NEWS.ANS, NEWS.ASC. NORMAL.ANS/ASC Menu used for Normal and Privileged users. SUPERVIS.ANS/ASC Menu used for Co-Sysops and Supervisors. BULLETIN.ANS/ASC Menu used for bulletin menu. BULLE???.TXT Bulletins to be shown when the bulletin number is entered by a user. BULLE001.TXT will be shown when a user enters 1. Bulletins can be defined between 0-999. GOODBYE.ANS/ASC File to show when the user logs off. T-FILES.BBS Area file definition, define up to 100000 file areas. Edit file using a normal editor. T-USERS.BBS Datafile containing the user's information. T-HOLD.BBS Text file containing all the files that are on hold for users. T-LAST.BBS - 93 - Datafile containing the last callers to your system. - 94 - Terminate Host Mode 14.24 (Sat) 1-Mar-1997 ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±± ±Õ͵ Status ÆÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͸±ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ System Ƹ± ±³ Waiting for a call (1) ³±³ Environment ³ Windows (Pentium) ³± ±ÆÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵±³ Messages ³ Yes ³± ±³ ³±³ Answering ³ Answer- Users -Requests ³± ±Æµ Async Modem COM2 8N1 ÆÍÍÍÍ͵±³ Next Event ³ Call Uplink ³± ±³ ATS0=0 ³±ÆÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵± ±³ OK ³±³ Terminate Mail System ³± ±³ ³±ÆÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Last callers Ƶ± ±³ ³±³ 31 10.27 User: Steve Stacher ³± ±³ ³±³ 31 21.38 User: Andy Roberts ³± ±Æµ COM2: 115200 8N1 ÆÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵±³ 31 22.12 User: Bo Bendtsen ³± ±³ ³±³ 31 22.22 User: Andreas Streit ³± ±Æµ Second device not in use Æ͵±³ 31 22.31 User: Emmet Fitz Hume ³± ±³ ³±³ ³± ±³ ³±³ ³± ±³ ³±³ ³± ±³ ³±³ ³± ±³ ³±³ ³± ±ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ;±ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ;± ±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±± ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ L-Logon U-Users E-Evt F-Files M-Msg P-Lock H-HostCfg O-Cfg J-DOS W-Pwd V-Log Esc Exit Exit the host mode L Login locally Login locally to the host mode - you should only need this when testing host mode. - 95 - U User database manager Allows you to edit, delete and pack the user database. Press Alt-D to dial the voice or data number directly. ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Record 1 ÿ ³ Name ³ Bo Bendtsen ³ ³ Password ³ ...... ³ ³ Security ³ Supervisor ³ ³ Organisation ³ DAN BBS ApS ³ ³ Address ³ Kastanie Alle ³ ³ Address ³ 2620 Albertslund ³ ³ Address ³ Denmark ³ ³ Comment ³ ³ ³ Data phone ³ +45-43623990 / Fax +45-43627178 ³ ³ Voice phone ³ +45-43623331 ³ ³ Expire date ³ 07-Mar-1996 365 days left ³ ³ First call ³ 06-Mar-1995 2 days since ³ ³ Last call ³ 07-Mar-1995 0 days since 23.07 ³ ³ Time per day ³ 1440 ³ ³ Time used today ³ 27 ³ ³ Guest ³ No ³ ³ Callback ³ ³ ³ Private path ³ ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Name The username that will be asked for when the user logs in. Password The password that is needed to access this record. You can leave this field blank and the user will not be asked, but beware about giving supervisor access to a user without password. Security 4 security levels are available. All can be defined in the fileareas definition called T-FILES.BBS which is located in the host directory. Supervisor Visible menu: SUPERVIS.ANS/ASC Access to : Everything, including all fileareas Fileareas : T-FILES.BBS: NP123456789CS Messages : All, including SYSOP and file attaches Co-Sysop Visible menu: COSYSOP.ANS/ASC Access to : Several sysop functions. Fileareas : T-FILES.BBS: NP123456789C Messages : All, including SYSOP Privileged Visible menu: PRIV.ANS/ASC - 96 - Access to : Privileged menu, normally an upgraded user Fileareas : T-FILES.BBS: NP + "123456789" Messages : Only messages to/from user Note that there are 10 different privileged levels.0-9, Meaning that only a user with privileged level 9 have access to all privileged fileareas. Normal Visible menu: NORMAL.ANS/ASC Access to : New users would normally have this level. Fileareas : T-FILES.BBS: N Messages : Only messages to/from user Organisation Which company, organisation, university, school does the user belong to. Address 3 lines containing the full address of the user. Comment Any comment you might like to remember about the user. Data phone Data phone number where the user is calling from. Voice phone Voice number where you can reach the user. Expire date Which date does the user's account expire. First call Which date did the user call your system for the first time. Last call Which date and time of the user's last call. Time per day How many minutes can the user stay online per day. Time used today How much time has the user used today. If this counter exceeds Time per Day the user will be logged off. Guest A guest account will not check time used today at logon and will - 97 - not allow change of personal setup. A guest account does not need a password. Callback ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Callback settings Ƹ ³ Callback ³ No ³ ³ Dial prefix ³ ATDT ³ ³ Dial suffix ³ ^M ³ ³ Phone number ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Callback When a user has callback enabled, Terminate will hangup the line and call back the user. If you choose Ask, Terminate will ask online which number to call and dial that number. Dial prefix Which prefix to use with this callback record. Dial suffix Which suffix to use with this callback record. Phone number The number to callback to. Private path Special path where this user has access. For example if you are a company that has customers or employees that need to transfer files from and to your system like designs or journalistic work, you can ensure absolute privacy by assigning to each user a different directory. If you want several users to have access, just edit each user and enter the same directory. X Export user database Export all users into T-USERS.TXT. E Events ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Event configuration ÿ ³ Use events ³ Yes ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄActionÄÄÄÄÄÄSMTWTFSÄBeginÄParametersÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Daily cleanup ³ Errorlevel þþþþþþþ 00.00 200 ³ ³ Run scandisk ³ Run program þþþþþþþ 01.30 SCANDISK /AUTO ³ ³ Zone mailhour begin ³ System þþþþþþþ 02.30 Answer-No Users- No Req ³ ³ Zone mailhour ends ³ System þþþþþþþ 03.30 Answer- Users -Requests ³ ³ Call Andreas ³ Call system þþþþþþþ 10.04 2453/751 ³ ³ Call SerWiz ³ Call system þþþþþþþ 22.30 254/261 ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Alt-S Sort Events Alt-R Run Event ÃÙ Use events You can define your own events in case that you need run programs or set various options at specific times during the day or week. - 98 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Event 6 ÿ ³ Enabled ³ Yes ³ ³ Name ³ Call SerWiz ³ ³ Days ³ þþþþþþþ ³ ³ Begin ³ 22:30 ³ ³ Type ³ Call system ³ ³ Parameters ³ 2:254/261 ³ ³ Allow host-users ³ ³ ³ Answer calls ³ ³ ³ Allow filerequest ³ ³ ³ Call device ³ Async Modem COM2 8N1 ³ ³ Send files on hold ³ Yes ³ ³ Send netmail only ³ No ³ ³ Call nonCM Systems ³ Yes ³ ³ Pickup Mail ³ Yes ³ ³ Send requests ³ No ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Enabled Use this event record Name Name to show event menu and host menu Days What days during the week is event active. Begin What time does the event start. Type There are 4 types of events: Run program Run any program, batchfile or script (@SCRIPT:script.tsl) Call system Call other system. The following parameters are available. Description Example ----------------- --------- Node/searchstring 2:254/261 Call all systems /CALLALL Call Boss /BOSS:1 (Works line commandline parameter) Errorlevel Exit with the errorlevel in parameters. Only useful when you use the hostmode with the /HOST /LOGIN commandline parameters from a batchfile. System - 99 - Set the following parameters Allow host-users Answer calls Allow filerequest Parameters The data here is specific to each event-type. Allow host-users Allow users to login. Answer calls Answer the device at all. If set to No incoming RING's will simply be ignored. Allow filerequest Allow other systems to filerequest. Otherwise just ignore. Call device What device to use for outgoing calls. Send files on hold Send all files for system, even files/mail on hold. Send netmail only Only send ?UT files from your outbound. Call nonCM Systems Allow calls to system that do not have the CM (Crashmail) flag in the nodelist. Pickup Mail Ask the remote not to send mail during outgoing call. Send requests Send our requests during outgoing call- F Files ÚÄ´ Waiting files and editing other files ÿ ³ Put files on hold for user in database ³ ³ Put files on hold for new user ³ ³ Edit hold file ³ ³ Delete hold file ³ ³ Edit fileareas ³ ³ Edit public control file ³ ³ Edit news file ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ - 100 - Put files on hold for user in database Put files on hold for users. The next time a user calls in, the user will be asked if they want to download the file at once. The files can be automatically deleted afterwards. Put files on hold for new user Just as above except that the user does not exist in your user database. Edit hold file Edit the files with the list of files waiting for users. Delete hold file Delete all files on hold. Edit fileareas Edit T-FILES.BBS which describes the fileareas. Edit public control file Edit T-PUBLIC.BBS for the public menu hotkeys and filenames. Edit news file Edit NEWS.TXT news bulletin shown at login. Edit language file Edit T-TEXT.BBS with all text string in the hostmode. Edit hotkeys Edit T-HOTKEY.BBS which contain all hotkeys in menus. M Edit messages If someone has written a note to you, you will be able to edit and delete messages. P Lock keyboard When a password is defined, the hostmode will always be locked by default. However if you enter the password and later want to enable the locking again simply press P or Alt-P while online. H Host configuration Go directly to host configuration O Configuration Go directly to the Terminate main configuration menu J Shell to DOS - 101 - Shell to DOS from the host mode. Logging in to the host mode Terminate will first detect if the other end supports ANSI. If detected, Terminate will show menus that end with .ANS. If that file is not found or ANSI is not detected then .ASC files will be used. First the welcome screen will be shown, then the user will be asked for a name and password. If callback is enabled, then Terminate will hangup the line and callback to the number specified in the user record. The user will then be asked the same password again and the session will continue in the normal way. The commands: Alt-H Hangup Will hangup and return to host menu. Local only. Alt-Y Yell Start the fullscreen chatter. Local only. Alt-J DOS Jump to DOS. Local only. (B)ulletin View and download bulletins. (C)hat Allows users to page you, the SysOp. Alt-Y will start chat. (D)ownload Download files, from current directory. Only internal protocols that are available can be selected by the users. Zmodem cannot be turned off. (E)rase Delete file in current directory. (F)iles Show files in current directory. If a FILES.BBS is present the user will be aked if that is to be shown instead, just like BBS systems. (G)oodbye Logoff system. (H)D-free Show how much free space on current drive. - 102 - (I)nfo-HD Information on all drives available in your system. (L)ocate Filefinder, allows you to search a drive for specific files. You are allowed to use wildcards (?,*). (M)essage Write message to you, the SysOp (N)ew dir Change to other directory. (R)ead Read messages written by other users. (S)hutdown Shut down Terminate and exit to DOS. (T)ype Type a textfile on screen. (U)pload Upload files into upload directory. Supervisors are asked to choose between the default upload directory or current directory. (0),(1),(2),(3),(4),(5),(6) Call external utilities, look in setup for information. !U on commandline will be replaced with current download path. - 103 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Auto login °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Login strings/scripts Ƹ ³ Script delay ³ 40 ³ ³ Login timeout ³ 60 ³ ³ Strings ³ ³ ³ Mini Scripts ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Script delay How long to wait after connection before starting the login script. Some modems have a long response time, but you can set it to a lower value if your modem is ready right after connect. Login timeout If no auto login has been attempted in x seconds then all checking will be turned off. Checking all the strings can take up some time if you have a slow computer. You can always turn off auto login, by pressing Alt-Q. Login strings ÕÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Login strings Ƹ ³ ³ Incoming name questions Incoming password questions ³ ³ 1 ³ PLEASE ENTER YOUR FULL NAME PASSWORD ³ ³ 2 ³ WHAT IS YOUR NAME KODEORD ³ ³ 3 ³ WHAT IS YOUR FIRST AND LAST NAME ³ ³ 4 ³ WHAT IS YOUR FIRST NAME ³ ³ 5 ³ ENTER YOUR FIRST AND LAST NAME ³ ³ 6 ³ YOUR NAME ³ ³ 7 ³ ENTER YOUR FULL NAME ³ ³ 8 ³ USERNAME ³ ³ 9 ³ NAME : ³ ³ 10 ³ HVAD HEDDER DU ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Enter up to 20 questions - that could be a name question or a password question. When you define these strings you will not need a separate script for every system, Terminate will test all strings for a match. In this way you will be pretty sure to always match a string when logging in to any system. The password questions don't depend which name question is used - all password questions will also be checked. - 104 - Mini Scripts ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Mini Scripts Ƹ ³ Login type Login script ³ ³ Escapes, Name, Password !E!W!N!P ³ ³ Escapes, Name, Y, Password !E!W!NY!13!P ³ ³ Escapes, Name, J, Password !E!W!NJ!13!P ³ ³ Escapes, First, Last name, Password !E!W!F!L!P ³ ³ Escapes, IEMSI !E ³ ³ Name, Password !W!N!P ³ ³ Name, Y, Password !W!NY!13!P ³ ³ Name, J, Password !W!NJ!13!P ³ ³ First name, Last name, Password !W!F!L!P ³ ³ Disable autologin and IEMSI !I ³ ³ 1 Escape, Name, Password !27!W!N!P ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ !Dx Delay x seconds !E Send escapes !W Wait for name question ³ ³ !N Send full name !F Send First name !L Send Last name ³ ³ !P Wait/Send password !I IEMSI off !num (0-255, !13=Return) ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Enter up to 16 mini login scripts. Lets explain an example: !E!W!F!L!P First use the auto escape procedure. !W then waits for one of the name questions to arrive, then firstname+return and lastname+return is sent. The !P will then wait for any of the password questions and send the password when the question arrives. Most scripts for normal BBS systems are already defined, so you should only need to choose which script the system will need. The login procedure runs in the background so all other features are available while trying to auto login. !D Delay for x seconds. !D2 = Delay for 2 seconds !E Simulate a user trying to access a BBS from a mailer. Send cr+cr then esc+wait until other end responds !W Wait for one of the name questions defined arrives !N Send full user name of active user !F Send first name of active user !L Send last name of active user !P Send password from phonebook or from active user !I Disable IEMSI in this session !num Send a control code directly. !13 = Carriage return, !12 = Clear !S Run PreScription script from miniscript. Syntax : !S"SCRIPT parameters" Example: !S"LOGIN" !S"RUNME 1 2 3" Do not make spaces between !S and " - 105 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Users / IEMSI setup °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ There are 10 different user profiles that can be used in 3 ways: When calling systems with the autodialer When calling systems with the pointsystem ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Users/IEMSI Ƹ ³ User 1 ³þ Bo Bendtsen ³ ³ User 2 ³ Guest ³ ³ User 3 ³ Terminat ³ ³ User 4 ³ ³ ³ User 5 ³ ³ ³ User 6 ³ ³ ³ User 7 ³ ³ ³ User 8 ³ ³ ³ User 9 ³ ³ ³ User 10 ³ ³ ³ User 11 ³ ³ ³ User 12 ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ IEMSI ³ On ³ ³ Info time ³ 10 ³ ³ Location ³ London, United Kingdom ³ ³ Phone # ³ 42643827 ³ ³ Prg. Pwd ³ Off ³ ³ Birthday ³ 02-Apr-1965 29 years old (10818 days) ³ ³ Security ³ ³ ³ ³ þ Active user ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; - 106 - Edit user profiles ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ User profile 1 Ƹ ³ User 1 ³ Username ³ Bo Bendtsen ³ ³ User 2 ³ Password ³ ...... ³ ³ User 3 ³ Program Pwd ³ ³ ³ User 4 ³ Comment ³ This is my main username ³ ³ User 5 ³ ³ ³ ³ User 6 ³ ³ ³ ³ User 7 ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ User 8 ³ IEMSI Profile (Interactive Elec. Mail Standard Id.) ³ ³ User 9 ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ User 10 ³ Handle ³ ³ ³ User 11 ³ Zmodem 8k ³ Yes ³ ³ User 12 ³ Hot-keys ³ Yes ³ ³ ³ Quiet ³ No ³ ³ IEMSI ³ Pausing ³ Yes ³ ³ Info time ³ Editor ³ Yes ³ ³ Location ³ News ³ Yes ³ ³ Phone # ³ New mail ³ Yes ³ ³ Prg. Pwd ³ New files ³ No ³ ³ Birthday ³ Screen Clr ³ Yes ³ ³ Security ³ Auto chat ³ Yes ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Username The name of the user to use at logins and to show in the mail session. Password Default password to send if no password is defined in the phonebook. Maybe you have a lot of places where you use the same password. You may think it does not matter, but you will never be sure who uses or abuses your user record in other places. If you use random passwords it is almost guaranteed that only you, and the persons that have access directly to the hardware will know your password, but ONLY ON THAT SYSTEM. If you use the same password all over, maybe a person that is angry with you could use it to call up and write angry letters to the sysop in your name. Program Pwd Program password can be asked when starting up Terminate to ensure that only you and nobody else uses your machine while you are gone for lunch. Smart people could look inside TERMINAT.CFG so it is advised to also set encryption on phonebooks and the configuration file. Comment Any comment you want to remember about this user. User IEMSI settings When you call a system that supports IEMSI logins, you can set these parameters before calling the system: Handle Also known as alias Zmodem 8k When logging on with IEMSI and this function is enabled - 107 - then a 'ZAP' flag will also be presented in protocol flags, 'ZAP,ZMO,KER' without this enabled only 'ZMO,KER'. When receiving the server package Terminate will test for the 'ZAP' flag in capabilities and then enable the ZedZap (Zmodem 8k) protocol instead of the normal Zmodem. At the present time only RemoteAccess 2.00 (release ver.) will support this. Then when autodownloading ZedZap will be selected. When uploading Terminate will place the menubar on ZedZap to inform you that this protocol is needed. Hot-keys Use hotkey on the system Quiet Turn on/off online messages from other users Pausing Turn the MORE Yes/no etc. prompts on/off Editor Use fullscreen editor News Watch the NEWS bulletins at login New mail Search for new mail at login New files Search for new files at login Screen Clr Allow system to send screen clears Auto chat Allow the fullscreen chatter to be used automatically IEMSI Allow Terminate to try logging on with IEMSI. You can also use a login script with the !I parameter if you do not want to globally turn off IEMSI logins. Info time When a IEMSI connection results, how long you want the information to be shown on screen in 1/10 seconds. You can always recall the window by pressing Alt-F4. Location Your city and country. This will be transferred in the IEMSI and EMSI (mail) sessions. Phone # Your phone number can also be transfered in IEMSI and EMSI sessions. Prg. Pwd (Program password) Ask for password when starting Terminate. All 10 Prg.Pwd can be used. If you forget your password and have set encryption on configuration and phonebooks, just delete the configuration file, then the phonebooks will be decrypted. Birthday On many systems that you call for the first time, you will be asked for your birth date. This is done for several reasons: to see how old you are; to be able of sending you a birthday note or to check if you really who you say you are and not someone who has stolen someone else's account. Soon, when you log into a new system Terminate will send the birthday, so you don't have to type it in yourself everytime you log into a new system for the first time. Please note that this is only supported by a few systems like RemoteAccess. Security - 108 - Prevent unauthorised users (particularly in corporate and network environments) from tampering with approved settings or using unauthorised 'phonebooks. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Security Ƹ ³ Configuration ³ ³ ³ Phonebook ³ ³ ³ Point system ³ ³ ³ File manager ³ ³ ³ Screen blanker ³ ³ ³ Comm Parameters ³ ³ ³ Security menu ³ ³ ³ Fax manager ³ ³ ³ Encrypt logfile ³ ³ ³ Prevent shells ³ No ³ ³ Host password ³ ³ ³ Network lock ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Configuration If you enter a password here, then all users will be prompted for this password whenever they press Alt-O. Remember that if YOU forget this password your entire setup will be lost. You must enter a password HERE if you want to protect the following menus: Phonebook Whenever the user wants to use a new phonebook or change anything in an existing phonebook this password must be entered. Point system When pressing Alt-F7 to enter the point system, this password must be known by the user. File manager When pressing Alt-F to enter the file manager, this password must be known by the user. Screen blanker If the screen blanker activates, this password must be entered to defeat it - for example if you leave your machine for an unexpectedly long period. Comm Parameters Protect the Alt-P menu with an extra password Security menu If you want users to have access to the configuration, but not to this menu, just enter any password here. Fax manager - 109 - Protect users from entering the fax manager. Encrypt logfile ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Encrypted logfile Ƹ ³ Secondary logfile ³ F:\SYSTEM\LOGFILES\T-USER%NET%.LOG ³ ³ Password ³ SECRET ³ ³ Decrypt/View logfile ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Secondary logfile If you want to keep an extra logfile of the users activity, you can enter the filename in here. If you are on a network like Novell, then the user should only have Create/Write access to this directory where your extra logfiles are located. When you are using a network with several users, you should always have an environment variable for each machine with a number like: SET NET=07. This would create a file called T-USER07.LOG in F:\SYSTEM\LOGFILES. Password If you also want to encrypt this secondary logfile, you can enter a password here. Decrypt/View logfile This extra logfile is written in a database format. If it is encrypted the only way to view it is from this menu. Remember to protect at least the Security Menu with a password as well. Prevent shells Prevent any kind of external utilities, including DOS-shells. Useful when used for educational purposes. Host password Lock local keyboard with password. Password will unlock keyboard. To locked again, press P in hostmode and Alt-P while online. Network lock ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Network lock Ƹ ³ Lock ³ ³ ³ EXE ³ \\DANBBS\SYS\DANBBS\TERMINAT\TERMINAT.EXE ³ ³ KEY ³ \\DANBBS\SYS\DANBBS\TERMINAT\TERMINAT.KEY ³ ³ CFG ³ \\DANBBS\SYS\DANBBS\TERMINAT\TERMINAT.CFG ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Lock Lock TERMINAT.EXE so it only can be started from a path that you define. This is very useful so users cannot move the Terminate files to a local drive and change the configuration. EXE Complete path (or network-path) and filename to TERMINAT.EXE. - 110 - KEY Complete path (or network-path) and filename to TERMINAT.KEY. With this function you can hide the keyfile anywhere on the network. It is suggested that you rename TERMINAT.KEY to a random filename, like 'ABCDEFGH.IJK' or similar. Then place this file on a network path where the users only have READ access to. CFG Only allow this configuration file to be used with Terminate. If you just want to lock the EXE and KEY, just leave this field blank then you still are allowed to use the /C: on the commandline. You can also use environment variabels: SET TERCFG=0001 \\DANBBS\SYS\DANBBS\TERMINAT\TER-%TERCFG%.CFG Would be expanded to \\DANBBS\SYS\DANBBS\TERMINAT\TER-0001.CFG SET TCONFIG=0050 F:\TERMINAT\TER-%TCONFIG%.CFG Would be expanded to F:\TERMINAT\TER-0050.CFG - 111 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° The Pointsystem °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ -=> T H E P O I N T S Y S T E M <=- The EMSI point system is designed mainly for points in fidonet or other similar networks. It can also be used by companies that have a mailer program running such as Frontdoor, Portal of Power, d'Bridge or Binkley >2.50. It now also supports the old standard called YooHoo/2U2. With this system you can, as a point, totally throw away a frontdoor if you are not using another maileditor. As a default it is set up with TERMAIL With a mail system you can send and receive packed messages and files without getting online to a BBS system. The only demand is that the system you are calling runs EMSI (Electronic Mail Standard Identification). When using the mail system in Terminate you can throw away your fossil driver (serial device driver) and your nodelist compiler. Terminate can use direct port access and read the uncompiled nodelists with large buffers. Maybe this is a little slower than searching a compiled nodelist BUT normal points normally only call their BOSS (uplink) and get their mail and files from there. With Terminate you will not have to find and setup nodelist compilers and this will save a lot of hard disk space. Fidonet, which we are a part of, is the biggest private network in the whole world. It has thousands and thousands of computers connected throughout the entire world. To understand this system you must understand what a node number looks like. This number is an identification number - so if anyone sends you a message from anywhere in the world. The message will be 'routed' through some other systems before reaching the destination. The best part is that you only call your BOSS and send the message - the rest will be taken care of by the network, so you save the phonebill by not calling long distances. The only thing it costs you is the call to your BOSS, which is normally located in your own city or country. You will also be able to participate in conferences where all messages are public. But you will learn all this if you make contact with a Fidonet sysop near you. BBS's belonging to a network will often have a mailer program answer the phone and decide if the caller is another mailer or a 'human' caller. That is why you have to press ESCAPE and then the system says something like: 'Loading BBS, please wait'. If you are calling with the point system you will be recognized as a mailer, and a mail- session will be started. Mail session ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ You dial up and connect The point system tries to handshake (establish EMSI session) Terminate sends all mail-packets/files to system with Zmodem Goes into receive mode and receives mail/files/requested files for you The other end terminates the call, (Terminate will also hangup) The best thing about running this mail system, is that you will start transferring files immediately you have been connected and will not have to log on manually and type anything - everything is fully automatic. Most points in fidonet are users that have had modems for a while and have problems paying their phonebill, because they were hanging online on systems - 112 - quite a lot. Now they can save money because REQUESTING files is much faster and the requests will not appear on their user account under downloads. At our system we allow all points in fidonet to request, but some places you will not be allowed to do this. To understand how the system works you need to understand what a nodenumber looks like. The syntax for a nodenumber in fidonet is Zone:Net/Node.Point. Zone 1 = USA, Canada 2 = Europe, Commonwealth of Independent States 3 = Australia, Tasmania, New Zealand 4 = Latin America 5 = Africa 6 = Asia Many other networks are also using Fidonet Technology and uses normally higher zone numbers. Region A country or part of a larger country is normally specified as a region. A Zone is a group of regions. Net Systems that are linked together, normally due to phonecosts or area dependent. A region is a group of nets. Node A system that belongs to a net. Point If you are a point you will belong under a node also called your boss. You will usually send/receive your mail through your boss. Our nodenumber is 2:254/261.0 (or short 2:254/261). A node is a computer that is always available in zone mail hour, at least. This is a time, usually at night, depending on where you are in the world, where you always can expect to reach the node. Most nodes are also BBS systems where normal users can access conferences and write messages to users on other boards, sometimes in other parts of the world. A node will always have point number .0 . The first point a sysop gets will be .1. Our first point is 2:254/261.1. The SysOp decides for himself the point numbers. For each user profile in the setup you can define a nodenumber. Don't get confused about all the different expressions. To test the system, edit user profile 1 (with your name) and enter 2:254/261.9999 as a test number. You are hereby allowed to use that number for test reasons only, please do not abuse the number. Then setup the point system described later and try to call our system at 2:254/261. There are plenty of new words to learn in this world! Poll Poll simply means calling a mail system Request When you request a file from a BBS system, you must know the filename in advance. There is something called MAGIC filenames, that refers to filename alias's. For example, if you request FILES from any system the system should send the entire BBS filelist. Another known alias is ABOUT which will send you a small description of the BBS. If you want the latest Terminate, you can just request TERMINAT from our number. You can also request files from all the areas on a BBS where the SysOp has allowed file requests. If you want the filelist from DAN BBS, you could either - 113 - request FILES or DANBBS.ARJ. Netmail A netmail is a private message that is only destined for one person. The message can be routed through the network but also sent directly. All the SysOps will be able to see your message if you route it through the network, but you can also send the message CRASH which means you dial directly to the system to which the message is addressed. You are not able to send messages directly to other points of course, because they do not have mailers running, but if you want to send to another point, you can call the point's BOSS and then the message will be directed to the point (then the SysOp on that board can read your message.) You can only send crashmail to systems which have a CM flag in the nodelist you are using. The CM flag means that the system can accept crashmail 24 hours a day, that means the phoneline is used only for the computer. Echomail Echomail messages are messages written in a conference. There is a public conference called TERMINATE, in both Fido and EuroLink, where everyone is encouraged to contribute. When you write a message in such a conference the message can be read by anyone that has access to that conference. Every conference has a set of rules that must be followed and which normally are administered by the conference moderator. Hold When things are on hold it means that they are waiting to be picked up. Your BOSS will always place your mail on hold, so you will get it the next time you poll. Snailmail A term used for the normal letters you put in the mailbox. Using a mail system is faster and more convenient for a SysOp than using a fax machine. If you want to send a message to any member of the fido network, you can write the message with crash status, press a button and 1 minute later the guy anywhere in the world has your message. This kind of electronic mail system will take over almost everywhere in the next few years. Nothing else will be faster and why use fax paper when you can do it this way? - 114 - Alt-O,N ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Point system Ƹ ³ System name ³ TERMINATE Mail System ³ ³ Main address ³ 2:254/261.9999 ³ ³ Boss setup ³ ³ ³ Nodelists ³ ³ ³ Phone convert ³ ³ ³ Device control ³ ³ ³ Redial tries ³ 3 ³ ³ Handshake ³ Auto ³ ³ Allow ZedZap ³ No ³ ³ Ask device ³ No ³ ³ Pick up mail ³ Yes ³ ³ Zone match ³ No ³ ³ Send AKA's ³ Yes ³ ³ Descriptions ³ Yes ³ ³ Call own addr. ³ No ³ ³ Files & paths ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; System name Name of your system to be presented when using the point system. If you have a company you could insert the name here or any other information you want to give. Examples: "SerWiz Comm" "Point #121 of DAN BBS" "Denmark, 12 points" "What's the point" "We have a matchpoint" In other words, if you have a little sense of humor you will quickly find out exactly what will suit you. Main address ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Change address ÿ ³þAddress 1 ³ 2:254/261.9999 ³ Bo Bendtsen ³ ³ Address 2 ³ 2:254/261 ³ Bo Bendtsen ³ ³ Address 3 ³ 2:0/0 ³ ³ ³ Address 4 ³ 2:0/0 ³ ³ ³ Address 5 ³ 2:0/0 ³ ³ ³ Address 6 ³ 2:0/0 ³ ³ ³ Address 7 ³ 2:0/0 ³ ³ ³ Address 8 ³ 2:0/0 ³ ³ ³ Address 9 ³ 2:0/0 ³ ³ ³ Address 10 ³ 2:0/0 ³ ³ ³ Address 11 ³ 2:0/0 ³ ³ ³ Address 12 ³ 2:0/0 ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ þ = Main address (SPACE to select) ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ You can define up to 12 different addresses in Terminate. For each address you can also define a username that will be - 115 - transmitted as the sysop-name during mail transfers. An address has the following syntax: Zone:Net/Node.Point Information on the address format can be read other place in this document. Normally all your addresses will be transmitted to the called system and you will collect all mail and files for all addresses that you present. However sometimes you want the another address to be presented as the first address or you only want one specific address to be sent. (see Send AKA's). Press Space to change primary address. Address 1 is important, since the outgoing directory names are calculated on the zone number from this address. Do not change this to another zone while the outbound windows has entries. By using Terminate you are automatically assigned with point number: 2:254/261.9999 That means you are point number 9999 of DAN BBS. Boss setup Terminate will allow you to use 8 different systems. So here you can set up each phone number and other options. Dial If you call Terminate from the command line with /BOSS or /BOSS:0 Terminate will either call every Boss specified in the Point System setup or call the marked systems until you get a connection, depending on what you have selected here. The "dial until connect" option is useful if you have a Boss that has different numbers and you just want to connect to one of these numbers in case the other numbers are busy. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Boss setup 1 Ƹ ³ Boss comment ³ DAN BBS ³ ³ Boss phone ³ 01713941230 ³ ³ Boss Device ³ COM1 2400 8N1 ³ ³ Boss prefix ³ ATDT ³ ³ Boss password ³ ³ ³ Boss synch ³ Yes ³ ³ Boss autodial ³ Yes ³ ³ Boss baudrate ³ 28800 ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Boss comment You could use this for name of boss or whatever you like. Boss phone Terminate does not need to know the nodenumber of your BOSS, you can call to any system, then the outbound directory will be checked and any file that has the same nodenumber as the called system, will be sent. Boss device Which device to use for dialing this Boss. - 116 - Boss prefix Which string to send to the modem before dialling. This works just as in the phonebook. Boss password Force a password especially for this system, to make sure that you have actually got the right system. If the password does not match on both sides the called system will hang up. When calling a Boss, the password file will not be used and you MUST specify the password you use in this menu. Boss synch When using the Call Boss function your computer's time/date will be synchronized to the same as the Boss's computer. In this way you can always be sure your watch is correct if you have an unstable clock. If your Boss has an unstable clock you should turn this off. Boss autodial When choosing autodial, Terminate will call this Boss and all other Boss's that have autodial enabled. Works only when 2 or more are defined. Boss baudrate If lower than minimum baudrate, you will be asked to hangup and retry. Nodelists ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Nodelist setup Ƹ ³ þ Nodelist 1 ³ UTILS\TER-NODE.* ³ ³ Nodelist 2 ³ ³ ³ þ Nodelist 3 ³ DK-POINT.LST ³ ³ Nodelist 4 ³ ³ ³ Nodelist 5 ³ ³ ³ Nodelist 6 ³ ³ ³ Nodelist 7 ³ ³ ³ Nodelist 8 ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ þ Nodelist in use, SPACE to enable/disable ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; A nodelist in fidonet is usually called NODELIST.xxx. The xxx is the day number of the release. The nodelist is compiled every week by leading members of fidonet who also provide NODEDIFF files, which contain changes in the nodelist for last week. The current nodelist is (was) NODELIST.092. When you specify a filename called C:\NODELIST\NODELIST.* then the nodelist with the highest day number will be used. If you have a NODELIST.085 and a NODELIST.092 then .092 will be used. You should place a small nodelist first with important numbers of people so they will be found very quickly. You can temporarily exclude nodelists from being searched by pressing SPACE. - 117 - Phone convert ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Phone convert ÿ ³ Strip Access code/PIN Add before ³ ³ 1 44-171 0 ³ ³ 2 44-181 0 ³ ³ 3 44- 132 0 ³ ³ 4 ³ ³ 5 ³ ³ 6 ³ ³ 7 ³ ³ 8 ³ ³ 9 ³ ³ 10 ³ ³ * 132 ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ In Fidonet nodelists, there is a country prefix on all phone numbers. When you call a system in your country this number must of course be removed, otherwise you would dial a wrong number. The international prefix for United Kingdom is 44- and in the UK you need to add a 0 before the number. 44-171-394-1230 -> 0171-394-1230. Whenever not stripping a number is considered to be international and here the * can be used for inserting your access code. The 44- and 0 would already be installed if you had COUNTRY.SYS installed in your CONFIG.SYS the first time you ran Terminate. The above example is taken from London where it is quite normal to use a long-distance carrier company called Mercury. British Telecom is the cheapest for local calls and Mercury cheapest for long distance calls in normal situations. The above example demonstrates how numbers starting with 0171 and 0181 will be dialed using BT and all other numbers will be dialed through Mercury. Device control ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Device control ÿ ³ Flag Device Dial prefix ³ ³ ISDNA ISDN-device Default (ATDT) ³ ³ ISDNB ISDN-device Default (ATDT) ³ ³ ISDNC ISDN-device ISDN bundling (AT&B2D) ³ ³ V34 Async Modem COM2 8N1 Disable VFC (ATS56=128DT) ³ ³ VFC Async Modem COM3 8N1 Disable V34 (ATS56=64DT) ³ ³ V32T Async Modem COM2 8N1 V.Terbo (ATS34=0DT) ³ ³ PEP Default device Default (ATDT) ³ ³ H16 Default device Default (ATDT) ³ ³ H14 Default device Default (ATDT) ³ ³ HST Default device Default (ATDT) ³ ³ ZYX Default device Default (ATDT) ³ ³ V32B Async Modem COM3 8N1 Disable MNP5 (ATS27=16DT) ³ ³ V32 Default device Default (ATDT) ³ ³ * Async Modem COM2 8N1 Default (ATDT) ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ When dialling a number from the nodelist, Terminate will check the flags in the nodelist and change to the correct device and the correct dial - 118 - prefix needed for calling that system. The flags must match exactly with the menu entry and is searched from top to bottom until a match is found. With this menu you can also control how to dial systems that you normally cannot connect to without a special dial prefix. The * will be used if none of the strings are found. Redial tries How many times to try connecting, Terminate will wait `pause' seconds between each call (modem and dialing). Enter a 0 to keep on dialing until connect. Handshake With a mailer you can use either EMSI or Yoohoo/2U2, with this option you can force which mail-handshake to use. Allow ZedZap Use Zmodem 8k for transfering the mail, if you have any trouble with bad lines, you should not turn this on. Turning ZedZap on will increase the CPS a little. Ask device When calling any system, then ask which device to use. Will be used when you dial from outbound, nodelist or manually. Pick up mail If you turn this option off you can send mail to the remote system without receiving any mail packets. It could be useful if you, for example have been on holiday and there is tons of mail you don't want to read, then you can send a netmail to the SysOp that you want to have your mail deleted. Zone match Yes: Compare the Zone number. No : Don't compare the Zone number. Since the chance of getting a call from another person with the same nodenumber is practically zero, you should always set this to No, so if the zonenumber is wrong (0:254/261) the transfer will continue anyway. Send AKA's Yes: Send all your AKA's (Also Known As). Terminate will send all nodenumbers that are different 0/0. If No then only the main address will be presented to the remote site. Descriptions When you send files within the point system and this toggle is on, then Terminate will look in the same directory for a FILES.BBS/DESCRIPT.ION style files. These files contain descriptions of the files. Terminate will grab the descriptions and create a file called NNNNnnnn.BBS where NNNN is the netnumber in hex and nnnn is the nodenumber in hex. (00EC006F.BBS). This file will be transfered after all the other files. Call own addr. - 119 - When using the CALL ALL function in the point system you could be in a situation where you are the boss and also a point of your own system. In such a situation you would not like to call your own addresses and you would enable this toggle. Files & paths ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Files & paths Ƹ ³ Inbound ³ I:\ ³ ³ Outbound ³ OUT\ZONE\ ³ ³ Password file ³ PASSWORD.TXT ³ ³ Mail editor ³ TERMAIL\TM.EXE !m ³ ³ Import ³ TERMAIL\TM.EXE /TOSS !m ³ ³ Export ³ TERMAIL\TM.EXE /SCAN !m ³ ³ After mail ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Inbound The directory where incoming files will be stored Outbound The directory where outgoing files/packets/mail files will be stored. If you have mail for other zones they will be stored in a directory called the old plus the zone in hex. OUT\ZONE -=> OUT\ZONE.016 for zone 27 (16 hex = 27 dec). Terminate will delete empty directories. Password file A file that will be used when dialling systems in the nodelist. The syntax is simple: Nodenumber Password PktPassword on each line 2:254/261 hello PKTsafe That would tell you that you have talked with 2:254/261 and agreed on a password to use at both places. If no PKT password will be inserted directly in the netmail. Mail editor Setup which program you want to call when pressing Mail editor in the point system. You could send any command and parameters here. Defaults to TerMail (TM.EXE) Import Which program and parameters to call when you have received mail and want to import it into your mailsystem. Defaults to TerMail (TM /Toss) Export When you have written some mail and want to export the mail from your mail system and make it ready to be sent to your BOSS or another system. Defaults to Termail (TM /SCAN) After mail When you receive files or mail with the point system, you can call any external program or batchfile. - 120 - Alt-F7 Using the point system ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍѵ TERMINATE Mail System 2:254/261.9999 Ƹ ³ Call Boss ³ Node Files Size Flags ³ ³ Call system ³ 2:254/261 1 208 úúCúúúú ³ ³ Call all ³ 2:254/261 8 97 úRúúúúú ³ ³ Send files ³ 2:254/261 1 302 úúCúúúM ³ ³ File requests ³ ³ ³ Kill mail ³ ³ ³ Auto request ³ ³ ³ Zoom mail ³ ³ ³ Main address ³ ³ ³ Send message ³ ³ ³ Change mail ³ ³ ³ Mail editor ³ ³ ³ Import ³ ³ ³ Export ³ ³ ³ Configuration ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ BBSnext ÃÄ´ ³ ³ Ôµ V Log Passw F1-F12 Alt-F Space abort/redial (A)dd time, Timeout inƾ To start up directly in this menu: TERMINAT /POINT The outbound window In the outbound window you will be able to see all packets/files/messages that are waiting to be sent. First the nodenumber that shows which node the files are intended for. Then how many files you are going to send or how many you have requested, the size of the files and some status flags that will show what kind and what do to with the package. Status flags used in other mailers (?UT = Netmail, ?LO flow files) I Immediate flag, force a mailer to start dialling at once and keep on dialling until the package is delivered. (.ILO .IUT) C Crash is almost the same as the Immediate flag, but it will not be sent as fast as Immediate. (.CLO .CUT) H Files are on hold, that means they will not be sent from your system. (.HLO .HUT). F A normal package able to be routed. (.FLO .FUT) D A direct package which cannot be routed (.DLO .DUT) R The package is a filerequest (.REQ) M Unpacked netmail Since you are a point and nobody will call you and you will always call out, there are a lot of flags that you will never need. Terminate will send all files to the system you have called no matter what flag it has, except for files with the Hold flag. Do not get confused about these flags, just think: If the file is not on hold, it will be sent. The filename of a package determines it's destination. A file request package for SerWiz Comm 236/111 (the zone does not matter) will be a file called: 00EC006F.REQ The 00EC is 236 and the 006F is 111, the numbers are converted from the Hexnumber system (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,A,B,C,D,E,F). 10 hex = 16 decimal , 000D hex = 13 decimal , FFFF = 65535 - 121 - The .REQ means filerequest. The file is a normal text file with one filename on each line. Like DANBBS.ARJ TERMINAT If there is a password on files you request you can place a !password after the filename. Like: TERMINAT !SECRET (Zoom mail and edit request file) A flow file is a *.CLO *.HLO *.ILO *.FLO *.DLO. Terminate will think that everything other than *.HLO files will be processed. These files are all textfiles which have 1 line for each file you want to send. A flow file for our system could be 00EC006F.CLO. In this textfile all files to be sent will be listed in a special way: ^C:\PRIVATE\HELLO.TXT #C:\TERMINAT\OUT\0000FFE8.TU1 C:\GRAPHICS\GIF\DPG-0125.GIF The ^ means to delete the file after transfer. The # means to truncate (make filesize = 0) the file after transfer (This is used by some tossers to keep the same filename, don't worry about it) Without ^ or # the file is just transferred. The 0000FFE8.TU1 is a mail package created by the mail-tosser program. You will also need a good mail editor. Mail packages can be compressed with all kinds of different programs, but currently PKZIP is mostly used because it is faster than most other packers. BBSnext BBSnext is a function which only some mailers support. Terminate Hostmode support it. What it does is first to call up and transfer mail, then send you into the BBS without having to re-dial. To find out if your uplink supports it, simply press B and call the system. If you are in the BBS afterwards the mailer in the other end support the BBSnext function. Call Boss Calls the number you have specified in the configuration (when handshaking Terminate will know the nodenumber (or systems AKA's)) and send all files/ messages/packages. If you start Terminate with: TERMINAT /BOSS Terminate will start up, dial all systems with autodial enabled, then exit Terminate, so you can call Terminate from batch files. If you already have a carrier, you can enter the pointsystem, then the session will be started at once. Call system Call another mailer, either from outbound, a nodelist or manually. The manual dial is only available to registered users (Terminate Professional). This allows you to send files or request from any system without knowing their nodenumber. You can start Terminate with: TERMINAT /CALL:search-string, the search-string can be a nodenumber or a part of name/system/location. Then Terminate looks in the nodelists and the first match it finds will be polled (called), then Terminate will exit to DOS just like /BOSS. Call all Checks outbound and calls every system that has files which are not on hold. Repeats each number until redial tries if busy. This function - 122 - will only call points directly if they are entered into the password file, otherwise the boss of the point will be called. Send files Send files to another system. You will be placed in the file manager and can select files from both windows. When finished you press return and Terminate will create the correct package. If you want to send C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT to our system 254/261 Terminate will generate a package in the outbound directory called 00EC006F.CLO which only has one line: C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT. If Descriptions in setup is 'Yes' Terminate will search for descriptions of the files in a file called FILES.BBS or DESCRIPT.ION and create a file called 00EC006F.BBS and append it to the .CLO file. File requests The same as send files. Select the system to request from, then you will be placed in the tagmenu, where you can select files from a filelist or enter the names manually. That's it. You call the system, Terminate sends the requests file, you receive the files as they are found if you are allowed to request from that area. It is the system you call that decides limits for how much you can request each time. Kill mail (DELete) Allows you to remove any packet in the outbound window. If it is a flow file and the files were marked for truncation or deletion, you will be asked to confirm first. Auto request { Only in registered version } ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Auto request Ƹ ³ Make autorequest ³ ÚÄ>Ä¿ # Prefix MaxReq node/searchstring/Pxxx (P12)³ ³ Select files ³ ³ ³ 1 1 100 ³ ³ Edit numbers ³ ³ ³ 2 1 100 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ ³ 3 1 100 ³ ³ Calls : ³ ³ ³ 4 1 100 ³ ³ Files left : ³ ³ ³ 5 1 100 ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ 6 1 100 ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ 7 1 100 ³ ³ Space = Next ³ ³ ³ 8 1 100 ³ ³ Esc = Abort ³ ³ ³ 9 1 100 ³ ³ ³ ÀÄ<ÄÙ 10 1 100 ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; This function will allow you to enter up to 10 different phone numbers where you want to request files. This function should only be used together with systems where you either know the SysOp or where anybody can request. Generally this function will allow you to get a lot of files without you having to call manually several times. If you define more files to be leeched than is allowed by a system on one call, Terminate will keep calling back immediately for the remaining balance each time the remote system throws you off. Don't ever try to request files from BBS's in the mail hours (2-6 in the morning). Most SysOps don't like somebody requesting files when the SysOp expects mail at a specific time, but normally you will just get hung up, if the system expects another to call. Please do not abuse this system and rip off systems. Please ask the SysOp first if he will allow you to request or become a point in fidonet. When editing the numbers to call, you must select the dial prefix and the maximum files to request. If you call a system and get logged off after 5 - 123 - files, you could assume the system only accepts 5 requests each time you call, but some systems also use max. size or max. time to decide how much or how long a time. You can insert a nodenumber or a search string then the nodelists are searched for a number, but you can also get a number from the phonebook directly by typing: Pxxx where xxx is the entry number in the phonebook. Zoom mail Shows information on the system to be called, mail-session password, and complete dial string. If a request or a flowfile, you are allowed to edit the file. Netmail can be viewed with PKTVIEW or the external lister. If some of the files you request have passwords, then you can edit the .REQ files and enter the password on the same line like this: 'SNOOPY.GIF !secret' (secret=password). Main address Change your main address, without going into the configuration menu. Send message Allows you to write a message to another system. You must know the correct network address of the destination. If the system is listed in the nodelists you will be asked to confirm the name. If the system is not listed you can continue anyway and write the name manually. You now enter the subject of the message. 'Hello Joe, how are you' and then the external editor will be called. Write your message, save it and the message will be placed in the outbound. The filename of an unpacked netmail has the same hexnumber prefix (00EC006F), but it always has .CUT as extension. When sending the message to the system it will be renamed to a Unix time + .PKT before sending. It is not important for you to know these things. Terminate will generate one of the newest .PKT formats called Type 2+. Change mail Change destination for a request, netmail or flow file. Also allowing you to put mailpackets or files on hold, so they will be sent later. Mail editor Call the external mail editor. Actually you are not forced to use Terminate as the menu system, but you can also use some batch files normally provided by the tosser or maileditor. Import Call a mailtosser that will import new incoming mail. Defaults to TerMail Export After writing messages in a mail system, you should normally always export the messages, before they can be sent. Configuration Call the point configuration menu directly. Also Alt-O will access this menu from the pointsystem. - 124 - V View logfile Allow you to view the entire logfile. Allows you to scroll through the last mail session. Manual { Only in registered version } If you want to request/send files from/to a system where you don't know the nodenumber, but just have the phone number you can use this function. For requests Terminate will generate a MANUMAIL.REQ which will be renamed when you call the next system and sent like a normal request. When sending files Terminate will generate a MANUMAIL.CLO file, which contain all the names of the files to be sent, then when you call the next system they are sent. If you have mail for other systems, delete the file again if you cannot get through to the system. - 125 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Cost management °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Terminate offers the best cost calculation ever presented in a communication package. It has been developed for use in many countries around the world and has the abillity to give you very accurate costs no matter how strange your phone charges are. No program can give you other than estimates, however we would like to think that with Terminate you get a better than avarage idea about how your bill will look at the next mourning day. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑ͵ Cost management Ƹ ³ Calculate costs ³ On ³ ³ Cost file 1 ³ TERMINAT.CST ³ ³ Cost file 2 ³ ALTERNA1.CST ³ ³ Cost file 3 ³ ALTERNA2.CST ³ ³ Currency string ³ kr ³ ³ Decimalpoint ³ 2 ³ ³ Cost editor ³ ³ ³ External editor ³ ³ ³ Show at connect ³ On ³ ³ Show costs after ³ On ³ ³ Show in pointsystem ³ On ³ ³ Show when faxing ³ On ³ ³ Max costs per day ³ 0,00 ³ ³ 2. currency string ³ USD ³ ³ 2. currency calc. ³ 148 ³ ³ 2. calculator ³ ³ ³ Default keywords ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Calculate costs Allow cost calculation. If you do not need any cost calculation at all, simply toggle this off. Cost management will be used when calling from the phonebook, manually, or with the pointsystem. When calling an entry from the phonebook, the costs for that entry will be saved in the entry. When you use manual dialing or the pointsystem for dialling, the costs will be saved inside entry 0 (manual record) in the phonebook. Press Shift+Esc to get current information on which cost amount was selected from the costfile. Cost file 1 Cost file 2 Cost file 3 Name of the cost file: first the utility directory will be searched, then the Terminate directory. You can define 3 different costfiles that can be connected to a device. So in the phonebook you can select a different device which uses another costfile. This is useful in some cases where you use ISDN and normal phonelines on the same machine, for example. Currency string The currency string will normally be grabbed from your COUNTRY.SYS, if you had it installed the first time you ran Terminate (or a $). It will be shown in all menus where costs are mentioned. - 126 - Decimalpoint The decimal point is important if you want the correct number printed on the screen. 0 1000 1 100.0 2 10.00 3 1.000 4 1.0000 Most currencies will use 2 here, but some countries do not use a decimal point. The default information is taken from your COUNTRY.SYS. Cost editor ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Cost editor Ƹ ³ Phone # Days:MTWTFSS Hours Costs in units/minute ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³% Days/DT Time-period Units/ ³ ³%Number/keywrd MTWTFSS Start-Stop seconds ³ ³%------------| |-----| |---------| |------| ³ ³ ³ ³ @CHARGESECOND 0 ³ ³ @START 0,0125 ³ ³ ³ ³ @INFO Local calls from DAN BBS ³ ³ 31 DT:3112 00:00-24:00 0,120 ³ ³ 31 DT:1201 00:00-24:00 0,120 ³ ³ 31 þþþþþþþ 08:00-19:30 0,470 ³ ³ 33 þ 00:00-24:00 0,240 ³ ³ 33 þþþþþþ 08:00-19:30 0,470 ³ ³ 33 þþþþþþ 19:30-08:00 0,240 ³ ³ 42 þ 00:00-24:00 0,240 ³ ³ 42 þþþþþþ 08:00-19:30 0,470 ³ ³ 42 þþþþþþ 19:30-08:00 0,240 ³ ³ 4362 þ 00:00-24:00 0,190 ³ ³ 4362 þþþþþþ 08:00-19:30 0,370 ³ ³ 4362 þþþþþþ 19:30-08:00 0,190 ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ 24/297 Æ; Enter=Edit Days:1234567 D=DT A=Add K=Keyword C=Comment L=Reload S=Save INSert entry Add new line at menubar. A Add entry Add new line at end of costfile. C Comment Insert comment line at menubar position. K Keyword Insert the costfile keywords decribed in this document. ENTER Edit a costline - 127 - Phone # The cost file is a sequential file that is read from the start and one line forward at a time. When it finds a match it stops looking for more. This means that you must place longer numbers first like this: 1 : 4362 2 : 43 If the number is 4362 it will return entry 1, a 439999 will give entry 2. 1 : 43 2 : 4362 The above setting is wrong, because it will allways return entry 1. Days:MTWTFSS Each cost entry can be defined only to be available on some days in the week. Here in Denmark the complete Sunday is half price. Press 1-7 to toggle monday-sunday. D Edit days/date field Insert DT:DDMM. DT:3112 would only be in effect one day per year on the 31st of December Hours You can also define special hours each day the cost entry will be available. In Denmark we only pay half price after 19:30 and until 8:00 in the morning. Costs in units/minute / Add Y units every X second Enter cost for entry or how many seconds the period lasts. External editor Since the internal editor only allows you to edit 800 entries, you can use your external editor instead. If you need to copy several lines or other things it could also be faster to use the external editor. Show at connect Show information on costs on screen at connect time. Show costs after When the carrier drops, show information on what the phone company made from your call. If you like to call systems and hate knowing how much poorer you are afterwards, you should surely turn this off... Show in pointsystem Show screen with cost information when using the pointsystem. Show when faxing Show screen with cost information when sending faxes. - 128 - Max costs per day If you define an amount here, Terminate will inform you if your daily budget has been was exceeded. This should keep you from spending any more money. Entering a 0 will disable the feature. 2. currency string Used for displaying the secondary currency. 2. currency calc. Use a zero to disable this feature. For calculating the secondary currency you need to know how many percent you need to multiply with for getting the value. For calculating you need the latest rate of exchange on the currency you want. Lets say you want to use DKK (Danish Crowns) and USD (US-Dollars) as secondary currency. You need to find out how much you would have to pay for 1000 USD. When this document was written the rate of exchange was: 1000 USD = 6730 DKK. To calculate the value: 1000 USD * 1000 / 6730 DKK = 148 (14,8%) The number you must enter is 148. An other example would be if you want the secondary currency in DKK and the normal currency in USD. You need to find out how much you would have to pay for 1000 DKK. At the present time 1000 DKK = 148 USD. To calculate the value: 1000 DKK * 1000 / 148 USD = 6756 (675,6%) The number you must enter is 6756. 2. calculator Helps you to calculate the above. You just need to know how much you would pay for a 1000 of the secondary currency. Keyword defaults ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Keyword defaults Ƹ ³ Start costs @START ³ 0,125 ³ ³ Connect costs @CONNECT ³ 0,000 ³ ³ Minimum charge @MINIMUM ³ 0,000 ³ ³ Maximum @MAXIMUM ³ 0,000 ³ ³ Connect seconds @CONNECTSEC ³ 12 ³ ³ Charge second @CHARGESECOND ³ 0 ³ ³ Start at once @STARTATONCE ³ Off ³ ³ Pay by period @PAYBYPERIOD ³ 0 ³ ³ Discount rate @DISCOUNT ³ 20 ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Start costs @START Some phone companies have some kind of penalty for using the phone - 129 - and want you to pay a punishment start fee, but you could also use this entry for adjusting the seconds when connecting. Connect costs @CONNECT When you get the connect using the dialer, voice, fax or mail-calls, you can add this value to the start value only when getting the connect. Mostly used for adding the initial charge for those countries using a UNIT COST method of charging which is a advance charging method. Also useful if some services that have an additional penalty for calling. Minimum charge @MINIMUM Some phone companies will have a minimum charge no matter how short you are online. It can be used if your company for example charges you 1 dollar for the first 3 minutes. Which means you will be charged the full minimum amount even though you are only online 1 minute. Maximum @MAXIMUM After a maximum cost has been exceeded, a window will pop up on screen and ask you if you want to hangup. Enter a 0 if you do not want this option (for example if your company is paying.) Connect seconds @CONNECTSEC You are normally not charged until the other end picks up the phone. This setting describes the time that elapses between the other end picking up the phone and your modem connecting. It is used to give a more accurate estimate of your telephone charges. Charge second @CHARGESECOND Some phone companies will charge you in periods in advance. In those cases you will always be charged in advance. If your phone company charges you for 1 minute in advance, enter 60 here and Terminate will round up for you. If you have been online for 4 minutes 33 seconds you will be charged for 5 minutes. If you have been online for 5 minutes and 1 second you will be charged for 6 minutes when using this method. Start at once @STARTATONCE There should be some kind of international agreement between phone companies so that you do not pay anything before the other end has picked up the phone (no charge for busy calls), but since you never know when the phone companies change their policy you should always aim for worst case and just start calculating at once, then when you get the bill you might not hang yourself anyway. Pay by period @PAYBYPERIOD Some phone companies use a rate per minute and some want payment for several minutes in advance. A zero here will make Terminate choose the units/minute mode. This means that every minute the rate will be added to cost used. Any other number will make Terminate act in the period mode. The number here defines how many units to add for each period. How long the period is, is then defined for each cost entry. - 130 - Discount rate @DISCOUNT If you get discount on certain calls, you can here specify the percent discount. What in general will happen is that the costs will have this discount deducted for entries following this keyword. For example using @DISCOUNT 10, if a call is 2.000 you would be charged 1.800. - 131 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° The Phonebook °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ -=> T E R M I N A T E P H O N E B O O K <=- TERMINATE indicates which phone directory file is in use. In this example TERMINAT.FON has been loaded. The comment ( Private phonebook ) can be changed in the Other menu. The first °ú°°°° field is a menubar that indicates where you are in the current phonebook. This will change if you press Cursor Up/Down. The second menubar is controlled by cursor Left/right and will allow you to see almost anything about the current entries on screen. Ý TERMINAT ( Private phonebook ) Þ Ý # Name °ú°°°°°°°°°°°°° ú°°°°°°°° Phone Number Baud Comm. Þ ÛÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÛ 2 3 ÄGet newest Terminate hereÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ 28800 8-N-1 4 ÜÜÜÜÜ 5 ÛÛÛÛÛÛÛÛÜ Ringdown 45-43430063 28800 8-N-1 6 ÛÛÛÝ ßÛÛÛÛ 45-43430064 28800 8-N-1 7 ÛÛÛ ÛÛÛÝ 28800 8-N-1 8 ÛÛÛÝ ÞÛÛÝ 28800 8-N-1 9 ÞÛÛÛ ÜÛÛÛÝ 28800 8-N-1 10 ÞÛÛÛÛÛÛÛÛß AN BBS 28800 8-N-1 11 ßßßß 28800 8-N-1 12 ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ 19200 8-N-1 14 ÛßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßßÛ Ý úú<> Ins/Del Add Edit/View Dial Manual Find Tag: Space, +-* All Þ Ý Sort Import Phonebook Other Global Save Voicecall Copy Cap Note Warndays Þ Insert Inserts a new entry at menubar. Delete Delete entry at menubar or all tagged entries. A Add new entry Add a new entry at the bottom of the phonebook. D (RETURN) Dial number(s) Dial the system (or tagged systems) and try to connect. You can use the Quickdial just by typing any number 0..9 to tag several entries. You can also turn this quick dial bar on in the toggles menu. Each number should be seperated by a space: 5 6 7 8 9 10 will tag and start dialing entries 5-10. To use a keyword instead press 0, delete the 0 and type the keyword, systems that match the keyword will then be dialled. - 132 - ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ AutoDialer Ƹ ³ Dial start ³ 2-Jun-1993 16.23.16 Entries tagged 1 ³ ³ Attempt ³ 2-Jun-1993 16.23.17 Try #1 Aborting in 3 seconds ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ System ³ DANBBS Ringdown ³ ³ Username ³ Bo Bendtsen ³ ³ Phone ³ 45-43623990 ³ ³ Comment 1 ³ Here you can always get the newest ³ ³ Comment 2 ³ updates of Terminate ³ ³ Password ³ ........ ³ ³ ³ Connects 6 Minimum/Last baud 28800 26400 ³ ³ ³ Download kb 53 Upload kb 0 ³ ³ ³ Time used 0.08.47 Costs kr 2,89 ³ ³ Last attempt ³ ³ ³ Next system ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Add 15 Untag Edit Retry Space=cycle Return=abort ESC=hangup/abort ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ ATDT42643827 ³ Ôµ Alt-J DOS ÆÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Modem ƾ Add 15 seconds Extend dial time by 15 seconds. Remember to set your modem dial time as high as possible (S7=255). Untag entry Untag entry and dial next number. Edit entry Edit this phone entry while dialing. Retry Retry number at once. Space=cycle Call next tagged number or the same number if no tagged entries. Return=abort ESC=hangup/abort Pressing return will start to abort the dialer, but assume that the connection will come through in terminal mode. Pressing ESC will first hangup the call and then abort the auto-dialer. In toggles you can reverse these two keys so they work the other way around. - 133 - M Manual dial Jumps to the manual dial menu, here you can call modem or voice numbers without having them in the phonebook. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Manual dialing Ƹ ³ Dial modem number ³ 43623990 ³ ³ Dial voice number ³ 43623990 ³ ³ Search nodelist ³ BO BENDTSEN ³ ³ Nodelists ³ ³ ³ Edit manual record ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Record 0 in all phone books will be used to store the last manual dial you made. So the costs used and other statistics can be kept up to date. Enter the number at Dial modem number / Dial voice number or search for the number in the nodelists. You can also edit the manual record if you want to setup special emulations or keymaps or anything. When you have entered the number in line 1 or 2, press RETURN again for dialing. F Find entry When you start to type a search string, the picture will change in the background to entries that match your search string. You can press Ctrl-Enter to find next match with same search string. The fields that will be compared are: System name, Number, Password and comments 1+2. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Speed search Ƹ ³ DAN BBS ³ ÔÍÍ Ctrl-Enter = Next Í; SPACE Tag/untag Tag/untag entries for dialling, copying, deletion. + Tag all Tag all entries. - Untag all Untag all entries. * Invert all Invert tags. All untagged will be tagged and all tagged will be untagged. - 134 - S Sort menu Here you can sort the entire phonebook or a range. A range indicates which entries to be sorted, start-stop. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Sort menu Ƹ ³ Set Range ( 1-14 ) ³ ³ Names ascending ³ ³ Names descending ³ ³ Numbers ascending ³ ³ Numbers descending ³ ³ Most connects ³ ³ Last called ³ ³ Comment 1 ³ ³ Comment 2 ³ ³ Password ³ ³ Color ³ ³ Name to use ³ ³ Baudrate ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; I Import Import menu. In this menu you can import phonebooks from other terminal programs and also import BBS-lists, commafiles, nodelists. This menu can also Export your phonebook to a commafile, textfile or printer. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Import/Export menu Ƹ ³ Import: Telix phonebook 3.1x/3.2x ³ ³ Import: Qmodem phonebook 4.3x ³ ³ Import: Qmodem phonebook 5.0x ³ ³ Import: Qmodem Pro phonebook 1.00 ³ ³ Import: TeleMate phonebook 3.10/4.00 ³ ³ Import: FrontDoor user-profiles 2.xx ³ ³ Import: FrontDoor phonebook 2.xx ³ ³ Import: Procomm phonebook 2.4.x ³ ³ Import: PCPLUS phonebook 1.00 ³ ³ Import: PCPLUS phonebook 2.0x ³ ³ Import: Procomm+ for Windows 1.00 ³ ³ Import: Communique 2.00 ³ ³ Import: RenCom Pro 2.00 ³ ³ Import: Definable BBSlist ³ ³ Import: Nodelist segment ³ ³ Import: Find/import nodes from nodelist ³ ³ Import: Commafile ³ ³ Export: Commafile ³ ³ Export: Phonebook to printer/textfile ³ ³ Export: Userprofiles to textfile ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; If the import of a phonebook goes wrong and there is suddenly a lot of garbage in the phonebook, just mark all the entries and press DELETE to remove them again. - 135 - BBSlist ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Import from definable BBSlist Ƹ ³ Start converting ³ ³ ³ Filename ³ DK-BBS.TXT ³ ³ Name start/stop ³ 1 24 ³ ³ Number start/stop ³ 26 33 ³ ³ Baud start/stop ³ 35 39 ³ ³ Comment1 start/stop ³ 49 79 ³ ³ Comment2 start/stop ³ 81 108 ³ ³ Password start/stop ³ 0 0 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ If start or stop is 0 field will be skipped ³ ³ A line starts at 1 and ends at 255, both positions will be included ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; This allows you to import any textfile with any format you might like to specify. The start/stop values are the positions on the lines where the import function will grab the value or string. The baudrate will be grabbed into a string then Terminate will test the 2 first places and assume the following. 12->1200 , 24->2400 , 48->4800 , 96->9600 , 14->14400 , 16->16800 So if the baudrate is grabbed from '14400 HST/V32' then 14400 is used. This was made because some BBS-lists only give you the first 2 numbers of the baudrate, so that more information can be put on the same line. Look in the DK-BBS.TXT file for some examples. Import from nodelists A complete segment can be imported. This could be used to import your fidonet's list of all the nodes in your net. It must be a raw, uncompiled standard fidonet nodelist. Import/Export comma separated files Some database programs will be able to import comma delimited files so just export and look in the file. The first line in an exported file will always show the format used in Terminate. Export: Phonebook to printer/textfile Here you can print out all or part of the phonebook. You can also select if you only want tagged entries to be exported. You can limit the export to 80 chars, then only the most important information is exported. Remember if you export to another printer you should choose textfile and enter LPT2 or LPT3. P Change phonebook If you have several phonebooks. It is advisable to use as small a phonebook as possible to save memory. You could import a BBS list or a nodelist segment. And then only copy single entries to your daily phonebook with the copy function. You could also have a phonebook for your private needs and one for your work. Try to divide it up into smaller books to make it easier for you to find the numbers again. You could also separate the groups by giving the entries a different color for each group. O Other functions - 136 - Here you can change the comment for the phonebook, see the totals for the phonebook and a complete cost calculation for one year back. Terminate has one of the most advanced cost calculation features found in any terminal program. Thanks to many users in different countries, it should come very close to your real bill. You can print out (or save in file) a LARGE report, telling you all the information on this page and cost information statistics for every phone entry in the phonebook. You could use this to give to your company to prove you really have used the phone so much if they are paying. Phonebook comment Any note you want to have present in top of the phonebook. Phonebook password Ask password when opening this phonebook. A CRC-32 will be calculated and stored so it will not be possible to read it again. If you choose encrypt phonebook, then no-one will be able to use this phonebook without knowing the password. The encryption in the toggles menu will protect you against persons using file-viewers to get the passwords. This could also be used if you work a place where you have confidential numbers that only certain people are allowed to call. To disable just press return again. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Other information Ƹ ³ Phonebook comment ³ Private phonebook Size: 120kb ³ ³ Phonebook password³ Disabled ³ ³ Total connect/time³ Connects : 0 Time used : 00.00.00 ³ ³ Total transfered ³ Upload kb: 0 Download kb: 0 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Generate report ³ C O S T S T A T I S T I C S ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ May 1995 ³ ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ $ 0,00 ³ ³ June 1995 ³ ³ Last 2 months ³ $ 0,00 ³ ³ July 1995 ³ ³ $ 0,00 ³ $ 0,00 ³ ³ August 1995 ³ ³ Last 3 months ³ $ 0,00 ³ ³ September 1995 ³ ³ $ 0,00 ³ $ 0,00 ³ ³ October 1995 ³ ³ Last 6 months ³ $ 0,00 ³ ³ November 1995 ³ ³ $ 0,00 ³ $ 0,00 ³ ³ December 1995 ³ ³ Last 9 months ³ $ 0,00 ³ ³ January 1996 ³ ³ $ 0,00 ³ $ 0,00 ³ ³ February 1996 ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ $ 0,00 ³ ³ March 1996 ³ $ 0,00 ³ ³ April 1996 ³ Phonebook $ 0,00 ³ ³ April 1996 ³ Manual+Pointsystem $ 0,00 ³ ³ ³ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ³ ³ Total ³ $ 0,00 ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; - 137 - G Global changes The global menu. The functions in this menu can change more than 1 entry at a time. Almost every important function can be changed globally or in a specified range of entries. For example, you could change the baudrate for entries 5 - 10, by changing first the range and then choose change baud. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Global edit Ƹ ³ Set Range ( 1-14 ) ³ ³ Only tagged No ³ ³ Find/Replace baud ³ ³ Change baud rates ³ ³ Change device ³ ³ Auto login ³ ³ Download path ³ ³ Username ³ ³ Colors ³ ³ Terminal ³ ³ Protocol ³ ³ Dial prefix ³ ³ Tag entries in range ³ ³ Strip/Insert '-' in number 3 ³ ³ Find/Tag ³ ³ Tag bad phonenumbers ³ ³ Tag all with password ³ ³ Copy password to range ³ ³ Clear last call ³ ³ Clear costs ³ ³ Clear time used ³ ³ Echo=Off, Strip=Off, BS=On ³ ³ Clear connects ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; V Save phonebook Save the phonebook at once. The phonebook is always saved if any changes have been made or any numbers have been dialled. The phonebook is saved whenever you change to a new phonebook or exit Terminate. When saving a phonebook and the backup system is enabled (default), the current .FON will be renamed to .PBK and the new phonebook will be saved as .FON. If the .FON file is missing Terminate will try to load the .PBK file. This function is normally used where you have made a lot of changes and want to be sure nothing can go wrong, eg: in a DOS-shell or anywhere else that could cause the machine to hang. - 138 - L Voicecall Allows you to call human beings. The screen has information on current time, how much time has elapsed and the cost of the call. When the modem has dialled, pick up the real 'phone and press the spacebar. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Voice call Ƹ ³ Human ³ Bo Bendtsen ³ ³ Number ³ 4264???? (Ohh now I forgot) ³ ³ Time ³ 16:05:12 ³ ³ Time used ³ 00:05:23 ³ ³ $ ³ 1,25 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ ³ ³ Pick up phone then press space. Esc to abort ³ ³ Delaying in 60 ³ ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; C Copy menu Copy entries to other places in the phonebook or to another phonebook. T (Alt-L) Edit capture file Capture file. Edit the capture file for the entry under the menubar, if it is specified in the entry. N (Alt-N) Edit note file Notes. Each phonebook entry can have a comment file attached. It will be placed in the same directory as the phonebooks. You can enter any kind of information you like here. W Warn days Will flash all entries which have not been dialled for a set number of days (default 30 days). Useful if you do not want to be deleted by a system. Normally, users records on public BBS's are deleted if they have not called for 1-3 months. Now you can know quickly which entries you need to call to avoid deletion. Alt-J DOS-shell Invokes DOS-shell Alt-X Exit Exit Terminate - 139 - -=> E D I T P H O N E E N T R Y <=- E Edit entry ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ View/Edit phone entry Ƹ ³ System name ³ DAN BBS Ring down ³ ³ Phone number ³ 45-43623990 ³ ³ Device ³ Async Modem COM2 8N1 ³ ³ User profile ³ Bo Bendtsen ³ ³ Password ³ ...... ³ ³ Opening hours ³ 00:00 - 24:00 ³ ³ Terminal ³ Avatar/Ansi ³ ³ Dial prefix ³ ATDT ³ ³ Dial suffix ³ ^M ³ ³ Clear last call ³ ³ ³ Autologin ³ Escapes, Name, Password ³ ³ Comment 1 ³ Get the newest Terminate files from here ³ ³ Comment 2 ³ ³ ³ Download path ³ DOWNLOAD\ ³ ³ Keyboard mapping ³ .KBD 1 Local Echo Off ³ ³ Translation table ³ .XLT 2 StripHigh Off ³ ³ Capture file ³ .CAP 3 Rcvd BS dest On ³ ³ Note file ³ .NOT 4 Color þ ³ ³ Baud information ³ Minimum : 19200 Last call : 19200 ³ ³ Time used/Connect ³ Time used: 0.00.00 Connects : 0 ³ ³ Transfer guess ³ Upload kb: 0 Download kb: 0 ³ ³ Costs used ³ Total : 0,00 This month : 0,00 ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Name of the system to call System name Name of the system or person this entry describes Phone number Number to dial to reach the system or person Device For every system you can specify a device. The devices can be set up in the configuration. This is mostly used if you have several modems connected to your system. You can select between all available devices or choose to use the default or current device. If you choose the current device, the Com Port will not be changed at all when dialling. If the default device is chosen, then the startup device will be used. If the device is changed before dialing, then the init string for this device will be sent before sending the dial command. For more information, see how to setup a device. User profile Which name and default password should be used for the autologin procedure. If the autologin fails, you can press Alt-N to send the username manually and Alt-S to send the password. Password Used at autologin procedure, if you do not define a separate password for - 140 - each entry, the default password for the active user profile is used. Opening hours Some systems are only open for a limited time during the day or night. You can specify the opening and closing time and then Terminate will warn you and ask if you are sure you want to call anyway. Terminal Choose which kind of emulations the remote end supports. Look at the Help for Terminal Emulation to get more information. Press Alt-T in terminal mode to change. Dial prefix Dial suffix In Terminate you can choose between 6 dial prefixes. 1-5 are normal prefixes and 6 should be used for international calls, but you can also use them for any purpose you find right. Normally 'ATDT' is used for Hayes compatible modems. That starts the modem tone dialling a number. AT is the Hayes `ATtention' that prefixes most commands. If Pulse dialling is needed you would choose ATDP. The suffix is what to send after the number has been sent to the modem. Terminate dials like this: Prefix + Number + Suffix ATDT43623990^M The ^M means Return (ASCII #13), it will be replaced with a #13. Clear last call Every time you call a system, the date and time of the call is saved in the phone entry. Pressing return on this entry removes this date/time - so it then looks as if you have not called that system. Autologin Which Autologin script to try after you have connected. You can define your own small login scripts if you call systems that need scripts other than the default scripts. Comment 1 Comment 2 Place anything on these lines -used when importing from BBS and nodelists. Download path Which default download path should be used for the phonebook entry. Terminate lets you pre-define 8 different paths, so if you have a download directory for GIF files, you could tell Terminate to download directly into that directory. To change this in terminal mode, press Alt-R Keyboard mapping Load a keyboard file when calling this system. This will allow you to load a keyboard file, where you have defined function keys and other special keys. You can load a keyboard file in terminal mode by pressing Alt-=, (the key to the left of the backspace on international keyboards). - 141 - Translation table You can also load a translation file when calling a system. It will change incoming and outgoing characters. This is often used with systems only running 7-bit, Unix installation and other host systems. Press Alt-W in terminal mode to create/load/save/reset translation files. Capture file Terminate has a capture file system. If a filename is specified in the entry a capture file will be opened when you connect to that system. You can either remove the filename again by pressing DEL or turn off the Autocapture system in the configuration or press Alt-0 in terminal mode. Pressing Alt-L in that menu will call the external editor and allow you to directly edit/view the capture file. Note file For each entry you can define a note file where you can keep any kind of information. You could save a filelist or a little summary of what the system needs or whatever you like. To edit this note file, you press Alt-N in this menu. This file will be used as the SmartNote if you press Alt-A from terminal mode. Baud information These fields are only used for information about the remote system - they will not affect communication parameters in any way. So you can specify here if the system is using a bps rate your modem supports even though you perhaps always use 19200 or 38400 in the device. Terminate will insert the connect bps rate at the phone entry every time you call a system (including 7200, 12000, 14400, 16800, 24000, 28800, 64000, 76800,128000) to inform you which bps rate the system last accepted when you called. This feature can be turned off in configuration. Note that there is a big difference in connect bps and the bps (DTE speed) between your modem and computer. DTE-speed DCE-speed DTE-speed Computer ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ Modem ÄÄÄÄphonelineÄÄÄÄ Modem ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ Computer (DTE=Data Terminal equipment, DCE=Data communications equipment) Between your computer and the modem, the baudrate depends on which baudrate you specify in the device setup. Depending on which modem you use the modems could transfer data with different baudrates than the serial port. DTE-speed = device baudrate, DCE-speed = phonebook baudrate. Terminate will also recognize baudrate 64000/128000 used with ISDN lines. The minimum baudrate will hangup if the connect speed is below the specified speed. Use 0 to disable. The last call is the connect speed you got the last time you called the system. Time used/Connects Allows you to edit the number of seconds used online and how many connects you have made to this system. Transfer guess - 142 - Edit how many kilobytes down/up-loaded to that system. When you use external protocols, Terminate has to guess how much. Terminate first checks how many files and how big the download directory is. It then performs the external transfer, checks again and calculates the difference. This can only be a guess, since maybe you are working on a network and delete some files in the meantime in that directory, but that is also why you can manually edit the value if anything goes wrong and you like keeping track of how much you have transferred. Costs used The 1st entry is the total cost of all calls to this system and will be updated after each call if you use the Cost management option. The 2nd entry will also be updated each time you call but, when a new month starts, this amount is placed in the `Last Month Used Account' and the 2nd entry zeroed. Local Echo Echo all characters sent to the modem on screen. Always turned off normally. StripHigh Strip all characters above ASCII 127 on incoming traffic. Should not be used normally. Erase backspace If this option is On, pressing backspace (ASCII 8) will move the cursor 1 back and erase the character; Off will only move the cursor 1 back. Default is On. Color Select the color you want for this phonebook entry. - 143 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° File tagging and tagmenu °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Tagging files is one of the most used features in Terminate. It will save you hundreds of small little notes and allow you to start downloading files faster. The Alt-F5 filetagger will try to identify all possible filenames on screen, then, when you move the cursor up or down, the menubar will jump to the next file it has identified. File tagger keys SPACE Tag or untag file + Tag all files found on screen - Untag all * Tagged files gets untagged and untagged gets tagged (inverse) E Edit tagged name. File tagger cursor movements Up Move up to previous found filename Down Move down to next found filename Right Increase position of menubar by 1 Left Decrease position of menubar by 1 Shift+Right Increase size of menubar by 1 Shift+Left Decrease size of menubar by 1 Shift+Up Decrease found line by 1 Shift+Down Increase found line by 1 When you press escape all tagged files are saved and can now be reached from the tag menu. You can also check an entire file list quickly and then scrollback with Alt-B and tag files from there. Remember that no online remote tagger will react as quickly as doing the tagging locally. - 144 - Tag menu The tag menu will work a little differently depending on if you use the menu from Alt-F6 (download) or Alt-F7 and filerequest. Õ͵ Tag options ÆÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑ͵ Tag menu Ƹ ³ A Edit tagfile ³þDANBBS.ARJ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ C Clear all ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ D Delete (þ) ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ L Load tagfile ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ S Save tagfile ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ E Edit entry ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ I Import dir ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ F Filelists ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ M Magic G GenTag ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ B Sort U Untag ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ Del Remove entry ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ þ=Sent ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ Space ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ Send name+Space ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ Return ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ Send name+Return ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ + All+13 - All+32³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ Esc to exit ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ Tagged files 1 ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ Tagged from: ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ DAN BBS ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; The 'Tagged files' indicates the total of tagged entries. The 'Tagged from:' will show on which system you tagged the file. If you change phonebooks it will not show the correct system. The phonebook has to be loaded to see where you have tagged the files. Call a system or press Alt-D, Esc to load the phonebook. A Edit tagfile Edit any tag file with the external editor. If you have called a system, Terminate will suggest a filename that looks like the system name, but actually you can edit any file from here. C Clear all Clean the screen and throw away all files that you have tagged. D Delete (þ) When you send the filename back with one of the functions here, you can clean up the screen. This is useful if you have tagged 50 or more files and have collected the first 10. L Load tagfile Load any textfile into the tag menu. The first word will be grabbed from each line. S Save tagfile - 145 - If you suddenly need to save the tagged files. Lets say you are online and have just tagged 20-30 files and suddenly your mum arrives and you have again forgotten the time because of those damn computers, now you just save the tagfile and when she has left again, you load the tagged files again and call the system and download the rest of the files. E Edit entry Edit manually the entries on screen. I Import dir You can import a local directory with all the files. This option could be useful when uploading, if you have a directory with a lot of files you want to upload to a system, you might be asked to enter the names first with the remote system checking if the file is already present on the remote system. F Filelist The menu will handle all the filelist features in Terminate. A filelist is a large (ASCII) text file. Such lists can be downloaded from almost anywhere, no matter which kind of system you are using. Look at the example DANBBS.TXT file in the FILELIST\ directory if you have any doubts about what a filelist could look like. Remember that whenever you use the internal viewer on a filelist or any other file for that matter that contains filenames, you can tag the files by pressing T and then the filenames are imported into the Tagmenu. You can also change the setup in Alt-O, F, Filelist manager. ÚÄ´ Select filelist action ÿ ³ Turbo Search ³ ³ View filelist ³ ³ Tag from list ³ ³ Pack filelists ³ ³ Unpack filelists ³ ³ Filemanager ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ - 146 - Turbo Search This function will quickly and easily search through all your filelists for a wildcard like ????TER1.* (Terminate) or T-???-??.* (manuals). A wildcard search is enabled if your search string contains a * or a ?, otherwise a normal search on your full search string is performed. ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Searching for '*.LZH' ÿ ³ DANBBS.TXT ³ DANBBS.LZH 3104330 23/12-93 001-200 ALL Complete f ³ ³ DANBBS.TXT ³ DANBBS!.LZH 374321 23/12-93 001-200 ALL-XCD Filelist w ³ ³ DANBBS.TXT ³ DAN_7D.LZH 4725 04/01-93 001-200 NEWS News last ³ ³ DANBBS.TXT ³ T-CFG13.LZH 23735 23/12-93 Export/Import Terminate con ³ ³ TURBOPOW.TXT ³ BP7UPG.LZH 4,413 11/03/92 | Upgrade info for BP7 (c ³ ³ TURBOPOW.TXT ³ ALARM.LZH 10,147 10/14/92 | Source code example for ³ ³ TURBOPOW.TXT ³ ALLOC.LZH 6,598 03/25/91 | Allocate heap blocks la ³ ³ TURBOPOW.TXT ³ APINST.LZH 29,597 01/11/94 | APRO 2.0 install progra ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄ´ 2 TURBOPOW.TXT Space=Next Lines 255 ÃÄÄÙ View filelist Quick select and view of one filelist. Tag from list You can tag directly from filelists. First you will be asked to select a filelist. Then 'keyword or wildcard'. If you enter a normal DOS wildcard filename like '*.ZIP' all lines will be searched for a .ZIP file, but if you do not enter a wildcard each line in the filelist will be searched for matches. So, if you enter VGA, all lines having the word 'VGA' will be available. The limit is 250 matches. The list can be sorted alphabetically if you like. You can now select from the found matches. Just mark all the files you want with SPACE or press + for marking all files found. - will unmark all and * will toggle all tags. When pressing Esc all files tagged will now be imported into the tag menu (if there is room for them). The tagged lines will also be saved in the download path (or inbound) in a file called FILES.BBS so you have the descriptions. Thus, you will not need the BBS to send you an extra file with the descriptions (if the system does it anyway, just delete the file.) With this option you will never need to spend much online time looking for new files. If you have a high speed modem, just download the filelist, search it manually and tag all the files off-line. Then dial the system and use the tag menu to select the files. Pack filelists Pack all the files in the filelist directory into LISTPACK.ZIP, if you define another packer like ARJ then LISTPACK.ARJ will be used. Unpack filelists Unpack all the files in the packed LISTPACK.ZIP. All the list functions will look for LISTPACK and ask if you want to unpack the files first. Filemanager Start up filemanager in the filelist directory for manual processing. M Magic - 147 - Magic names is a commonly used term in fidonet and means the same as alias. In this way, some systems have aliases for some special files that can be requested from the system. G GenTag Call any external utility you like. Normally this should point to a utility that could generate a TERMINAT.TAG file that could be imported here. B Sort Sort all entries alphabetically. U UnTag Untag the file. Del Remove entry Delete the tagged file. þ=Sent / þ=Request Depending on if you called the tagmenu with Alt-F6 or when file requesting from Alt-F7, the tagged files have different meanings. Download: þ means that you have already tried to download the file once. Request : þ means that this file should be requested. Space / Return Download: Send name + Space/Return (ASCII #32/#13). Some systems allow you to enter several filenames on the same line. Let's say you have 3 files you want to download. First press space on the two first files and then press return on the last file: 'FILE1.EXT FILE2.EXT FILE3.EXT'+return. Just as if you typed the line yourself. Request: When you edit an entry the þ means: YES! request this file, please. You can toggle this entry with the spacebar if you suddenly decide you don't want the file anyway. Press return when you are finished tagging files. If you do not want to request anyway just press Esc. + All+13 - All+32 / +-* Toggle all Download: Pressing + will send all the filenames separated by a return (#13). - will do the same thing, but separated with a space (#32) instead. Request: + will select all files to be requested. - will deselect all the files and * will toggle all files. - 148 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° The Filemanager °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ -=> T E R M I N A T E C O M M A N D E R <=- The file manager is a complete tool for managing all your DOS command needs. It has the same sort of features as programs like Norton Commander 3.0, QDOS, PCTOOLS, etc. With this you can manage all your needs and a little extra too. This tool is also released as a standalone module called TC Changing directory To change directory, press Cursor Right. To change to the parent directory press Cursor Left. Favourite paths Press shift and a window with the last 10 paths used can be selected quickly again. Press 0-9 to select the path you want and you will be placed in the directory. You can also press 0-9 to recall a path without pressing shift. Please note that when Blind support is enabled, both shift-keys must be pressed. Drive colours The colours are referred to as: Normal, High and Bold. (Default Terminate colours: Normal=Gray, High=Cyan, Bold=Yellow). Õµ Terminate Commander ÆÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ File manager Ƹ ³ Ctrl+drv to change: A B C D EúFúG H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ³ ³ Mask: *.* Path: C:\ ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ The top is used to display which drives are available in your system. colours mean: Drive not present = Normal Drive present = High Current drive = Bold ú ú Around a letter will show which path is available when pressing the TAB key. Small letters will always be CD-ROM drives (only when MSCDEX loaded). For a FAST change to another available drive, just hold down Ctrl and press the letter of the desired drive. Then the current directory on that drive will become current. Note that you can turn off drives to test in the configuration (general options 1) if some drives are too slow to test, like a CD-ROM or a tape streamer used as a special drive. A and B will always be highlighted even though they may not be available. K Mask Mask is the wildcard mask when reading the files in the current directory. If you use *.EXE or *.GIF only those files will be used. You can also use jokers (?) which only replace 1 character in the mask. - 149 - P Enter/create path When pressing P you can enter the complete path manually. If you want to create a sub directory you can also use the command. Just enter the new path and you will be asked to confirm creation. (Like: MD MKDIR). The small window below will tell you the size and how much free space is on the current disk. If the drive is a CD-ROM then it will say so and Free space will always be 0, since it isn't possible to write to a CD-ROM (at least not yet). Selected/Bytes/transfer time shows the status of files tagged and how long it would take to transfer them via modem, calculated on the CPS (characters per second) - which you can change when pressing T. Normally the maximum bps rate divided by 10 will give you this approximately. ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ Disk size 244.834.304 ³ ³ Disk free 18.702.336 ³ ³ Selected 0 ³ ³ Bytes 0 ³ ³ Transfer time => 0.00.00 ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Below is an example window with directories and files. Any directories will be highlighted and will have as size. It will show all information needed about the files in the current path, but you can also choose to have 2 windows at the same time. Press W to toggle windows, then you will not get so much information but you will be able to see and use 2 paths at the same time. Attributes are defined as follows: R = Read Only Nobody can write/delete the file/directory H = Hidden File/Directory is hidden when using the DIR command S = System File/directory is used by DOS or other operating system A = Archive This attribute is normally used to determine if the file should be backed up, but it can be used for other things also. Place the menubar on an entry and press A to change both the attributes on files and directories. The time shown after the attribute information is how long in minutes and seconds it would take to transfer the file with the current CPS. ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ Name Date Time Size Attr -=> ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´Cô ³ DOS 17-Mar-93 19:57 ---- 0:00 ³ ³ TERMINAT 17-Mar-93 19:57 ---- 0:00 ³ ³ AUTOEXEC.BAT 3-Apr-93 17:02 1229 ---A 0:00ú³ ³ COMMAND.COM 9-Apr-91 5:00 47845 ---A 0:24ú³ ³ CONFIG.SYS 1-Apr-93 17:36 939 ---A 0:00 ³ ³ COUNTRY.SYS 7-Feb-91 5:48 16992 ---A 0:08 ³ ³ IO.SYS 9-Apr-91 5:00 33430 RHSA 0:17 ³ ³ MSDOS.SYS 9-Apr-91 5:00 37394 RHSA 0:19 ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; - 150 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ <>.\ Directory commands ³ ³ +-* All Space (Un)Tag ³ ³ TAB Change to window 2 ³ ³ T CPS estimate 1920 ³ ³ Sort Nam/Ext/Date/Siz/No ³ ³ Copy Dir size ³ ³ Move View ³ ³ Rename Edit ³ ³ Delete File Find ³ ³ Attributes Windows ³ ³ Jump to DOS Disk info ³ ³ Compare menu Extensions ³ ³ Make path DOS command ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Movements Use cursor-up/down keys to move up and down the files/directories. Terminate also uses QUICK-keys, which means you can press ALT-A..ALT-Z To move the menubar to the next file starting with that letter. Left cursor (< An arrow pointing to the left) Will change to the parent directory. If you are in C:\DOS and press left cursor you will be in C:\, nothing will happen if you are already in the ROOT directory. This is much faster than other systems which first want you to move up to a parent or .. dir and press return. Right cursor (> An arrow pointing to the right) If you are positioned on a directory and press right arrow you will change to that directory. The reason why RETURN is not used is because when you upload, RETURN will start the transfer. Please get used to using the arrows, then you will notice how MUCH faster it is to navigate your hard disk. . Reread If you press the period, all drives will be re-tested to see if they are available, including drives which were excluded at configuration. \ Change to root A backslash will change to the ROOT directory on the current drive + Tag all Will tag all files - Untag all Will untag all files * Invert all Invert tags. All tagged files will be untagged and all untagged will be tagged. - 151 - SPACE Tag Tag/untag file under menubar. If you tag a GIF file then the picture information for the file you just tagged will be shown at the bottom line of the current file window. TAB Change window The filemanager can use 2 different paths, and you can switch between the paths by pressing TAB. T Enter CPS Enter CPS (characters per second) to base calculations on with total selected files and for each file. The normal CPS is a little less than your baudrate divided by 10. (19200 = 1920, 14400 = 1440, 2400 = 240). S Sort files Allows you to select how you want the files sorted in the current file window. Nam Filename Ext Extension, then filename Date Newest files at top Siz Biggest files at top No No sort C Copy file(s) (Print textfiles) Copy file at menubar - if any files are tagged they will be copied to another directory. If no files are tagged and the menubar is on a file then you could copy the file to another filename, just like a rename but you will also have the original file. If you are on a network, copying a large file or many files could slow the server down so you can press W while copying to enable the wait function after copying a file. Then Terminate will wait filesize / 100000 seconds between each file (min-max 1-12 sec.). If you need to print the file just enter PRN as destination name or LPT2,LPT3 depending on which port your printer is located. M Move file(s) Move file or files to another file directory, works just like COPY, but then deletes the original file afterwards. R Rename file Rename a file or a directory D (DEL) Delete file(s) Delete a file or a directory. You can also press the key called DEL/DELETE. If you try to delete a directory and it is not empty, you will be asked to confirm deletion of the entire directory and all sub-entries, normally called a KILLTREE function. A Change attributes/time/date Change attributes (see above) of a directory or a file or - 152 - time/date on files J DOS-Shell DOS-shell, calls COMMAND.COM (COMSPEC) and lets you execute whatever you like. You can setup how to swap memory out first in the configuration. U Compare paths Compares the 2 paths and tags files either IN or NOT IN the other window. N Send filename When you are online and want to upload some files, you will sometimes be asked to enter the filenames first. This function will send the filename on the current line and a space (in case of several files). Z Tree-size Will calculate the size of the current and all sub-directories. V View file View the file under the menubar. Calls the external lister program. E Edit file Edit the file under the menubar. Call the external editor. F Find file(s) Finds a file. You can enter a wildcard (*,?) filename. The current drive will first be searched, then all available drives. You can press space to skip the current search drive. Return to select file, or abort with ESC. When a file is found, the manager will change to the directory where the file is, tag the file and place the menubar on the file. W Window display style Toggle between 1 window or 2 windows display I Disk information Shows information on all available drives and if any drives are SUBST or remapped by a network. (Resolved path). You will be asked for a minimum free disk space warning value and an update timer, so you can update every x seconds. If you are on a network you can use it to monitor drives - so if the free space remaining on any drive is below the warn value, the size will flash and a beep will sound. X Edit extensions Works almost like Norton Commander. Please look in the file TERMINAT.EXT for more information on how to set this up. Lots of extensions are defined as a default. Let's say you press return on a file called HELLO.TXT. Then the external editor will be called and you can edit the file. You can identify all the files where an extension has been found by the ú at the same line as the filename. ³ AUTOEXEC.BAT 3-Apr-93 17:02 1229 ---A 0:00ú³ - 153 - \______found O DOS-command Here you can enter any command you like. When you then press return the command will be executed. You can enter a !M to swap out memory if this was not already selected in the configuration. But also a !F or !D which will be replaced with the name under the menubar and the current directory. B Both paths Make this window the same path as the other window. The bottom line is for all your external utilities which you can setup in the configuration. Look there for help on how to set these up. The programs are called when you press F1..F10 (also F11,F12). If you are located in a mail directory (outbound) with mail files then the address of the file will be calculated and shown in the bottom line of the current file window. Q Quiet Disable / enable the entire left side. Mostly used by blind persons. Alt-Shift-K Since ALT-A..ALT-Z is used for QUICK-keys, you have to press Alt-Shift-K to call the string grabber. Fido-style address Terminate will try to calculate the nodenumber of mail-files. However this is not always possible, so sometimes a wrong address can be shown. In most cases it will however show the correct address if you have set in your correct node address in user 1, which is the number that is used for the calculation. F1úPack F2úMemo F3úFrmt F4úVir F5úGSet F6úEcho F7úVPic F8ú40-L F9úPrn F0úNCD - 154 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° The Fax manager °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ -=> T E R M I N A T E F A X M A N A G E R <=- Introduction to the faxmanager The fax support in Terminate is one of the easiest and at the same time one of the most flexible and powerful fax-programs available. Most programs only allow you to send and receive and perhaps make a few cover pages. Terminate includes many more advanced features than these basic commands. It includes very advanced setup of almost everything, encryption of incoming faxes, incoming control, printing, scheduling and everything else you will need. On top of all this you can control the entire fax part from the command line, making Terminate a very useful tool. The fax manager menu ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Fax manager Ƹ ³ Receive faxes ³ ³ Force receive ³ ³ Send fax ³ ³ Multi fax ³ ³ Convert ³ ³ View faxes ³ ³ Print files ³ ³ File manager ³ ³ Fax phonebook ³ ³ View logfile ³ ³ Encryption menu ³ ³ Fax configuration ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; - 155 - Receive faxes ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍ͵ Fax receive Ƹ ³ Device ³ Async Modem COM2 ³ ³ ³ Chip ³ ZyXEL ³ ³ ³ Class ³ Class 2 ³ ³ ³ Model ³ U1496S V 6.10 P ³ ³ ³ Revision ³ U1496S V 6.10 P ³ ³ ³ Station ID ³ TERMINATE ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Connection speed ³ 14400 ³ Page ³ 1 ³ ³ Remote ID ³ TERMINATE ³ Bytes received ³ 17055 ³ ³ Error correction ³ Off ³ CPS rate ³ 1895 ³ ³ High resolution ³ Off ³ Online ³ 00.09 ³ ³ Faxes received ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ File name ³ 03120001.APF ³ ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Fax path ³ FAX\IN\ ³ To print 1 ³ ³ Printer ³ PRN ³ Printing (Paused) ³ ³ Log ³ StartReceive FAX\IN\03120001.APF ³ Page of ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ Toggle printing ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Status ³ Getting page data ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; This is an example of how it could look when you receive a fax. The receive mode is pretty automatic and you can only press ESC to exit or T to toggle printing. Force receive Pick up phone at once and start answering the fax NOW! Send fax ÕÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Send fax menu Ƹ ³ Quick note ³ ³ File selector ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Quick note Send a small note fast. You will be asked if you want to delete the old note first (QUICK.TXT). If you answer no the note from last time will be used and you can continue where you left off last time. File selector Use the file selector to send any file you like. You can also edit the file from here. You can use select between PCX,DCX,TIFF,BMP,APF and normal text files. They will automatically be converted to fax format before sending. Pick phone entry After you have selected quick note or file selector, you will be - 156 - presented with the quick phonelist selector below. Õ͵ TERMINAT.FON ÆÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Pick phone entry Ƹ ³ Enter to select Edit Add Manual number ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ # Name Number ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ 1 TurboPower, Terry Hughes 00 1 719 260 xxxx ³ ³ 2 DAN BBS fax number 4264xxxx ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; A To quickly add a new number. E To edit the entry. M Manually enter TO/NUMBER (will remember last input). ENTER To select entry. Accept fax info ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Send information Ƹ ³ Send with cover page ³ ³ ³ Send without cover page ³ ³ ³ To ³ TurboPower, Terry Hughes ³ ³ Number ³ 00 1 719 260 xxxx ³ ³ From ³ Bo Bendtsen ³ ³ Current cover page ³ COVER.TXT ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Send with cover page / Send without cover page Transmit the fax with or without cover page. The picture below is an example of how a fax transfer could look. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Fax send Ƹ ³ Device ³ Async Modem COM2 ³ ³ ³ Chip ³ ZyXEL ³ ³ ³ Class ³ Class 2 ³ ³ ³ Model ³ U1496S V 6.10 P ³ ³ ³ Revision ³ U1496S V 6.10 P ³ ³ ³ Station ID ³ TERMINATE ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Connection speed ³ 9600 ³ Page ³ 1 ³ ³ Remote ID ³ DAN BBS ³ Bytes sent ³ 6797 ³ ³ Error correction ³ Off ³ CPS rate ³ 1359 ³ ³ High resolution ³ Off ³ Online ³ 00.28 ³ ³ Faxes received ³ ³ Progress ³ 80% ³ ³ File name ³ FAX\OUT\QUICK.APF ³ Costs kr ³ 0,21 ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Fax path ³ FAX\OUT\ ³ ³ ³ Printer ³ ³ ³ ³ Log ³ ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ From ³ John Smith ³ ³ To ³ Bo Bendtsen 4362xxxx ³ ³ Subject ³ Hello there, how are you ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Status ³ Sending page ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; To - 157 - To-name used in cover page. Number The number to dial From From-name used in cover page, should normally be yours. Current cover page Change current cover page. Multi fax ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Multi fax Ƹ ³ Start multifax ³ ³ ³ Phonelist ³ MULTI.LST ³ ³ File to fax ³ MULTIFAX.TXT ³ ³ Multi cover page ³ COVER.TXT ³ ³ Reset phonelist ³ ³ ³ Cost estimate ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Start multifax Start sending fax to all numbers in phonelist. Phonelist List of numbers to send the fax to. Examples: You want to buy an apartment or a house! You write a specific list of what you want and what you demand. You look up 5-10 real-estate companies in the phone directory and write in the numbers in this list. You start the multifax and let it handle the rest. After that you should get some phone calls from some of these companies that have some the things you need. This can be used for almost any purpose, not only houses. You work in a company which every morning sends out faxes to sub-divisions about price changes or news. With this function you could make it automatic. File to fax File to fax to all the numbers. Multi cover page Cover page to use when sending multi-faxes. Reset phonelist Remove all control codes from phonelist and allow you to start all over. - 158 - Cost estimate Calculate approximately how much it will cost to send all faxes. Convert Convert a PCX,DCX,TIF,BMP or textfile to APF (fax-format) or convert an APF file to PCX/DCX. View faxes View a fax or how any file will look after it was converted to a fax. This function will use the external fax-viewer. Print files Print a fax or any other file using the current printer. File manager Start up the file manager. Fax phonebook Edit the fax phonebook allowing you to check everything or import a phonelist etc. View logfile View logfile with the external or internal viewer. Encryption menu ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Encrypt menu Ƹ ³ Password ³ ³ ³ Auto encrypt ³ Off ³ ³ Encrypt any file ³ ³ ³ Decrypt any file ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Password Password to use for auto encryption. Auto encrypt Encrypt files at once after they are received. If autoprint is enabled the fax will be encrypted after it has been printed. Encrypt any file Encrypt any file with your password. You can for example encrypt a secret file you need to send to a person and give him the password over the phone, so you are sure it cannot be read by anyone else. Decrypt any file Decrypt any file with the current password. If you convert/send/print an encrypted file it will automatically be decrypted first. - 159 - Fax configuration ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Fax configuration Ƹ ³ Auto config ³ ³ ³ Fax device ³ Default device ³ ³ Class ³ Detect ³ ³ Receive class ³ Class 2 ³ ³ Fax BPS rate ³ 9600 ³ ³ Slow init ³ On ³ ³ Initstring ³ ATM1V1X4 ³ ³ Error correction ³ Off ³ ³ Local ID ³ TERMINATE ³ ³ Fine resolution ³ Off ³ ³ Page width ³ 1728 ³ ³ Page header line ³ Page $P of $N, Via Terminate: $D $T, ³ ³ Pagesize & margins ³ Page: 0 Top margin: 0 Left margin: 60 ³ ³ Dial prefix ³ ATDT ³ ³ Dial timeout ³ 60 ³ ³ Forced timeout ³ 60 ³ ³ Send retries ³ 3 Retry delay: 60 ³ ³ Ring counter ³ 1 ³ ³ Incoming control ³ Off ³ ³ Filenames & paths ³ ³ ³ Printer setup ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Auto config Terminate will test which class to use and set default values. The first time you enter the fax menu, this function will be started. Fax device Which device to use whenever a fax is transmitted or received. Remember that many fax modems will not function with higher baudrates than 19200. Class Detect Will use highest class available in modem Class 1 Will force class 1 Class 2 Will force class 2 CAS Will force CAS Receive class When you already have a carrier in the hostmode or receive fax, the faxmodem needs to know which class to use for receiving. Fax bps rate Remember that 12000 and 14400 sometimes can cause 2400 fax connect if other end only supports 2400 Slow init Some older modems must send the fax commands with 2400 baud. This is most used by 2400/9600-Fax. 2400 baud modems, which can send fax with 9600 baud. - 160 - Initstring Normally you do not need to change this string. If you have a faxmodem that does not enable software flow control, you must look in your manual for information on doing this or choose the modem from the list here. Error correction Some faxmodems have the ability of using error correction (ECM). Do not confuse this with MNP4-5 or v42bis. Terminate will detect if your faxmodem supports fax error correction and select this for you if available. Only turn it on if you are testing. It is most likely that it will not work for both receive and send if this toggle is turned on and your faxmodem does not support it. Local ID Which station ID to present to the other side. A number without spaces or hyphens (-) is the safest thing to use. If you are going to use a name instead. Use only A-Z and a-z. Never use any international characters. Fine resolution Use FINE or NORMAL when converting/sending faxes. When using fine it will take twice the time to transmit the page, so only use that if you are sending something that needs to be of good quality or for example an application for a job. Page width The normal width of a fax is 1728 pixels. If you for some reason want to send a fax with a width of 2048 pixels you must be aware that some fax machines will either scale or cut off the part over 1728. Page header line One each faxed page, this line will be the first. It will use the small font from the current fontfile and can be defined just as you like it. The default line is: 'Page $P of $N, Via Terminate: $D $T, Sender: $I' And would for example be changed to: 'Page 1 of 2, Via Terminate: 14-Mar-95 18:44, Sender: TERMINATE' The $ strings that can be used are: $D Todays date in DD-MMM-YY format always 9 characters. $T Current time in HH:MM format $P Current page number $N Total number of pages including coverpage $X Total number of pages excluding coverpage $I Station ID $V Terminate version number $F From-name - 161 - $R To-name $S Subject Pagesize & margins Use the length 0 in page size to allow endless pages. top/left margins are in pixels/dots. 50 equal appr 1/4 inch (0.6 cm) Dial prefix Prefix to use for dialing when using command lines or multifax. If you send normal faxes using the phonebook, the prefix from the phonebook will be used. When faxing a quick note or a file and you select manual number, this dial prefix will also be used. Dial timeout How many seconds to wait for a fax connection when dialing out. Forced timeout When sending faxes and something goes wrong you can force Terminate to abort if nothing was transfered for a period of time. Enter a 0 if you for some strange reason do not want this safeguard. Send retries How many times to retry if call was busy and how many seconds to wait between each try. Ring counter Answer call on this ring number. Incoming control Use INCOMING.CTL for controlling who are allowed to send faxes to you. Read the file for more information. Filenames & paths ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Filenames & paths Ƹ ³ Fax path ³ FAX\ ³ ³ Fax receive path ³ FAX\IN\ ³ ³ Fax transmit path ³ FAX\OUT\ ³ ³ Font ³ T-865.FNT ³ ³ HP LaserJet font ³ ³ ³ CAS PCX Logo file ³ LOGO.PCX ³ ³ Cover page ³ COVER.TXT ³ ³ Fax phonebook ³ TERMINAT.FON ³ ³ Fax viewer ³ FAXSHOW ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Fax path Where to place all files and utilities used for fax. Many datafiles must be placed in this directory and cannot be moved. Fax receive path - 162 - Where to receive incoming faxes. Fax transmit path Where to store outgoing faxes. Font Which font to use when converting from text. T-437.FNT Codepage 473 : United states T-850.FNT Codepage 850 : Multilingual (Latin I) T-860.FNT Codepage 860 : Portuguese T-863.FNT Codepage 863 : Canadian-French T-865.FNT Codepage 865 : Nordic Terminate will autodetect which codepage you are using and select the correct font for you. If you have not setup your computer for the correct codepage, you should choose the correct font yourself. You can safely delete the fonts you are not using. If your codepage is different from the ones available, then 437 will be selected as default. With the T-FONTED.EXE you can even create a new font or edit the font. HP LaserJet font Use an HP LaserJet font instead of normal font. It must be a LaserJet font, it cannot be a DeskJet font. It must be bitmapped, not scaleable and the bitmap must not be compressed. Terminate scales each character in the font file to 20x16 if using NORMAL mode and 20x32 if using FINE. You should try using fonts that have a fontsize of 6-10 otherwise it might mess up after scaling. CAS PCX Logo file ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ Header date/time ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ ³ ³ PCX logo file ³ ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³Routing information³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ Text ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Cover page Each fax can have a defined fax cover send as first page. The default COVER.TXT will show you have to simply use this. $D Todays date in DD-MMM-YY format always 9 characters. $T Current time in HH:MM format $I Station ID $V Terminate version number - 163 - $F From-name $R To-name $S Subject Fax phonebook For your fax numbers you can have a seperate phonebook. If you only call a few BBS systems you can have all your phone numbers in the same book. Fax viewer The external program to view faxes. The program must be in the fax path. The standard is FAXSHOW. To start up in Page-scaled-to-screen-mode use: FAXSHOW /S Printer setup ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Printer setup Ƹ ³ Printer ³ HP Laser Jet III (300 dpi / PCL5) ³ ³ Printer path ³ PRN ³ ³ Auto print ³ Off ³ ³ Use scaling ³ On ³ ³ Suppress blanks ³ Off ³ ³ Print header ³ On ³ ³ External printing ³ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Printer Select which printer you want to use when printing faxes or other files. The following printers are directly supported: Epson FX (8 pins) Epson LQ (24 pins) HP Laser Jet II (150 dpi / PCL4) HP Laser Jet II (300 dpi / PCL4) HP Laser Jet III (150 dpi / PCL5) HP Laser Jet III (300 dpi / PCL5) Use external print utility Printer path You can specify the filename to use when printing or use PRN,LPT1,LPT2,LPT3 Auto print Print out faxes at once after they are received. Use scaling Scale down faxes to fit page when printing. Suppress blanks Suppress blanks on HP LaserJet printers. Print header - 164 - Print out a header with date/time etc. on top of each printed page. External printing Terminate cannot possibly support all printers in the world, so if your printer is not compatible with the internal printers in Terminate you can use the external print utility. When selected as printer this external utility be used. First Terminate converts the fax to a temporary file called FAXPRINT.PCX in PCX format, then this external print utility is called. It can either be an executable file or a batchfile if several operation are needed like the below example. If you want to export in DCX format just add a /DCX to the commandline and FAXPRINT.DCX will be exported. -FAXPRINT.BAT- Cd fax X-fax /l1 /fFAXPRINT.DCX /pHPPCL.DRV Rem Alchemy -o -P -Y1728 faxprint.pcx faxprint.pcl Rem Copy /b faxprint.pcl PRN This will first convert the faxfile to a PCL file which can be copied directly to your printer. With a program like Alchemy or others you can also scale down/up your faxes. Terminate exports as default to the PCX format since this is one of the widely used graphic formats and is supported by most software. Remember that to use this option you must set the printer to external printer as well. Fax command line switches Send a fax /FAX /SEND Filename Number-to-dial [To-user] [From-user] Filename is the full path to the file you want to fax. It can be an APF,PCX,DCX,TIFF,BMP format. If none of these extensions are used, Terminate will assume it is a DOS ASCII textfile. Number-to-dial cannot have any spaces. To-user and From-User must have the blanks replaced by underscores. You cannot use From-user without To-user. The From-user will default to your normal From-user. Examples: /FAX /SEND C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT 4264xxxx /FAX /SEND C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT 4264xxxx Bo_Bendtsen /FAX /SEND C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT 4264xxxx John_Smith Bo_Bendtsen Errorlevels (Look in SENDFAX.BAT for an example of how to use those). 6 Error 5 Busy 4 Data Call 3 Voice Call 2 User abort 1 TimeOut. 0 Ok Receive faxes - 165 - /FAX /RECEIVE Start up the receive part. With this command you could use Terminate as a fax machine and print out incoming faxes on your laser printer. Send multifaxes /FAX /MULTI filename file-with-numbers /RESET Start the multifax function. The filename is the file to fax, it can be a APF,PCX,DCX,TIF,BMP or a textfile. The file-with-numbers is a list of numbers to call. /RESET will delete control codes first. Examples: /FAX /MULTI MULTIFAX.TXT MULTI.LST /RESET /FAX /MULTI INFO1094.TXT MULTI.LST Convert files /CONVERT filename If the file is an APF fax file then it will get converted to a PCX file. Otherwise everything will be converted to APF. If the extension is not PCX,DCX,TIF,BMP then a textfile will be assumed. Examples: /CONVERT C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT (Will create C:\AUTOEXEC.APF) /CONVERT C:\TERMINAT.BMP (Will create C:\TERMINAT.APF) /CONVERT C:\FAX00001.TIF (Will create C:\FAX00001.APF) /CONVERT C:\FAX00001.APF (Will create C:\FAX00001.PCX) TERMINAT /FAX ? <- For more examples. Please note that only pictures up to 16 colours can be converted. Print files /PRINT filename When printing any file with this command, the file will first be converted to APF format and then sent to the printer. Do not use this command if you quickly want to print out a textfile. For this you should use: COPY textfile.ext PRN - 166 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° PreScription language °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ PreScription, The Terminate Programming Language IN NO EVENT WILL STRATHRORY SYSTEMS LIMITED, SERWIZ COMM OR ASSOCIATES BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ADDITIONAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE PRESCRIPTION OR SCRIPTS FOR PRESCRIPTION, EVEN IF WE HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Terminate has an extended script programming language. It is not only designed for logging onto a system and downloading a mail package, it has been designed with a wider view in mind. As usual Terminate throws up the ball and gives you loads of options, however if you want additional commands you cannot write yourself, then just contact us and we will try to include your suggestions. If you have never done any programming before it might be a little difficult to start out without prober guidance, however we have included various simple examples which will help you get started more easily. If you do not know what programming means, perhaps learning this simple, but yet powerful language can get you hook on the idea. You will not need this language unless you have special needs that Terminate cannot solve. BUT please be aware when you start programming. Anything is possible. That means that any possible error is also possible, and as Murphy's law describes, if anything can go wrong it will go wrong. So please do not blame us if something does goes wrong. List of all system commands, functions and variables AltPressed For Mouse SendFax Attr FreeArray MouseDetected SendRaw AttrBlock FreeMem MouseGotoXY Set BinToInt GetArray MouseLeft Set Binary GetAttrXY MouseRight SetAttr BlankAfter GetBaud MouseWindow SetBarTxt BlankBefore GetChar MouseX SetDate Box GetCharTimeout MouseY SetTerminal ByteToHex GetCharXY Next SetTime Carrier GetCrc NoSound ShiftPressed CharBlock GetCrcLong Numchars SizeText CharsWaiting GetData Open Sound Chr GetDate OpenText StLocase ClearScreen GetDateRaw Ord StUpcase Close GetInterface Parameter StackFree CloseCom GetParity PortIn StackLook CloseText GetPort PortOut StackPop ClrLastIncoming GetStop Pos StackPush CommentNum GetTime PosText Terminate CommentStr GetUserName Print TimeElapsed Copy GetUserPassword PrintLn TimerExpired CtrlPressed Getkey PutArray Until - 167 - Cursor Gosub PutMem Upload Delete Goto QueueLook VarFree DeleteFile GotoXY QueuePop VarNum DeviceResult Grabword QueuePush VarOfs DeviceResultStr Hangup Random VarSeg Dial HexToInteger Randomize Wait Download IOResult Read WaitEnter EndOfTextFile InWindow ReadText WaitFor EndWhile InitArray RemoveWindow WhereX Eof InitDevice Rename WhereY Exec InitDirect Repeat While ExitTerminate Input ResetTimer Window FilePos Integer Return WordToHex FileSize Interrupt Round Write FillBlock Key ScrCol WriteAStr FindFirst KeyPressed ScrLen WriteAttr FindNext LastIncoming Scroll WriteChar FindNextAttr Length Seek WriteColorStr FindNextSize LongToHex SeekText WriteLnText FindNextTime MainLoop SelectBar WriteStr FlushInBuffer Mem Send WriteTerminal WriteText What can a script do for me ? A script can do many things. First of all it can automate some of your daily needs. Many would use a script language for getting onto a system and uploading and downloading mail packages or perhaps to check if there is a new filelist and download it. There are really many more things you can do easily. Compiling scripts Before running a script Terminate will automatically detect if it has been compiled and will compile it if necessary. The source code is in files with the extension .TSL and the compiled ready to run script is the .TSC file. It is possible to run .TSC files without having the source code. Just access the Alt-G script menu or call Terminate with the command line /SCRIPT:script to start a script. Include files The Include command enables you to put certain functions into smaller files or libraries if you like. Just remember that the entire contents are put into the finished compiled script. Include SCREEN.INC Will include the source code library called SCREEN.INC. Language syntax You can enter all commands or system variables in both upper, lower or mixed case. PRS will upper case everything while compiling, which means you could both enter the command "Print" or "PRINT". PRS will only keep the case of strings inside the " signs. WriteStr x,1, "Hello" would be translated to WRITESTR X,1,"Hello" If you make an error somewhere in your code you will be told at which line the error occurred. However runtime errors will only be shown - 168 - at the time the error occurs. For example division by zero will make your program abort. Comment lines Comment lines are used to make the source code more easily understood the next time you or somebody else have to add or change something. You could almost say the more comment lines the better, since they are not compiled into the finished module and therefore do not take up any memory. A comment can either be the only thing on the line or after a command and must start with a % sign. Example: % This is a comment line only. Set Turbo = "ON" % Everything after here is comments. As a special compiler command you can use the "Comment". In this way you can insert comments that can later be retrieved. To insert your own copyright lines you could do: Comment "The Terminate PreScription demonstration script" Comment "This script is (Freeware) 1995 by Bo Bendtsen" You can use 5 Comment lines each of 50 characters. Program structure A program consists of functions and variables. You can have as many functions as you like and in any order you like. Making a structured program can increase speed and make it easier to change. You do not need to have functions or variables, you can simply use commands that are built in. You can start immediately without any definitions or strange syntaxes. One of the smallest scripts you can make could be one single line like this: Print "Hello world" Variables A simple programming language first of all needs variables. A variable is like variable X and Y you perhaps learned about in school. It simply means a given identifier can be assigned a value. With PreScription hereafter always mentioned as "PRS" you have two kinds of variables called numbers and strings. The limit on variables is 16000 but you will probably never need that many or you will run out of memory first and it is always considered best to use as few variables as possible. All variables are global variables which can be accessed from all parts of the script. The syntax of a variable name is simple. It must begin with a letter from A to Z and then can be followed by A-Z,0-9,_. Valid names: Apple Computer X X49 Cool_5_dude Invalid names: 25XX *Hello* _NotMe Numbers PRS uses something called floating point numbers. These numbers are - 169 - limited to 2.9e-39..1.7e38 which are very very large numbers, so you should never be concerned about using too many decimals. Please note that all decimal number must use dot (.) and not comma (,) The numbers are used for storing information and for calculating, here are a few examples that might help you understand better. Identifier Value | | Set Apples = 5 The variable called Apples now has the value 5. If someone eats one of the apples you can calculate: Set Apples = Apples - 1 You now have 4 apples. Another example to calculate how much discount you got on your new modem Set NewModem = 495 Set Discount = 0.15 Set NewModem = NewModem * Discount The result in NewModem would now be 74.25 Strings Strings are characters after each other and could look like this: "This is a string" The " signs are to tell PRS when the string starts and stops. A string can be up to 255 characters long and can have any value from ASCII 0 to ASCII 255. Some examples: Set Part1 = "A Terminate " Set Part2 = "a day keeps the doctor away" Set Joke = Part1 + Part2 To manipulate the strings there are many commands described later in this document, please look at the examples and see how some of them work. Arrays You have 32 different Arrays you can use to store various tables or data. Arrays are controlled by these commands and functions. All will return a non-zero value in DosError if failed. InitArray (Command) Syntax: InitArray Array,Elements,ElementSize Array 1-32 Elements 1-32500 ElementSize 1-64999 bytes - 170 - The total size of each array CANNOT exceed 65000 bytes. You can calculate the total size like this: Elements * (ElementSize+1). Use the FreeMem function to test for free memory before initialising an array. Example: InitArray 1,10,80 Array 1 = 10 Elements * (80 bytes + 1) = 810 bytes PutArray (Command) Syntax: PutArray Array,Element,Expression Save a value in an array. Example: PutArray 1,5,"Save Me!" GetArray (Function) Syntax: GetArray Array,Element Returns the value that was saved in the array. Example: PrintLn GetArray(1,5) FreeArray (Command) Syntax: FreeArray Array Free memory and allow array to be re-used. PreScription will automatically free all arrays on exit, but for your own sake ALWAYS free an array when it is no longer in use. Example: FreeArray 1 Example of array Set ArrayName=1 Set name of array InitArray ArrayName,10,100 Init array 10x(100+1) = 1010 PutArray ArrayName,1,"HELLO "+"WORLD" Set element 1 to "HELLO WORLD" PrintLn GetArray(ArrayName,1) Print element 1 on screen FreeArray ArrayName Free memory Expressions and operators An expression is made out of operators and constants or variables. An expression could look like this: 80186 + (301 - 1) Carrier = "ON" 28800 / 2400 * 12 X = 500 < Y The operators PRS understands: + Addition < Less than - Subtraction > Greater than * Multiplication = Equal to - 171 - / Division <> Not equal to \ Mod (remainder) <= Less than or equal to ^ Power >= Greater than or equal to & And | Or ! Not The various operators have different priorities in order to determine which ones to process first. Unary operators ! Multiplying operators * \ / & ^ Adding operators + - | Relational operators = <> < > <= >= If you want different priorities just use the parentheses () 20 - 2 * 5 = 10 * is higher than - (20 - 2) * 5 = 90 () is higher than any operator. User defined functions Creating your own functions is useful when you do the same thing over and over again or simply want a more structured program. A function is completely user defined and can contain either built-in commands or calls to other functions you have made. Function CountTo100() Set X=1 Repeat GotoXY 1,1 Print x Set X=X+1 Until X>100 EndFunc This simple function does nothing other than count to 100 on the top left corner of your screen. You call the function by entering CountTo100() To send variables to a function you need to include the variable name in the parentheses () like this: Function CountMore(HowMany) Set X=1 Repeat GotoXY 1,1 Print x Set X=X+1 Until X>HowMany EndFunc Now you can count to as many as you like. Enter: CountMore(50) And the function will count to 50. - 172 - The harder part with understanding functions is to see how it can be used to return results. Here is an easy example. Function HappyHour(Drinks) Set ExtraDrinks = Drinks * 2 EndFunc ExtraDrinks To call the function you need to display or store the return value. To display you could: PrintLn "Normal hours I get ",5," drinks" PrintLn "When it is happy hour I get ",HappyHour(5)," drinks" If you want to store the result in another variable use the following: Set DrinkResult = HappyHour(5) A function can also return a value directly. Whatever is on the EndFunc line will be returned as the result. Function names follow the same rules as variable names and must at least end with () if no parameter is used. IMPORTANT: A function must be defined before it is called. Statements PRS supports many basic statements which will be explained below. If Else Endif The If statement is used for evaluating an expression. You can use it for testing if certain variables have a certain value like this: Set Apples = 6 If Apples > 5 Print "Plenty left" Endif Since Apples is 6 you will see Plenty left printed on the screen. If you set Apples = 5 or less then everything will be skipped until the Endif. An If statement must always end with an Endif command, which tells PRS that the statement stops here. The Else statement means what it says. If the If statement is false the Else statement will be used. Set Apples = 4 If Apples > 5 Print "Plenty left" Else Print "Please buy more" Endif Now Apples is 4 which makes the If statement false and you will see Please buy more on your screen. Goto Labels - 173 - The Goto command is used to jump to other locations in your script. You will need to define a label which uses the following format :LabelName The label follow the same rules as variable names and must start with a colon : Some examples: :Start :End The Goto command syntax: Goto LabelName :Start PrintLn "Start" Goto JumpJump PrintLn "NeverMe" :JumpJump PrintLn "Finished" PrintLn "NeverMe" will then be skipped. Goto command should be avoided as much as possible since it creates unstructured programs. Only use for simple small programs. Gosub Labels Return Gosub commands are almost the same as Functions except that you cannot send any variables or get any results back. It simply carries out a single task and returns to the previous location. If,for example, you have a menu you want to display from several places in your script using the Gosub command could save you having the same menu twice. However it is recommended to use functions which are more flexible. The Return command tells PRS to return to the next line following the Gosub. Goto Main :Menu PrintLn "Start" Return PrintLn "NeverMe" :Main Gosub Menu Loops Loop statements are using for repeating the same commands a variable number of times, until something is true or something is false. For Next For is used for performing the same commands a defined number of times. For has 4 parameters that have to be given. - 174 - For Variable,Start,End,Increase The variable is a normal variable. Start is the starting value. End is the ending value Increase is the value to be increased after every Next command. When Counter is equal to the ending value the script will proceed. For Counter,1,10,1 PrintLn Counter Next Will display the numbers 1 - 10 For Counter,10,1,-1 PrintLn Counter Next Will display the numbers 10 - 1 While EndWhile This loop continues until the statement is false. In other words while the statement is true all commands until the EndWhile will be executed. Set Counter = 10 While Counter <= 20 PrintLn Counter Set Counter = Counter + 1 EndWhile This will print out the numbers 10-20 Repeat Until Repeat is much like While except that Repeat continues until the statement is true. Set Counter = 20 Repeat PrintLn Counter Set Counter = Counter - 1 Until Counter < 10 This will also print out the numbers 20-10 Stopping a script SHIFT-ESC, K If your script goes into an endless loop, you can force or at least try to stop it by first pressing Shift-Esc and then K for Kill. Built-in commands and functions In addition to your own variables you can use and change certain pre-defined variables. A system function can, for example, tell you how much memory you have left (FREEMEM). A system variable could be ATTR which holds the current color attribute and which you can change as you like. A command is just like a system function except that it does not return anything. - 175 - In the following section of the manual you will find 3 things: System commands = Executes a command only, no value returned (Command) System functions = Executes command and returns value (Function) System variables = Like a normal variable which can be changed (Variable) Please note that all system variables are changed for the entire Terminate, so be careful and if you change something, remember to set it back to the original value afterwards. Please note the () which will be mentioned for each description. Screen, sound handling Attr (Variable) Purpose: Current screen color attribute byte. Use the T-COLOR.EXE or the color selector inside Terminate to find the colors you need. Returns: 0-255 Example: Set Attr = 14 Set screen attribute to yellow Set Color = Attr Save the current attribute in variable AttrBlock (Command) Purpose: Fills an area on the screen with a certain attribute Syntax : AttrBlock x1,y1,x2,y2,attribute Example: AttrBlock 1,2,70,20,10 Fill area (1,2)-(70,20) with color attribute light green Box (Command) Purpose: Make a textbox on the screen using boxtypes and attributes Syntax : Box x1,y1,x2,y2,attribute,boxtype boxtype: 0=Blank, 1=Single, 2=Double, 3=Double top+single side, 4=Double side+single top, 5=* and -|, 6=Single top only, 7=Double top only Example: Box 1,1,80,25,23,1 Draw a box on the screen using single boxes and gray on blue. Notes : Attribute is same format as the Attr variable CharBlock (Command) Purpose: Draws a block of the same character using default attribute Syntax : CharBlock x1,y1,x2,y2,character Example: CharBlock 1,1,80,25,"*" Fills the entire screen with the * character ClearScreen (Command) Purpose: Clears the entire screen, using the current attribute Syntax : ClearScreen Cursor (Command) Purpose: Cursor control Syntax : Cursor cursortype cursortype: 0 = Off, 1 = On, 2 = Max Example: Cursor 0 Turns cursor off - 176 - FillBlock (Command) Purpose: Fill an area on the screen, with an attribute and a character Syntax : FillBlock x1,y1,x2,y2,attribute,character Example: FillBlock 2,2,79,24,3,"#" Fills the area (2,2)-(79,24) with # in the cyan color GetAttrXY (Function) Purpose: Returns attribute byte from screen on location x,y Syntax : GetAttrXY(x,y) Example: Set SaveColor = GetAttrXY 79,5 Sets SaveColor to the color of 79,5 on the screen GetCharXY (Function) Purpose: Returns the character from screen on location x,y Syntax : GetCharXY(x,y) Example: Set SaveChar = GetCharXY 1,1 Sets SaveChar to the character of position 1,1 on the screen GotoXY (Command) Purpose: Move cursor to location x,y Syntax : GotoXY x,y Example: GotoXY 40,12 Goto the middle of the screen InWindow (Variable) Purpose: Use Window offset for certain screen commands Returns: 0 or 1 Example: Set InWindow=0 Current window offset not used Set InWindow=1 Current window offset used Does not work for Print, PrintLn, GotoXY Mouse (Command) Purpose: Turn on/off the mouse Syntax : Mouse action action: 0=Off, 1=On Example: Mouse 1 Turns on mouse MouseDetected (Function) Purpose: Report if a mouse driver was detected Syntax : MouseDetected Returns: 0=No, 1=Yes Example: If MouseDetected=1 MouseGotoXY (Command) Purpose: Sets mouse to X,Y on the screen Syntax : MouseGotoXY x,y Example: MouseGotoXY 1,1 Move mouse to top left corner - 177 - MouseLeft (Function) Purpose: Report if the left button was pressed Syntax : MouseLeft Returns: 0=No, 1=Yes Example: If MouseLeft=1 MouseRight (Function) Purpose: Report if the right button was pressed Syntax : MouseRight Returns: 0=No, 1=Yes Example: If MouseRight=1 MouseWindow (Command) Purpose: Sets coordinates where mouse is visible Syntax : MouseWindow x1,y1,x2,y2 Example: MouseWindow 5,10,15,70 Force mouse to be inside (5,10)-(15,70) MouseX (Function) Purpose: Report the X position of the mouse Returns: MouseX Example: If MouseX<10 MouseY (Function) Purpose: Report the Y position of the mouse Syntax : MouseY Example: If MouseY>=25 NoSound (Command) Purpose: Turn off sound soundcard or internal speaker Syntax : NoSound Print (Command) Purpose: Display a string on the screen at current cursor position Syntax : Print expression Example: Print "Hello world" Displays hello on the screen Print 25*10 Calculates result 250 and displays on screen PrintLn (Command) Purpose: Display a string on the screen and press enter Syntax : PrintLn expression Example: Same command as Print except that CR+LF is added to string RemoveWindow (Command) Purpose: Remove a window that was set by the Window command Syntax : RemoveWindow Removes top window from screen ScrCol (Variable) - 178 - Purpose: Holds the number of columns on the screen (80) Returns: 40-132 Example: Print ScrCol Displays the current number of columns on screen ScrLen (Variable) Purpose: Holds the number of lines on the screen (25) Returns: 25-60 Example: Print ScrLen Displays the current number of lines on screen Scroll (Command) Purpose: Scroll a region of the screen Syntax : Scroll direction,x1,y1,x2,y2,positions,attribute direction: 0=Clear, 1=uP, 2=DOWN, 3=LEFT, 4=RIGHT a=attribute } positions are number of columns or lines to scroll attribute is the attribute to use in the cleared area Example: Scroll 4,1,1,30,5,2,7 Scroll (1,1)-(30,5) to columns to the right, clear with gray SelectBar (Function) Purpose: The menubar selector option used in most menus in Terminate Syntax : Selectbar(y,ylen,start,attr,barx1,barx2,bartxty) Returns: 0-25 Example: Set x=SelectBar(1,3,x,113,1,20,0) Menubar starts at in the top corner of the active window or screen and is 3 lines long, starting on menuline x. Menubar is color 113 and is visible from columns 1-20. No bartext is available. Returns selection in x. 0=Esc pressed. Notes : SetBarTxt can be used to define helplines, set bartxty to the line where you want it, ScrLen is normal, 0=disable SetAttr (Command) Purpose: Sets the current color attribute Syntax : SetAttr attribute Example: SetAttr 9 Set color to light blue SetBarTxt (Command) Purpose: Sets helplines for SelectBar Syntax : SetBarTxt num,string Example: SetBarTxt 1,"This is helpline 1" When selectbar is in menu-position 1 this can be displayed Sound (Command) Purpose: Sound a tune using the sound card or internal speaker Syntax : Sound frequency Example: Sound 440 Set the sound to the concert pitch WhereX (Function) Purpose: To return the current X position of the cursor - 179 - Returns: 1-132 Example: Print WhereX Displays the current X position of the cursor WhereY (Function) Purpose: To return the current Y position of the cursor Returns: 1-60 Example: Print WhereX Displays the current Y position of the cursor Window (Command) Purpose: Set a window and make it the current window for all functions Syntax : Window x1,y1,x2,y2,boxtype,shadow,frameattr,txtattr, headerattr,headertxt boxtype: Same as the box-command shadow : 0=no-shadow, 1=shadowtype 1, 2=shadowtype 2 Example: Window 10,1,70,10,1,1,30,23,27," Test window " Sets window at (10,1)-(70,10) using single boxes and shadowtype 1, blue background and various foreground and header as above. WriteAStr (Command) Purpose: Display a string at position x,y and change default color Syntax : WriteAStr x,y,attribute,expression Example: WriteAStr 1,1,11,"I am light cyan" Displays the string at 1,1 in light cyan color WriteAttr (Command) Purpose: Write a single attribute at position x,y Syntax : WriteAttr x,y,attribute Example: WriteAttr 1,1,14 Change attribute at 1,1 to yellow WriteChar (Command) Purpose: Write a single character at x,y Syntax : WriteChar x,y,character Example: WriteChar 1,1,"X" Displays X in position 1,1 WriteColorStr (Command) Purpose: Display a string with several colors Syntax : WriteColorStr x,y,expression Example: WriteColorStr 1,1,"^014 Yellow ^007 Gray" The ^014 means change to color 14 at this position. It is the same values as the normal attribute color. WriteStr (Command) Purpose: Display a string at position x,y Syntax : WriteStr x,y,expression Example: WriteStr 1,1,"Hello world" Writes the string at 1,1 Keyboard control - 180 - AltPressed (Function) Purpose: Checks if a Alternate is pressed on the keyboard Returns: 0=No, 1=Yes, Alt is being pressed Example: If AltPressed=1 CtrlPressed (Function) Purpose: Checks if a Control is pressed on the keyboard Returns: 0=No, 1=Yes, Ctrl is being pressed Example: If CtrlPressed=1 Getkey (Function) Purpose: Retrieves a key from the keyboard, wait if no key is ready Returns: 0-65535, value of key Example: PrintLn(GetKey) Display the value of the key pressed Input (Function) Purpose: Input a string on screen Syntax : Input(x,y,length,textattribute,editattribute,string) Returns: String Example: Set Result=Input(1,1,40,11,3,"Input string") Inputs a string at position 1,1 with the length of 40 characters on the colors cyan and light cyan. Key (Variable) Purpose: Hold the last keyboard code Returns: 0-65535 Example: While Key<>13 While Escape is not pressed run the loop KeyPressed (Function) Purpose: Checks if a key has been pressed on the keyboard Returns: 0=No key ready, 1=key ready to be read by Getkey Example: While KeyPressed=0 While no key is pressed run the loop ShiftPressed (Function) Purpose: Checks if a Shift is pressed on the keyboard Returns: 0=No, 1=Yes, Shift is being pressed Example: If ShiftPressed=1 WaitEnter (Command) Purpose: Wait until someone presses the ENTER key Syntax : WaitEnter Variable manipulation BlankAfter (Function) Purpose: Add spaces after a string until a specified length is obtained Example: BlankAfter(string,length) Returns: String - 181 - Example: Print BlankAfter("Test",7) Displays "Test " on the screen BlankBefore (Function) Purpose: Add spaces before a string until a specified length is obtained Example: BlankBefore(string,length) Returns: String Example: Print BlankBefore("Test",7) Displays " Test" on the screen Chr (Function) Purpose: Converts a number to the ASCII value Syntax : Chr(number) Returns: Character #0-#255 Example: Set Val=Chr(200) Copy (Function) Purpose: Copy out part of a string Example: Copy(string,start,characters) Returns: String Example: Print Copy("Test",1,2) Displays "Te" on the screen Delete (Function) Purpose: Delete part of string Syntax : Delete(string,index,characters) Returns: String Example: Print Delete("Hello",4,2) Displays "Hel" on screen Grabword (Function) Purpose: Return a single word in a string Syntax : GrabWord(expression,word-number) Returns: String Example: Print GrabWord("Hello World",2) Displays "World" on screen Integer (Function) Purpose: Cut off all decimals and returner integer Syntax : Integer(number) Returns: Integer Example: Print Integer(1.50) Prints the number 1 Length (Function) Purpose: Return the length of a string Syntax : Length(string) Returns: 0-255 Example: Print length("test") Displays the number 4 on screen Numchars (Function) - 182 - Purpose: Return a string with a number of the same characters Syntax : Numchars(character,numbers) Returns: String Example: Print Numchars("-",5) Displays "-----" on screen Ord (Function) Purpose: Converts an ASCII value to ordinary value Syntax : Ord(number) Returns: Character #0-#255 Example: Set Val=Ord("A") Parameter (Function) Purpose: Return command line parameter when calling script Syntax : Parameter(number) Returns: String Example: Set ComPort=Parameter(1) Pos (Function) Purpose: Search for sub-string in string Syntax : Pos(sub-string,string) Returns: 0=Not found, 1=255 position found Example: Print Pos("World","Hello World") Displays the number 6 on screen Round (Function) Purpose: Round an real number Syntax : Round(number) Returns: Integer Example: Print Round(1.49) Prints the number 1 Print Round(1.50) Prints the number 2 Set (Command) Purpose: Assign a value to a variable Syntax : Set variable name = value Example: Set Result = 20*10 Set Apples = "Good tasting" StLocase (Function) Purpose: Lowercase a string Syntax : StLocase(string) Returns: String Example: Print LoUpcase("HELLO") Displays hello on screen StUpcase (Function) Purpose: Uppercase a string Syntax : StUpcase(string) Returns: String Example: Print StUpcase("hello") Displays HELLO on screen Stacks and queues - 183 - A stack is a First-In-Last-Out buffer, which can be used for saving variables or values that need to be used later. A queue is a First-In-First-Out buffer (FIFO) which can be used for buffering variables. QueueLook (Command) Purpose: Retrieves the latest variable from the queue without popping Syntax : QueueLook variable Example: QueueLook Count Count is set to latest value pushed on queue without popping QueuePop (Command) Purpose: Retrieve the latest variable pushed on the user-queue Syntax : QueuePop variable Example: QueuePop Count Takes the latest pushed value from queue and puts into Count QueuePush (Command) Purpose: Pushes a variable on the user-queue to be retrieved later Syntax : QueuePush variable Example: QueuePush Count Push Count on the user-queue StackLook (Command) Purpose: Retrieves the latest variable from the stack without popping Syntax : StackLook variable Example: StackLook Count Count is set to latest value pushed on stack without popping StackPop (Command) Purpose: Retrieve the latest variable pushed on the user-stack Syntax : StackPop variable Example: StackPop Count Takes the latest pushed value from stack and puts into Count StackPush (Command) Purpose: Pushes a variable on the user-stack to be retrieved later Syntax : StackPush variable Example: StackPush Count Push Count on the user-stack Serial interface handling All commands will return a resultcode in DeviceResult, if 0 the command was executed succesfully. Carrier (Function) Purpose: Check if the carrier is high Returns: 0=Carrier low, 1=Carrier high Example: While Carrier=1 While carrier detect is high run the loop - 184 - CharsWaiting (Function) Purpose: Get number of chars waiting in input buffer Returns: 0-65535 Example: Print "Waiting characters ",CharsWaiting CloseCom (Command) Purpose: Close the current device Syntax : CloseCom ClrLastIncoming (Command) Purpose: Clear LastIncoming to 255 #0 Syntax : ClrLastIncoming DeviceResult (Variable) Purpose: The last result code from the device, 0=Ok Returns: 0-65535 Example: Print "Device result ",DeviceResult DeviceResultStr (Function) Purpose: Return error text of the last result code from the device, 0=Ok Syntax : DeviceResultStr(Resultcode) Returns: String Example: Print "Device result ",DeviceResultStr(DeviceResult) FlushInBuffer (Command) Purpose: Flush the incoming device buffer Syntax : FlushInBuffer GetBaud (Function) Purpose: Get the current baud rate Returns: 0-115200 Example: Print "Current baud ",GetBaud GetChar (Function) Purpose: Get a character from the device Returns: #0..#255 Example: Print GetChar GetCharTimeout (Function) Purpose: Get a character from the device, timeout in tics Syntax : GetCharTimeout(number-of-tics) Example: Set Received=GetCharTimeout(91) Try to get a character from the device timeout in 5 seconds Notes : A PC has 18.2 tics per second 5x18.2 = 91 tics = 5 seconds GetData (Function) Purpose: Get the current databits Returns: 7-8 Example: Print "Current databits ",GetData - 185 - GetInterface (Function) Purpose: Get the serial interface type in use Returns: 0=NoDevice, 1=UartDevice, 2=Int 14h, 3=Fossil, 4=Digiboard Example: Print "Active serial interface type ",GetInterface GetParity (Function) Purpose: Get the current parity in use Returns: N=None, O=Odd, E=Even, M=Mark, S=Space Example: Print "Current parity in use ",GetParity GetPort (Function) Purpose: Get the active port number Returns: 1-8 Example: Print "Active port ",GetPort GetStop (Function) Purpose: Get the current stopbits Returns: 1-2 Example: Print "Current stopbits ",GetStop Hangup (Command) Purpose: Drop the carrier, using the hangup string or toggling DTR Syntax : Hangup InitDevice (Command) Purpose: Open one of the devices in Terminate Syntax : InitDevice devicenumber,port,baud Example: InitDevice 4,2,57600 Open device 4, using port 2 with baud 57600 Notes : If another device is already open it will be closed. InitDirect (Command) Purpose: Open a device and initialise the communications port directly Syntax : InitDirect interface,port,baud,databits,stopbits,parity, inbufsize,outbufsize,flowctrl Interface : 0=NoDevice, 1=UartDevice, 2=Int 14h, 3=Fossil, 4=Digiboard Port : 1-8 Databits : 7-8 Stopbits : 1-2 Parity : N=None, O=Odd, E=Even, M=Mark, S=Space Inbufsize : 10-65000 Outbufsize: 10-65000 Flowctrl : 0=None, 1=RTS/CTS, 2=XonXoff, 3=DSR/DTR Example: InitDirect 1,2,38400,8,1,"N",1024,1024,1 Use Uart on COM2 with 38400,8N1 and 1024 bytes buffers for in/out. RTS/CTS flowcontrol Notes : If another device is already open it will be closed. LastIncoming (Variable) Purpose: Holds the last 255 characters received by GetChar - 186 - Returns: String Example: Print LastIncoming Send (Command) Purpose: Send a string to the device with modem delay. Syntax : Send expression Example: Send "ATA^M" Send the HAYES answering command to device SendRaw (Command) Purpose: Send a string to the device in raw format Syntax : SendRaw expression Example: Sendraw "----------------" WaitFor (Command) Purpose: Wait for a string from device Syntax : WaitFor expression,seconds Example: WaitFor "Enter name:",20 If IOResult<>0 Goto Timeout Endif Notes : IOResult=0 Got String, IOResult=2 Timeout File handling All file commands will give the result code in IOResult. IOResult (Variable) Purpose: Result of the last file operation Returns: 0-65535, 0=Ok Example: Print IOResult PRS supports two kind of files. Binary files and text files. Binary files are data files like TERMINAT.EXE which contain characters from #0..#255. Text files like AUTOEXEC.BAT are line based and easier to use. PRS allows you to have 8 open files at the same time. 4 binary files and 4 text files. Text files Textfiles are easier to understand when you see the following example: OpenText 1,"C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT",0 While EndofTextFile(1)=0 PrintLn readtext(1) EndWhile CloseText 1 This will open a text file and print the entire file on your screen. CloseText (Command) Purpose: Close a text file Syntax : CloseText handle - 187 - Example: CloseText 1 EndOfTextFile (Function) Purpose: Tells you if we are on the last line in the file Syntax : EndofTextFile(handle) Returns: 0=No, 1=Yes, end-of-file Example: While EndofTextFile(1)=0 Continue until end-of-file OpenText (Command) Purpose: Opens a text file for reading, writing or appending. Syntax : OpenText handle,filename,mode handle : 1-4 filename: Full pathname of file mode : 0=Read, 1=Write, 2=Append Example: OpenText 1,"C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT",0 Opens text file 1 for reading. PosText (Function) Purpose: Report the byte position in a text file. Syntax : PosText(handle) Example: Print "Position ",PosText(1) Show the byte-position on text file 1 ReadText (Function) Purpose: Read 1 line from a text file Syntax : ReadText(handle) Returns: String Example: PrintLn ReadText(1) Reads and displays one line from text file 1 SeekText (Command) Purpose: Seek to a file position in a text file. Syntax : SeekText handle,position Position is the byte-position in file 0=First byte Example: SeekText 1,1000 Seeks to position 1000 in the file SizeText (Function) Purpose: Report the size in bytes on a text file Syntax : SizeText(handle) Returns: filesize-in-bytes Example: Print SizeText(handle) WriteLnText (Command) Purpose: Write a string to a text file Syntax : WriteLnText handle,string Example: WriteLnText 1,OutString Writes the contents of OutString to text file 1 WriteText (Command) Purpose: Write a string to a text file without CR+LF - 188 - Syntax : WriteText handle,string Example: WriteText 1,OutString Writes the contents of OutString to text file 1 Binary files Close (Command) Purpose: Close a file Syntax : Close handle Example: Close 1 Eof (Function) Purpose: Tells you if we are on the last position in the binary file Syntax : EndofTextFile(handle) Returns: 0=No, 1=Yes, end-of-file Example: While Eof(1)=0 Continue until end-of-file FilePos (Function) Purpose: Report the byte position in a binary file. Syntax : FilePos(handle) Example: Print "Position ",FilePos(1) Show the byte-position on binary file 1 FileSize (Function) Purpose: Report the size in bytes on a binary file Syntax : FileSize(handle) Returns: filesize-in-bytes Example: Print FileSize(handle) Open (Command) Purpose: Opens a binary file for reading, writing or both. Syntax : Open handle,filename,mode,filemode handle : 1-4 filename: Full pathname of file mode : 0=Read, 1=Write, 2=Append filemode: 0=ReadOnly,1=WriteOnly,2=ReadWrite,+64=DenyNone Example: Open 1,"TERMINAT.CFG",0,0 Opens binary file 1 for reading. Read (Function) Purpose: Reads a number of characters from a binary file Syntax : Read(handle,numbytes) Returns: String Example: Set FileGrab=Read(1,20) Read 20 characters into FileGrab Seek (Command) Purpose: Seek to a file position in a binary file. Syntax : Seek handle,position Position is the byte-position in file 0=First byte Example: Seek 1,1000 Seeks to position 1000 in the file - 189 - Write (Command) Purpose: Write a number of characters to a binary file Syntax : Write(1,expression) Example: Write(1,"HELLO") DOS commands The result of each call is stored in IOResult DeleteFile (Command) Purpose: Deletes a file Syntax : DeleteFile filename Example: DeleteFile "TERMINAT.BAK" Exec (Command) Purpose: Call a DOS command Syntax : Exec expression Example: Exec "TERMAIL\TM.EXE !M" Call the TerMail program Notes : All the !-commands described other places in the manual can be used here. !M=Swap out memory FindFirst (Function) Purpose: Finds a file allowing wildcards Syntax : FindFirst(expression,attribute) Attribute: 1=ReadOnly, 2=Hidden, 4=System, 8=VolumeID, 16=Directory, 32=Archive, 63=AnyFile Returns: Filename only or blank if no matches Example: Print FindFirst("C:\*.*",32) FindNext (Command) Purpose: Find next match after a FindFirst use Returns: Filename found Example: PrintLn FindFirst("C:\*.*",32) While IOResult=0 PrintLn FindNext EndWhile Will display to entire root of your C-drive FindNextSize (Variable) Purpose: Returns filesize of last FindNext Returns: Size in bytes Example: PrintLn FindNextSize FindNextAttr (Variable) Purpose: Returns file attribute of last FindNext Returns: Byte Example: PrintLn FindNextAttr FindNextTime (Variable) Purpose: Returns filetime of last FindNext - 190 - Returns: Time in unix number Example: PrintLn FindNextTime Rename (Command) Purpose: Rename a file to another name Syntax : Rename filename new-filename Example: Rename "TEST.TXT","TEST2.TXT" Renames TEST.TXT -> TEST2.TXT Date, time handling GetDate (Variable) Purpose: Returns date in formatted form Returns: Date-string DD-Mmm-YYYY (Day, Month-string, Year) Example: PrintLn GetDate Print todays date: 7-Aug-1995, 21-Jan-96 GetDateRaw (Variable) Purpose: Returns date in raw form Returns: String YYYY MM DD DOW (Year, Month, Day, Day-of-week) Example: PrintLn GetDateRaw Print current date: 1995 08 07 01 GetTime (Variable) Purpose: Returns time in formatted form Returns: Time-string HH:MM:SS Example: PrintLn GetTime Print current time: 18:39:25 ResetTimer (Command) Purpose: Resets timer 1-4 Syntax : ResetTimer timer-num,seconds Example: ResetTimer 1,60 Sets timer to expire after 60 seconds SetDate (Command) Purpose: Set computers date Syntax : SetDate Year,Month,Day Example: SetDate 1997,7,27 Sets computer date to 27. July 1997 SetTime (Command) Purpose: Set computers time Syntax : SetDate Hour,Minute,Second,1/100 second Example: SetDate 23,59,59,0 Sets computer time to 23:59:59 TimeElapsed (Function) Purpose: Returns in milliseconds time elapsed since ResetTimer Syntax : TimeElapsed(timer-num) Returns: Milliseconds elapsed Example: PrintLn TimeElapsed(1) TimerExpired (Function) - 191 - Purpose: Check if a timer has expired. Syntax : TimerExpired(timer-num) Returns: 0=No, 1=Timer expired Example: Until TimerExpired(1)=1 Wait (Command) Purpose: Pause in 1/100 seconds Syntax : Wait num-1/100-seconds Example: Wait 200 Wait 2 seconds before continuing - 192 - File transfers One of the most common tasks you will need the scripts for is to transfer files to/from another system. To do this you need to use the internal or external protocols specified below. Protocols 1 + Zmodem + = Batch protocol 2 + ZedZap 3 Ascii 4 Xmodem 5 Xmodem-1K 6 Xmodem-1K-G 7 + Ymodem 8 + Ymodem-G 9 + Kermit 10 + CompuServe B+ 11..22 ? External protocols Download (Command) Purpose: Receive files from another system Syntax : Download protocol,filename Example: Download 1 Download 3,"CAPTURE.TXT" Notes : All protocols that are not batch must have a filename Upload (Command) Purpose: Send files to another system Syntax : Upload protocol,filename(s)/wildcards Example: Upload 1,"C:\TERMINAT\UPLOAD\DANBBS.QWK" Upload 3,"C:\TERMINAT\UPLOAD\*.* C:\TERMINAT\DOCS\*.DOC" Emulations SetTerminal (Command) Purpose: Change to terminal slot Syntax : SetTerminal slot Example: SetTerminal 1 ANSI-BBS is now the current terminal WriteTerminal (Command) Purpose: Send a string to terminal emulation Syntax : WriteTerminal expression Example: If CharsWaiting<>0 WriteTerminal GetChar Endif Displays received character from device Terminate control Dial (Command) Purpose: Dial number in the phonebook Syntax : Dial numbers,numbers,numbers..... - 193 - Example: Dial 1,2,3,4 Dial 27 Notes : IOResult=0 No connect, IOResult=1 Connection GetUserName (Variable) Purpose: Get username from phonebook record Syntax : GetUserName Returns: String Example: Send GetUserName Send username to device GetUserPassword (Variable) Purpose: Get password from phonebook record or default Syntax : GetUserPassword Returns: String Example: Send GetUserPassword Send password to device MainLoop (Command) Purpose: Run Terminate main loop Syntax : MainLoop times Example: MainLoop 10 Allow the script to access all the Terminate functions Direct hardware control Direct memory commands can be dangerous since it can access your hardware directly or indirectly. Please do not use any memory commands if you are the slightest bit insecure on their use. FreeMem (Function) Purpose: How much memory is left Returns: Number of bytes available for script language Example: Print FreeMem Displays free memory on screen StackFree (Function) Purpose: How much stack is left Returns: Number of bytes available for stack Example: Print StackFree Displays stack free memory on screen Interrupt (Function) Purpose: Call any interrupt with register value *WARNING DANGEROUS* Syntax : Interrupt(interrupt-number,ax,bx,cx,dx,si,di,ds,es) Returns: String: ah al bh bl ch cl dh dl si di ds es flags Example: Print "Videomode:",GrabWord(Interrupt(16,3840,0,0,0,0,0,0,0),2) Get videomode in word 2 in string Notes : Be very careful with command. It gives you access to the complete PC and therefore one wrong call can result in the worst errors. If you are not an expirenced programmer do not under any circumstances use this command. Mem (Function) - 194 - Purpose: Get a byte directly from memory location Syntax : Mem(segment,offset) Returns: 0-255 Example: Print "Memory 0:0",Mem(0,0) PortIn (Function) Purpose: Get a byte directly from a hardware port Syntax : PortIn(port) Example: You will know if you need it! PortOut (Command) Purpose: Send a byte to a hardware port Syntax : PortOut port,byte Example: You will know if you need it! PutMem (Command) Purpose: Put a byte directly to memory location Syntax : PutMem byte,segment,offset Example: PutMem 65,47104,0 Notes : BE CAREFULL! VarFree (Command) Purpose: Free memory used by variable Syntax : VarFree variable-number Example: VarFree VarNum(A) VarNum (Function) Purpose: Get variable number for use with VarSeg and VarOfs Syntax : VarNum(Variable) Example: PrintLn VarNum(A) VarSeg (Function) Purpose: Get segment address of variable Syntax : VarSeg(Variable-number) Example: PrintLn VarSeg(VarNum(TestVar)) VarOfs (Function) Purpose: Get offset address of variable Syntax : VarSeg(Variable-number) Example: PrintLn VarSeg(VarNum(TestVar)) Fax commands SendFax (Command) Purpose: Send a fax to a specific telephone number Syntax : SendFax filename,number,[to-name,subject] Example: SendFax "DOCS\PROBLEM.DOC","43627178","Sysop","Problem" SendFax "C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT","43627178" Notes : Text, TIFF or PCX files will be converted to APF format first Note that the default fax settings and cover page will be used. - 195 - Numeric conversion Binary (Function) Purpose: Returns an binary string Syntax : Binary(Integer,bits) Example: PrintLn Binary(255,8) PrintLn Binary(256,16) BinToInt (Function) Purpose: Returns an integer from a binary string Syntax : BinToInt(string) Example: PrintLn BinToInt("11111111") ByteToHex (Function) Purpose: Returns a string with hex value of byte 8-bit Syntax : ByteToHex(Byte) Example: PrintLn ByteToHex(255) HexToInteger (Function) Purpose: Returns an integer converted from a hex-string Syntax : HexToInteger(String) Example: PrintLn HexToInteger("FFFF") LongToHex (Function) Purpose: Returns a string with hex value of a double word 32-bit Syntax : LongToHex(Byte) Example: PrintLn LongToHex(255) WordToHex (Function) Purpose: Returns a string with hex value of word 16-bit Syntax : WordToHex(Byte) Example: PrintLn WordToHex(65000) Other commands ExitTerminate (Command) Purpose: Exit the script and Terminate with errorlevel Syntax : ExitTerminal [errorlevel] Example: ExitTerminate 100 (Errorlevel 100) ExitTerminate (Errorlevel 1) GetCrc (Function) Purpose: Update a Crc-16 checksum Syntax : GetCrc(Byte,Old-Crc) Example: Set Crc=GetCrc(X,Crc) GetCrcLong (Function) Purpose: Update a Crc-32 checksum Syntax : GetCrcLong(Byte,Old-Crc) Example: Set Crc=GetCrcLong(X,Crc) - 196 - Random (Function) Purpose: Get a random number between 0-65535 Syntax : Random(max) Example: Print Random(100) Displays a random number between 0-99 Randomize (Command) Purpose: To initialise the random factor for the Random function Syntax : Randomize CommentNum (Function) Purpose: Get number of script comments Syntax : CommentNum(0) Example: Set Comments=CommentNum(0) <- Must be zero! CommentStr (Function) Purpose: Get script comments Syntax : CommentStr(Commentnumber) Example: PrintLn CommentStr(1) Terminate (Command) Purpose: Exit the script Syntax : Terminate - 197 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° CD audio player °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Using the CDROM player allows you to put on some real music while you are downloading or doing other boring stuff. ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÑÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͸ ³ Play ³ ³Song Start Length Song Start Length ³ ³ Stop ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Resume ³ ³ 1 ³ 00:02 03:17 ³ 21 ³ ³ ³ Next ³ ³ 2 ³ 03:19 03:50 ³ 22 ³ ³ ³ Previous ³ ³ 3 ³ 07:09 03:58 ³ 23 ³ ³ ³ Eject ³ ³ 4 ³ 11:07 02:37 ³ 24 ³ ³ ³ Close tray ³ ³ 5 ³ 13:45 04:26 ³ 25 ³ ³ ³ Lock CD door ³ ³ 6 ³ 18:11 04:08 ³ 26 ³ ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ 7 ³ 22:20 05:01 ³ 27 ³ ³ ³ CD in drive ³ Yes ³ 8 ³ 27:22 03:16 ³ 28 ³ ³ ³ Door locked ³ No ³ 9 ³ 30:38 02:39 ³ 29 ³ ³ ³ Raw and cooked ³ Only cooked ³ 10 ³ 33:17 03:31 ³ 30 ³ ³ ³ Data and Audio ³ Yes ³ 11 ³ ³ 31 ³ ³ ³ HSG and Red book ³ Yes ³ 12 ³ ³ 32 ³ ³ ³ Audiomanipulation ³ No ³ 13 ³ ³ 33 ³ ³ ³ Volume size ³ 36:49.00 ³ 14 ³ ³ 34 ³ ³ ³ MSCDEX Version ³ 2.23 ³ 15 ³ ³ 35 ³ ³ ³ Track ³ 1 ³ 16 ³ ³ 36 ³ ³ ³ Track start ³ 00:02 ³ 17 ³ ³ 37 ³ ³ ³ Total track time ³ 03:15 ³ 18 ³ ³ 38 ³ ³ ³ Track time ³ 00:30 Index ³ 19 ³ ³ 39 ³ ³ ³ Track time left ³ 02:45 ³ 20 ³ ³ 40 ³ ³ ³ Copyrighted track ³ Yes ÀÄÄÄÄÙ ÀÄÄÄÄÙ ³ ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÏÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; This is a record by a world famous Danish heavy metal band called D.A.D. Play Starts playing from a number and the rest of the album. Stop Stop playing (mute). Resume Resume playing the track where you stopped it. Next Skip rest of track and play the next Previous Play the previous track Eject - 198 - Eject CD from your CDROM. Close tray Close to front of your CDROM and start playing. Lock CD door Lock/unlock the CD inside the CDROM, so nobody can borrow the CD. MSCDEX Version MSCDEX.EXE is a program supplied by MicroSoft for making standard calls to CDROMs. MSCDEX means MicroSoft CD extension. You need at least version 2.00 for using this player. CD in drive Did Terminate detect a CD in the drive? Door locked Did you lock the CDROM door? Raw and cooked Does your drive support raw and cooked reading modes? (Uh?) Data and Audio Does your CD support both audio and data tracks? HSG and Red book Does your CDROM support High Sierra May 28th format and the ISO-9660 version of the High Sierra format (Red Book)? Audiomanipulation Does your CDROM support audio channel manipulation? Volume size Total playing time of CD. Track Which track is currently being played. Track start Where on the CD does the track start. Total track time How long the track is. Track time How much of the track has been played. - 199 - Track time left How much playing time is left of the track. Copyrighted track Is the track copyrighted. Index All music CD's have index marks when starting and stopping a track, Terminate will shortly flash the Index indicator when it meets an index. - 200 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° International information °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ International information This part of the manual will have all kind of different international information. We will try to gather as much information as possible and put in here, but please if you have any suggestions for additional information you think could be useful for a lot of people, please contact a registration site. Unit of measurement metre (m) for length kilogram (kg) for weight second (s) for time ampere (A) for current intensity kelvin (K) for absolute temperature (absolute zero -273.15 Celsius) candela (cd) units of luminous intensity mol (mol) for quantity of material The units are defined with the biggest possible accuracy compared to imperishable sizes. For example the metre is defined as the length of the way the light runs in af 1/299792458 second. A second is defined as 919263631770 times the characteristic atomic time for caesium-133 (cesium). To make the daily use more easy the following measurement are used: celsius (C) unit of temperature coulomb (C ) unit of quantity electricity farad (F ) unit of electrical capacity henry (H) unit of electrical inductance hertz (Hz) unit of frequency joule (J ) unit of work or energy liter (l) unit of cubic content lumen (lm) unit of luminous flux lux (lx) unit of illumination newton (N ) unit of force ohm (O_) unit of electrical resistance tesla (T) unit of magnetic inductance volt (V ) unit of electric potential watt (W ) unit of electric power weber (W) unit of magnetic flux Numeric sizes exa (E) 10 18 1 000 000 000 000 000 000 times peta (P) 10 15 1 000 000 000 000 000 times tera (T) 10 12 1 000 000 000 000 times giga (G) 10 9 1 000 000 000 times mega (M) 10 6 1 000 000 times kilo (k) 10 3 1 000 times hecto (h) 10 2 100 times deka (da) 10 1 10 times deci (d) 10 -1 0.1 times - 201 - centi (c) 10 -2 0.01 times milli (m) 10 -3 0.001 times micro (y_) 10 -6 0.000 001 times nano (n) 10 -9 0.000 000 001 times pico (p) 10 -12 0.000 000 000 001 times femto (f) 10 -15 0.000 000 000 000 001 times atto (a) 10 -18 0.000 000 000 000 000 001 times Linear measure The Metric System 1 millimetre (mm) = 0.001 m 1 centimetre (cm) = 0.01 m 1 decimetre (dm) = 0.1 m 1 dekametre (dam) = 10 m 1 hectometre (dam) = 100 m 1 kilometre (km) = 1000 m Old English and American systems 1 inch = 2.54 cm 1 foot (12 inches) = 30.48 cm 1 yard (3 feet) = 91.44 cm 1 fathom (2 yards) = 1.83 m 1 (statute) mile (1760 yards) = 1.609 km Old Danish measures (The metric was laid down by law in 1977) 1 tomme = 2.615 cm 1 fod (12 tommer) = 31.385 cm 1 alen (2 fod) = 62.771 cm 1 favn (3 alen) = 1.883 m 1 mil (4000 favne) = 7.532 km Old Swedish measures 1 tum = 2.47 cm 1 tv„rhand = 8-10 cm 1 fot = 29.7 cm 1 aln = 59.4 cm 1 gutealn = 64 cm 1 famn = 1.78 m 1 kyndelsmil = 1 600 m 1 fj„rdingsv„g = 2 672 m 1 rast = 5 016 m 1 lantmil = 10 689 m Other 1 geographical mile = 7.532.48 m 1 nautical mile = 1.852 m 1 Swedish mile = 10 km 1 Verst (Russian) = 1066.78 m Square measure The Metric System 1 square meter m2 = 10000 cm2 - 202 - 1 are (a) = 100 m2 1 hectare (ha) = 10000 m2 1 square kilometre (km2) = 100 ha Old English and American systems 1 square inch = 6.8406 cm2 1 square foot = 0.0929 m2 1 square yard = 0.8361 m2 1 acre (4840 square yards) = 0.4047 ha Old Danish measures 1 kvadrat-alen = 0.3940 m2 1 t›nde land (14000 alen) = 0.5516 ha 1 kvadratmil = 56.7383 km2 (10285 5/7 t›nder land) Cubic measure The Metric System 1 litre (l) = 1000 cm3 1 cubic metre (m3) = 1000 l 1 hectolitre = 100 l English and American system 1 pint UK: = 0.568 l US: = 0.473 l 1 gallon (4 quarts=8 pints) UK: = 4.546 l US: = 3.785 l 1 bushel UK: = 36.37 l US: = 35.24 l 1 cubic foot = 0.0283 m3 1 cubic yard = 0.7646 m3 Old Danish measures 1 p‘gl = 0.242 l 1 pot (4 p‘gle) = 0.966 l 1 kubikfod = 0.0309 m3 1 t›nde = 1.3912 hl Old Swedish measures 1 famn ved = 3.14 m3 1 stor famn ved = 4.22 m3 1 parm h” = 7.15 m3 1 kvadratfot = 882 cm2 1 tunnland = 4936 m2 1 kanna = 2.6 l 1 kappe = 4.6 l 1 fj„rding = 18.32 l 1 sk„ppa = 36.6 l 1 spann = 73.3 l 1 tunna = 146.6 l 1 kvarter = 32.7 cl - 203 - 1 Stop = 1.3 l 1 Fj„rding = 15.6 l 1 Ankare = 39.25 l 1 tunna = 125.6 l Weight The Metric System 1 milligram (mg) = 0.001 g 1 centigram (cg) = 0.01 g 1 decigram (dg) = 0.1 g 1 dekagram (dag) = 10 g 1 hectogram (hg) = 100 g 1 kilogram (kg) = 1000 g English and American systems 1 grain (gr) = 0.0648 g 1 ounce (480 grains) (oz) = 28.350 g 1 pound (16 ounces) (lb) = 0.4536 kg 1 hundredweight UK: 112 pounds (cwt) = 50.8 kg US: 100 pounds (cwt) = 45.36 kg 1 long ton UK: 2240 pounds = 1016 kg 1 short ton US: 2000 pounds = 907.18 kg 1 stone (14 lbs) = 6.35 kg Old Danish measures 1 kvint = 5.0 kg 1 lod = 15.625 g 1 pund (100 kvint)(32 lodder) = 500 g 1 lispund (16 pund) = 8 kg 1 centner (100 pund) = 50 kg Old Swedish measures 1 korn = 42.5 mg 1 kvinting = 3.32 g 1 ort = 4.25 g 1 lod = 13.28 g 1 sk†lpund = 425 g 1 skeppspund = 170 kg 1 bast sill = 24 st sillar (sill is a fish) 1 val sill = 80 st sillar 1 bunt sill = 100 st sillar Temperature Fahrenheit = Celcius * 9 / 5 + 32 Celsius = (Fahrenheit - 32) * 5 / 9 Decimal/Hexadecimal/Binary numeric systems Sometimes it is hard to know how you calculate from one system to another. Small number are easy, but large numbers are much harder. It is important to understand how these numbers work if you are doing a little programming - 204 - yourself. If you don't want to be able of doing things manually, buy a calculator that can convert for you. Decimal-10 Hexadecimal $-16 Binary-2 ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 10 3 3 11 4 4 100 5 5 101 6 6 110 7 7 111 8 8 1000 9 9 1001 10 A 1010 11 B 1011 12 C 1100 13 D 1101 14 E 1110 15 F 1111 16 10 10000 100 64 1100100 255 FF 1111111 256 100 10000000 1024 400 10000000000 4096 1000 1000000000000 65535 FFFF 1111111111111111 65536 10000 10000000000000000 ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ To convert from one system to another there are a few tricks you can use. Hexadecimal (hex) -> Binary Example: $12FA -> ? __12FA_ Hex / / | \ / | | \ 0001 0010 1111 1010 Binary Result = 0001001011111010 (You can loose the leading zeroes) Take each hex number and convert to a 4 bit binary number. Then put all together in one long row, strip leading zeroes. That's it, pretty simple. Binary -> Hexadecimal (hex) Example: 1010011110 -> ? Divide into blocks of 4 from behind 1. 1110 2. 1001 1110 3. 10 1001 1110 Add leading zeroes 4. 0010 1001 1110 Convert each block to hex. 5. 2 8+1 8+4+2 Result 6. $29E Decimal -> Hexadecimal No easy way, so we 'just' divide. - 205 - Example: 48 -> ? 47 / 16 = 2 <- 1st number ----- \ 2x16 = 32 | Remainder = 47-32 = 15 | 15 / 1 = 15 = F <- 2nd number | | Result = $2F | | 16^0 1 Example: 32891 -> ? | 16^1 16 \ ---> 16^2 256 32891 / 4096 = 8 <- 1st number 16^3 4096 8x4096 = 32768 16^4 65536 Remainder = 32891-32768 = 123 16^5 1048576 123 / 256 = 0 <- 2nd number / -> 16^6 16777216 0x256 = 0 | . Remainder = 123-0 = 123 ----- / . 123 / 16 = 7 <- 3rd number 7x16 = 112 Remainder = 123-112 = 11 ^ 11 / 1 = 11 = B <- 4th number | | Result = $807B | | Hexadecimal -> Decimal | This way is much faster than the other | way around. | | Example: $1A4F | |||1 | ||16 ___________________________________________ / |256 4096 (A) (F) Calculation: 1 x 4096 + 10 x 256 + 4 x 16 + 15 x 1 = 6735 Decimal -> Binary No easy way, so we 'just' divide. Example: 147 -> ? 147 / 128 = 1 <- 1st number 2^0 1 1x128 = 128 2^1 2 Remainder = 147-128 = 19 2^2 4 19 / 64 = 0 <- 2nd number 2^3 8 19 / 32 = 0 <- 3rd number ---------------> 2^4 16 19 / 16 = 1 <- 4th number 2^5 32 1x16 = 16 2^6 64 Remainder = 19-16 = 3 2^7 128 3 / 8 = 0 <- 5th number 2^8 256 3 / 4 = 0 <- 6th number . 3 / 2 = 1 <- 7th number . 1x2 = 2 Remainder = 3-2 = 1 ^ 1 / 1 = 1 <- 8th number | | - 206 - Result = 10010011 | | Binary -> Decimal | Example: 10110101 -> ? | |||||||1 | ||||||2 | |||||4 | ||||8 | |||16 ---------------------------------- / ||32 |64 128 Calculation: 1x128 + 0x64 + 1x32 + 1x16 + 0x8 + 1x4 + 0x2 + 1x1 = 181 Alfa, Bravo, Charlie If you are doing a lot of international voice calls you know how difficult it sometimes can be to make the other person understand what you are saying and you sometimes have to spell out the words. To help you do it the official and correct way, we here bring you the phonetic words. A = Alfa H = Hotel O = Oscar V = Victor B = Bravo I = India P = Papa W = Whisky C = Charlie J = Juliet Q = Quebec X = X-ray D = Delta K = Kilo R = Romeo Y = Yankee E = Echo L = Lima S = Sierra Z = Zulu F = Foxtrot M = Mike T = Tango G = Golf N = November U = Uniform - 207 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° End of manual °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ We think Terminate is the final terminal. ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ Information about SHAREWARE/LITE/PLUS versions ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ SHAREWARE versions: We hope you'll agree and encourage you to share copies of the evaluation version of Terminate with others - but subject to the following limitations: ALL the files in GIVEAWAY\ must be distributed. The individual files must also be complete and unmodified and without the addition of other files. Terminate may not be `bundled' with hardware without written permission from SerWiz Comm. Cost effective licences for Terminate LITE are available for modem manufacturers/distributors: sales@terminate.com (or nearest registration site) ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ LITE versions: The LITE versions are only delivered with modems and hardware. You cannot re-sell LITE versions. Cost effective licences for Terminate LITE are available for modem manufacturers/distributors: sales@terminate.com (or nearest registration site) ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ PLUS versions: PLUS versions are retail software. For more information on buying PLUS versions, please send a fax to: sales@terminate.com (or nearest registration site) ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ PROFESSIONAL versions: Professional versions are only available through T-REGS the electronical registration site or through a local registration site. Succinctly: no one other than SerWiz Comm and the authorised registration sites may charge money for TERMINATE PROFESSIONAL. - 208 - Site licence deals are available from your local registration site or directly from SerWiz Comm. Site licence deals are only authorized when you purchase 50 or more copies. sales@terminate.com ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL STRATHRORY SYSTEMS LIMITED, SERWIZ COMM OR ASSOCIATES BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ADDITIONAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE TERMINATE OR UTILITIES FOR TERMINATE, EVEN IF WE HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Special thanks ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ Bjarne Duelund For testing and utility-programming, running DAN BBS Bj›rn L›ndahl Information on how the point system should work Borland Int. For making Turbo and Borland Pascal Carsten Milling Danish language translator Chris Lueders For making cFos and for testing Terminate with ISDN Colin O'Brien For making the final startup screen Erik Andersen For making GIF source codes for us and quality pictures Finn Johansen 1200 ideas. (At least) and moral support Genesis Project For providing Internet services, information and testing Gregory P. Smith For making the initial Avatar/Ansi module Gerald Himmelein Translating, testing, pushing people around Gerard van der Land For making Gecho and TMUTIL for TerMail Jesper Larsen A lot of the Terminate is inspired by Lunaware utilities Keld R. Hansen Sourcecodes and general information, sound modules Lars Nyby For making nice tunes that everybody wants to hear Mads Storm The most serious person that lives in Denmark Marshall Dudley For making Doorway and providing Doorway tech-stuff Martin Winkler Helping with cFos support and performance Michael Rochman Long distance testing and support from US Mike Dickson OS/2, Panther, Black cat Software, freeware datafiles Peter Mandrella Helping with OS/2 timeslices Preben Eriksen For making Terminate demos, and computer weekends. Roland Lyngvig Developing the new VT-emulations and CAPI support. Rolf Becker For legal services in copyright matters in Germany Shin Do Juku My martial arts club, Shin Do Ken Kempo (Kungfu) S›ren Ager Sourcecodes and mailer information Thomas Bj›rk For ideas, script, bugfixes, complaints, running DAN BBS Tonny Bj›rn For making cool screen blankers, and Danish translation TurboPower For making Async professional/Object professional Special thank you to the special Gamma test team: Andreas Streit Legal procedures and administration of testing Andy Roberts Handling US-testers and sorting out the USA problems Bob Simister Testing in the UK Bue Vester-Andersen Testing blind features Cliff Hetherington Testing in the UK Clive Goldman Accurate reporting and surviving the Terminate fever Cyrus Kube Testing in Germany Dave Wapstra The endless lists and reports David Bryce For tracking down more than bugs - 209 - Erik Weichelt Testing CAPI features in Germany H.C. Andersen Handling blind support and fantasy stories Hans-Georg Joepgen Fixing PS/2 problems in Germany Harald Kamm Testing faxmanager, file transfer and much much more Ian Underwood Testing in the UK Joop Blokker Endless testing and reporting without sleeping. Larry McKimmy Testing in USA Ludger Wilde Testing everything and giving good support in Germany Marco Zehe Testing blind and CAPI features Marcus Roeckrath Testing CAPI features in Germany Martin Kirchner For giving good suggestion that will help blind people Olaf Thormaehlen Pointsystem, emulations and ISDN support Oliver Mueller Testing ISDN and point system in Germany Raymond Jansen Testing in Holland Rien Post Testing in Holland Simon Slater Testing, testing and testing Stefan Krister Testing scripts in Germany Steve Stacher Keeping the conferences clean and probing the mailsystem And all others that have ever tested Terminate. - and lots of other people for supporting this product. We will never claim that all the ideas are our own - the main reason Terminate is so feature-packed is because of all the users (maybe even you?) who have demanded and suggested ever more options and features. Trademarks The following trademarks are owned by Strathrory Systems Limited: Terminate Registered Trademark The Final Terminal Trademark TerMail Trademark VISIBLE FAST Trademark T-Fax Trademark The Final Fax Manager Trademark PreScription Trademark T-List Trademark SmartNote Trademark Other names or products containing the word TERMINATE, can only be used with written permission. SerWiz Comm will decide which ideas, conference's etc. which will be allowed to use the name Terminate or contain the word Terminate. All unoffically and local Terminate conferences must obtain a permit to be allowed to continue the use of the trademark. If you are a moderator for a Terminate conference and do not have the permission, please send a fax to SerWiz Comm if you want to apply. Other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. The story about the Terminate trademark The Terminate trademark was an idea of Bo Bendtsen when he was beginning to plan his terminal program. He had programmed a little nameless terminal and was looking for a good name. It would have to be related to modems, terminal software or something similar. One day while he was expanding the network of his BBS system, Bo picked up a network terminator (50 ohms ethernet), looked at it and pondered: - 210 - 'Network terminator. No... YES... that's it: Terminate.' - 211 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° TerMail message editor °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ ÜÜÜÜÜÜ ÜÜÜÜ ÜÜÜÜ ° ßÜ ° ßÜ ° ßÜ ° Û ° Û ßßßÛ ÛßßßßßßÛßßßßßßßÜ ² ßßßÛßÛ ÛßÜ Û ßßßÛßÛ Û ßßßÛ ßßßÛ ° Û ° ² °ßßßßß Üß Ü ° Û ° Û ° Û ° ÛÜ° Û ° Û ° Û ° Û ° Ûßß ° Üß Ûßßß ° Û ° Û ° Û ± Û Û ± Û ± Û ± Û ± ßÜÜÜ ± ÜÜ ßÜ ± Û ± Û ± Û ± Ûß± Û ± Û ± ÛÜÜÜÜ ² Û ² ² ² ² Û ² ² Û ² Û ² Û ² Û ² Û ² Û ² ² ßßßß ßßßßßßß ßßßß ßßß ßßßß ßßßß ßßßß ßßßß ßßßß ßßßß ßßßßßßßß T E R M A I L ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ Version 5.00 The Automatic Point System for Terminate Copyright (C) 1993,97 by Strathrory Systems Limited Worldwide distributor SerWiz Comm - 212 - TerMail Overview TerMail is an E-Mail-System for Terminate. It enables you to send and receive mail from other people through a variety of networks and systems. TerMail supports both Fidonet messages and offline mail (also called QWK-Mail or "Quick Packets"). When installed with Terminate, TerMail is ready to run out of the box without hardly any additional setup. As soon as you have a network address, you are basically set to go. As usual in the data-communication world, there will be a lot of new words for you to learn, but don't let this confuse you. If you just fail to understand something, don't change it or ask someone whether you need it. With TerMail, we have tried to create a powerful mail reader while keeping it as simple as possible. TerMail will practically do all the maintenance for you without you having to think about it. If you want special settings simply just edit the configuration files and follow the instructions. Without further ado, lets get started and get into E-Mailing... /Bo Bendtsen BLIND SUPPORT TerMail has, like Terminate, special Blind Support features which are designed for the Visually Impaired. When starting TerMail with the command line parameter /BLIND or the BlindSupport toggle, some extra sounds will be enabled. Furthermore, other special functions will be active such as the removal of unneeded windows, the change of some High ASCII special characters to Low ASCII and the hardware cursor will be enabled. This will make it easier to navigate through the screens. When reading messages, the cursor will always be placed at the position of the To-Name. With Ctrl-ENTER you can cycle between the message text body, from-name and subject. There are additional improvements which you will notice in daily use. Main menu keys F1 This help file Here you will find help for most of TerMail's functions. F2 List of external utilities This displays a pop-up list of user-definable external utilities. You can scroll through the list, select and execute the tool you want to use. F6 Forms Predefined forms that you can include in your messages. This could be your details, reports or if you are a moderator for a conference you could put the rules in a form file. F7 Show/create groups Displays a list of the current Groups and allows you to change the group - 213 - for the current area or to create a new one. F8 Nodelist lookup Displays the nodelist(s) set up in TM.CFG and allows you to search through it (them) using the arrow keys. F11 Nodelist search Search for any address or keyword in all nodelists ENTER Enter message area Area 1 is always the Netmail area. Netmail is used to send messages to other users. Only the receiving users will get them. Area 2 is the default area, where mail written to your user name in a conference is stored. Therefore if you have 200 areas, you can always check this area first and see if there is any new messages written to you. Area 3 will save all mail you have written. Sometimes it can be important to remember what you have told to whom at a certain time. Fast area selection When pressing either A-Z 0-9 . _ these characters will be appended to a searchword and leap to an area that matches the search string. Therefore you can get faster to areas of which you know the name. Only the EchoID will be searched for matches. Esc Exit TerMail Exit TerMail. A window will pop up, asking you whether you really want to quit. Alt-X Exit TerMail without asking Exit quickly, without asking. ^Alt-0..5 Exit directly with errorlevel 0,1,2,3,4,5 without packing/cleaning Alt-V View log Use a list tool to view the logfile. If you use the internal list function, at startup the list tool will immediately display the latest entries to the logfile. Alt-P PID serial number check Check all messages for PID serial codes. With this function you can find people that are using the same keyfiles or keyfiles made with pirate generators. You can also use this program to find pirate-users of other programs like Golded (GED) or Frontdoor (FM). Alt-Z Mega search Search all areas for keywords. Results are saved for the next time you - 214 - enter the search. Alt-J Shell to DOS This allows you to run external programs without quitting TerMail. Do not attempt to load TSR's since this will cause your machine to hang when you exit the DOS-Shell. Type EXIT to return to TerMail. Alt-E Edit configuration and external files This menu will allow you to edit the configuration files directly. Please be very careful: Avoid changing or removing things you don't understand. Generally, TerMail works "out of the box" without the need to make manual changes. TM.CFG This is the configuration file. Here you can set up everything. The configuration file also contains additional information about TerMail. TM.BBS This is the area file. It contains all the TAG NAMES (or conference names) that you have. TerMail will automatically create new areas for you and place the entries in this file. TM.NAM TM.NAM is a list of the people you often write to. If you have a friend called Steve Stacher, you could insert the following line: Steve,Steve Stacher,2:443/888,Nice weather today If you then just write "Steve" in the TO-name when you want to write a message to him, the information would be grabbed from this file and inserted, relieving you of the neccessity of remembering his address. If you always want to crash mail your messages to Steve, add a ",Crash" after the subject. TM.LST This conference list is used by the Areafix manager. To get more information about this topic, press F1 in the Areafix manager. TM.LOG This log file contains information about all the mail tossed and scanned by TerMail. Toss means import and scan means export. Here you can check where your mail has come from and where it went. WHATSNEW The TerMail History file contains information about the latest updates and enhancements to TerMail. TM.PIC The TM.PIC file is a text file with file names of the picture(s) you - 215 - have on your hard disk of the people whom you are writing to. TM.CC Used for carbon copies group or mailing lists TM.RFM Used for reformatting messages when quote-replying TM.SIG Used for inserting signatures in the internal editor on F5 TM.CRT Used for correcting commonly spelled word Other file With this option you can edit any other file, using an external editor. Alt-F File/Areafix manager The File/Areafix manager is a function that will connect you to conferences (the areas you receive mail in) and file-echoes where you can receive files. Think of Areafix as a friend of your SysOp who checks his/her netmails to see if you want to get connected to certain conferences. Normally you would have to write a manual netmail, but with the help of this unique feature in TerMail, you don't have to do anything other than tag the conferences and send the message. You will always get a reply from Areafix which will tell you if your request was successful. These special functions are available: %LIST First you should always request a list of all the conferences that are available to you. Then you can create a TM.LST from this message. Look in TM.LST for more information about how to do this. %QUERY Request a small list of the areas you are connected to. %RESCAN All newly connected areas will be rescanned, so you will receive all the messages that are immediately available from your uplink. If your uplink does not keep the area you choose in his message base ("passthrough"), you will not receive any old messages, but you will receive messages in the future, perhaps tomorrow. You are not always allowed to rescan, but it will never hurt to try. Beware if you are a new user and you try to rescan 50 areas - if you should do this, you will be flooded with plenty of old messages. %HELP - 216 - Request help information from Areafix. Not all Areafix programs understand the same commands and requests, so getting this message back should be the first thing for you to try. %PAUSE Temporarily suspend all connected areas. When you go on vacation, for example, you might not want to have to get all echomail saved up at your boss. Netmails will still be saved and stored for you. %RESUME Resume all temporarily suspended areas. Echofile Select which echofile you want to use for area tagging. By default an echofile is attached to your user record, but you can select another echofile for the current user if necessary. Select areas Press SPACE to toggle a single area. + Connect to this conference. - Disconnect from this conference. A Add this area to list. E Edit the area list using the external editor. Gray keys (numeric keypad) + Connect to all conferences. - Disconnect from all conferences. * Toggle the connect/disconnect mark on all conferences. Alt-M Message base maintenance TerMail uses the external tool TMUTIL.EXE to perform maintenance work on the message base. This utility was written using the highly optimized Gecho technology created by Gerard J. van der Land. ÚÄ´ Message base maintenance ÿ ³ Pack area(s) ³ ³ Purge messages ³ ³ Link area(s) ³ ³ Unlink area(s) ³ ³ Index JAM area(s) ³ ³ Undelete JAM area(s) ³ ³ Secure area ³ ³ Convert area to JAM ³ ³ Translation editor ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Pack area(s) Remove deleted messages from the message bases. Purge messages Delete messages from message bases, depending on the age and the maximum number of messages allowed in the areas. - 217 - Link area(s) Update the reply links, this is also called "message threading". Unlink area(s) Remove all reply links. Index JAM area(s) Create new index files for all JAM areas. Undelete JAM area(s) If you purged, but didn't pack some JAM areas, you can restore the message(s) with this command. Secure area Protect this area with a password, so no one can access the area without entering the password first. With this menu entry you can also remove the protection from the area. Convert area to JAM Convert a MSG area to JAM message base. JAM message bases can help you save a lot of harddisk space since they only consist of 4 files each. MSG areas use 1 file per message and are much slower. If you use 8k clusters on your harddisk, an MSG area can use up to 6-8 times the space needed by a JAM area. If you want to convert a JAM area to MSG you first create a new area, mark all messages and select the MOVE command (M). DELete Remove messages or entire area You cannot remove the Netmail area, so if you press DEL while the Netmail area is active, you will only be asked whether you want to delete all messages. When you press DEL with any other conference, you will be given three options. Remove area completely This will delete the messagebase and remove the area entry in TM.BBS. Warning this will delete all messages even locked messages. TerMail will also send an Areafix message to unlink the area. Delete all messages This option erases all messages from the area. Disconnect with Areafix You can automatically send an Areafix request to your uplink to inform him that you don't want to receive mail in this conference anymore. You should choose this option before removing an area. Alt-S Scan all areas If you are using a network or if you have pressed ENTER while the areas - 218 - were being scanned, you might want to scan all areas again to check whether new messages have arrived since you started TerMail. Message reader ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³F1 ³ Help system ³ ³F2 ³ Select and run external utilities ³ ³F6 ³ View and edit forms available ³ ³F7 ³ Temporarily change group or create new group ³ ³F8 ³ Nodelist lookup ³ ³F10 ³ Address book system ³ ³A, Esc ³ Leave area ³ ³B, Ctrl-R ³ Clean or purge area ³ ³C, Alt-C ³ Change message or send local message again ³ ³D, Alt-D, DELete ³ Delete message or marked messages ³ ³E, Alt-E, INSert ³ Enter new message in area ³ ³F, Alt-F, Ctrl-F ³ Find all files in msg/select/make request in outbound ³ ³G, Alt-G ³ Quote-reply to message (TO-name) ³ ³H ³ UU-encoding/decoding ³ ³I ³ Kludges and other network information ³ ³J, Alt-J, Alt-O ³ Jump to DOS ³ ³K, Ctrl-K ³ Toggle kludge information shown in messages ³ ³L, Alt-L, F9 ³ List area, 1 message per line ³ ³M, Alt-M ³ Forward message in another area or Copy/Move message(s)³ ³N, Alt-N, F5 ³ Reply to this message in another area ³ ³O, Ctrl-O ³ Temporarily change origin for group ³ ³P, Ctrl-S ³ Change attributes of message ³ ³Q, R, F4 ³ Quote-reply to message (FROM-name) (Alt-Q) ³ ³S, Alt-S ³ Extensive search and mark menu ³ ³T, Ctrl-T ³ Temporarily change template for group ³ ³U, Ctrl-U ³ Temporarily change user for group ³ ³V ³ View nodelists using the external lister ³ ³W, Ctrl-W ³ Export message or marked messages ³ ³X ³ Area statistics, message tracking and address finding ³ ³Y ³ Message statistics ³ ³Z ³ Zap to next area at once ³ ³Alt-A ³ Smartnote, saves all your notes easily ³ ³Alt-B ³ BossKey, start BOSSKEY.COM/EXE when your boss walks in ³ ³Alt-I ³ Select www-pages in message and call web-browser ³ ³Alt-K ³ Grab, Shift+cursors to change size of string grabber ³ ³Alt-P ³ View picture of sender if available ³ ³Alt-R, F3 ³ Reply without quoting ³ ³Alt-T ³ Edit message text ³ ³Alt-U, Ctrl-F3 ³ ROT-13 simple encryption/decryption ³ ³Alt-V ³ View all available pictures ³ ³Alt-W ³ Translation editor ³ ³Alt-X ³ Exit TerMail ³ ³Alt-Z ³ Mega search ³ ³Alt-F10 ³ CDROM player ³ ³Alt-1 ³ Toggle sound on/off ³ ³Alt-2 ³ Toggle stylecodes ³ ³Alt-3 ³ Toggle strip stylecodes ³ ³Alt-4 ³ Toggle highlighting ³ ³Alt-5 ³ Toggle reformatting quotes ³ ³Alt-6 ³ Clear searchstring ³ ³Alt-7 ³ Toggle StartListArea ³ ³Alt-8 ³ Toggle Mouse support ³ ³Space, +, -, * ³ Mark/Unmark message (+-*=All) ³ - 219 - ³Left, Right ³ Next/previous message ³ ³<> ,. ³ Jump to next/previous marked msg ³ ³Ctrl-Lft/Rght/Up ³ Next/previous/first reply, also Shift-Left/Right ³ ³Msg movement ³ Up/Down/Home/End/PgDn/PgUp/Enter: View current message ³ ³Ctrl-Home ³ Goto first message in area ³ ³Ctrl-End ³ Goto last message in area ³ ³0,1,2..9 ³ Go directly to entered message number ³ ³Shift F1..F10 ³ Run external utilities directly ³ ³Shift-Esc ³ Runtime information ³ ³TAB ³ Set bookmark. Press Shift-TAB or Backspace to return ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Mouse support TerMail has full mouse support, just click the left mouse button on most places in the screens. When reading a message you can press several places for an immediate action or to call up the mouse menu. Click the mouse on the statusbar over /=Menu and the fast menu will pop up. To navigate to previous message / page up / page down / next message click the mouse in the "<=- ^ v -=>" signs in the statusbar. F1 Help system Activate the online help you are reading right now. F2 (Shift F1..F12) External utilities When pressing F2, you will see all the available external utilities. You can either select one from this menu or you can activate the utility directly by pressing a key combination between Shift-F1 and Shift-F12 F6 Forms When writing a message you can include a form in your message. F7 Show/create groups View the groups that have been defined in the configuration. Press the INSERT (INS) key to create a new group. Groups are used to control which user and what template should be used, how many messages should be kept and other defaults for the areas assigned to a group. F8 Nodelist lookup Search easily through the nodelist. - 220 - F10 Address book system TerMail's address book feature allows you to keep a list of your friends and their addresses. It also registers when you wrote to them for the first and last times and how often you have written to them. In the address book, you can also keep information such as their phone number and snail mail address. It is also possible to import sections or single addresses from the nodelist into the address book. ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Record 1 ÿ ³ Name ³ Bo Bendtsen ³ ³ Fidonet ³ 2:236/111 Crash Yes ³ ³ Internet ³ ³ ³ Organisation ³ DAN BBS ApS ³ ³ Address ³ Kastanie alle 14 ³ ³ Address ³ 2620 Albertslund ³ ³ Address ³ Denmark ³ ³ Comment 1 ³ ³ ³ Comment 2 ³ Home of Terminate ³ ³ Comment 3 ³ Denmarks biggest and friendliest BBS ³ ³ Comment 4 ³ ³ ³ Comment 5 ³ ³ ³ Data phone ³ +45 43623990 ³ ³ Voice phone ³ +45 43623331 ³ ³ First date ³ 12-Jul-1995 4 days ago ³ ³ Last date ³ 14-Jul-1995 2 days ago 16.29 ³ ³ Times written ³ 3 ³ ³ Charset ³ LATIN-1 ³ ³ Homepage ³ ³ ³ Group ³ Friends ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Name Name of the receiver. Fidonet The receiver's address in a Fidonet-style format. Crash Send the message with a crash flag when creating mail for this receiver by default. Crash means you call directly to a system to deliver your mail and don't send it through your Boss. Sometimes this is faster and more reliable, but it also is more expensive. Internet An Internet-style address. The Fidonet address must point to the UUCP gateway you are using. You can, however, just specify an UUCP gate or a non-Fidonet address. Then the nodelists will be searched and you can choose between the gate you wish to use. When you have found a node where the gating works, you can replace UUCP with the Fidonet address and the nodelists will not be searched. - 221 - The Internet field can only be inserted when the address book entry actually points to an Internet address. If you just want to save an Internet address for an entry, save it in one of the comment fields. Look in the nodelist for an UUCP or GUUCP-flag and contact these nodes for further instructions. Please note that some UUCP gates require an agreement before you can send mail through them, so please ask before you start sending through gates. Sending mail to an Internet address: You -----> Crash or -----> UUCP Gateway -----> Receiver (Fidonet) Routed via Fidonet (Internet) You can either crash or route a message to the UUCP Gate. The TO-field in the message header should be UUCP. The First line in the message has to be "To:internet@address.here". The UUCP Gateway will automatically send your mail to the correct receiver on the Internet. Receiving mail from an Internet address: Sender ---------> fidonet.org -----> Routed via Fidonet -----> You Simply ask people to send mail to the Internet address which every FidoNet user has. The format of your address is as follows: Bo Bendtsen, 2:236/111.3 : Name Spaces Point Node Net Zone Domain Organisation ³ | ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ bo_bendtsen@p3.f111.n236.z2.fidonet.org = 2:236/111.3 If you are a node you can remove the "p0." That means that you can tell any people on the Internet to send mail to your Internet address using in the format described above. The sender will address his/her message to a normal Internet mail-server called fidonet.org. This server converts the message to a Fidonet style address and routes it like a normal Fidonet netmail. You will receive the mail faster or slower depending on how close you are to the gate that has been used. Replying to a mail from Internet: When you receive a netmail from an Internet address it will always to gated through an UUCP gate. This gate will insert two kludges called "REPLYADDR" and "REPLYTO". TerMail will grab these kludges - they hold the information needed for a reply. However, should these kludges not be found, TerMail will try and grab the "From: " string in the second line in the message header. A "From: " line has no information on where to gate the message back to Internet, so you will have to find a gate that works. A "From: " line could look like this: From: bo@serwiz.thegap.com The special kludges used for Internet replies (this is only an - 222 - example!) are: @REPLYADDR bo@serwiz.thegap.com @REPLYTO 2:25/25 Bo Bendtsen (@ = ASCII 1) Organisation The name of the organisation or company which maintains the Internet domain. Address The address of the receiver. Comment 1 Comment 2 Comment 3 Comment 4 Comment 5 Any comments you might want to remember about this entry. Data phone The data phone number of the receiver (modem). Voice phone The voice phone number of the receiver. Fax phone The fax phone number of the receiver. First date The date when you sent your first message to this receiver. Last date The last time you sent a message to this receiver. Times written How many messages you have written to this receiver. Charset What charset to translate to when writing a NETMAIL to this user. If you write LATIN-1 you must have the LATIN-1.850 if you use codepage 850 or LATIN-1.865 if you use codepage 865 etc. Homepage If WebBrowser specified in TM.CFG then you can enter web-pages here and when you press you will be asked to view page. Group What group does this person belong to A Leave area (Esc) - 223 - Exit the area and return to the area selection window. B Clean/renumber (Ctrl-R) Either clean up an area using the group settings or just renumber messages. C Change message (Alt-C) Change the header and/or contents of the message or re-send a local message. D Delete message(s) (Alt-D, DELete) Delete either the current message or all marked messages. If a message is locked, you will not be able to delete it. First you have to remove the lock flag by pressing first P, then O. E Create new message (Alt-E, INSert) Write a new message to someone - anyone. Internal message editor Qedit WordStar ESC Save menu, save, continue, abort F2 Save message Alternate keys: Alt-S Alt-X Ctrl-Z Ctrl-F2 F3 Ctrl-K-R Import file into message at cursor position Alternate keys: Alt-I Alt-R F5 Insert signature from TM.SIG F9 Run spellchecker or other external program F10 Address book F11 Search nodelist Alt-F1 External utilities Alt-F2 Abandon file Alt-F9 Switch to external editor Alt-F10 CDROM player Alt-A Smartnote, press Ctrl-Enter to copy line to clipboard Alt-J DOS-shell Alt-K Grab lines, Alt-G in smartnote=insert, Alt-Z in msg Alt-Z Insert lines from clipboard in message Alt-D Ctrl-Y Delete line Ctrl-T Delete word F6 Ctrl-Q-Y Delete from cursor to end of line Ctrl-U Undelete from the kill buffer F4 Duplicate line Ctrl-J-L Jump to line number Ctrl-P Insert control character F7 Ctrl-K-B Begin block F8 Ctrl-K-K End block Ctrl-K-T Mark current word as a block Ctrl-Q-B Jump to the beginning of the currently marked block. Ctrl-Q-K Jump to the end of the block Alt-U Ctrl-K-H Toggle the display of blocks Alt-C Ctrl-K-C Copy block to cursor position Alternate keys: Ctrl-Insert Shift-Insert - 224 - Ctrl-K-V Move block to cursor position Alt-G Ctrl-K-Y Delete the currently displayed block. Alternate keys: Ctrl-Delete Sh-F8 Ctrl-K-I Indent the currently displayed block by 1 Sh-F7 Ctrl-K-U Unindent the block by 1 Alt-T Insert character from ASCII selector Alt-1 Ctrl-O-U Convert block to uppercase Alt-2 Ctrl-O-R Convert block to lowercase Alt-3 Ctrl-O-O Toggle the case of all characters in block Alt-W Ctrl-K-W Write block to file Ctrl-Q-F Search for string Option: B=Backward, G=Globally, L=Locally in block, U=ignore case Ctrl-Q-A Find and replace, same options as Search, Option: N=Ask for each match to replace Ctrl-L Repeat the last search or replace operation Ctrl-B Reformat the current paragraph if word wrap on Alt-B Reformat the current marked block if word wrap on Ctrl-K-G Reformat the entire text buffer. Use with caution! Ctrl-O-C Center the current line Alt-Y Insert color style Insert Ctrl-V Toggle insert mode Ctrl-O-I Toggle auto-indent mode on/off Ctrl-O-W Toggle word wrap on/off Ctrl-O-F Toggle the tab mode between smart tabs and fixed tabs Ctrl-O-T Set number of columns between tab stops (1-10). Ctrl-O-B Set number of spaces to indent/unindent marked blocks Ctrl-Q-L Restore original contents of the current line Shift-Cursor Mark block in all directions F Request files (Alt-F, Ctrl-F) Find all the filenames contained in a message and request these files directly from the network address where the message originated. List all filenames in a message and select the file(s) you want. A message will be created automatically, requesting the marked files from the network address from which the message originated. Since people announce programs in many different ways, sometimes TerMail might not recognize all the filenames. If this happens simply edit the filename manually. G Quote-reply to message (TO-name) (Alt-G) Quote the entire message and start editing your reply. This function sends your reply to the TO-name of the quoted message. H UU-encoding/decoding Convert binary files into a 7-bit ascii format which can be inserted into messages and extracted by the receiver to its original binary form. Please be advised that some networks have restrictions on sending routed uu-encoded files. If the file is important, I would suggest that you crash the file directly to the receiver or the receiver's uplink (a.k.a. "Boss"). I Fidonet kludges (Special keywords in messages) - 225 - INTL Inter-zone, kludge to assure a direction to the correct address FMPT From point. Tells other systems which point wrote the message TOPT To point. Will tell nodes to direct mail to this point number MSGID: Origin address and an unique checksum for your system This is mostly used to ensure that the message came from the right place and will sometimes be used for dupe-checking REPLY: Inserted by editors when replying to msgs with a MSGID kludge PID Editor ID and version number, sometimes registration codes TID Tosser ID and version number, sometimes registration codes VIA A line inserted by some utilities, for information use only AREA Echomail area name: such as TERMINAT or TERMINATE.GER. If the msg has no AREA-kludge, it's a netmail/matrix message SEEN-BY Used to display all the systems that have got this message before you. Shows the systems through which the msg was routed as well as their respective downlinks PATH Used to see exactly where the message is from and the route it travelled to your system. Also used to detect duplicates EID: Echomail dupe checksums, used for tracking down duplicates FLAGS: The status of the message: CRA,IMM,HLD,DIR,CFM,A/S,FRQ etc TZ Timezones; Denmark = GMT+1 CHRS or CHARSET, which charset was used to write the message SPLIT Kludge used by some systems to split up large messages ENC Message is encrypted MOOD Special TerMail kludge to display the mood of the msg writer Origin A line with info/address of the system where the msg came from --- Tearline, a small advertising line for the mail editor J Jump to DOS (Alt-J, Alt-O) Start a DOS-shell to run an external programs. Note: You can't load a TSR in a DOS-shell and return to TerMail - you have to remove the TSR first. K Toggle kludge information (Ctrl-K) Display special mail information in messages. You can disable this by default in the configuration, but generally for more advanced users the kludges can provide some extra information and give you a better view and understanding of the E-Mail kludges. L List area (Alt-L, F9) This option displays a list of all messages of the current area, showing one line per message, so you can select and read messages faster. Press TAB to toggle between a view of selected messages or all messages. M Forward/Copy/Move (Alt-M) Forward a message to other people or to another conferences. You can also copy or move message(s) to another area. N Reply to this message in another area (Alt-N, F5) Use this option for example when you want to reply to an echomail in netmail (private mail). O Change origin for group (Ctrl-O) Temporarily change the origin line for the group to which this area belongs. The default origin lines can be modified in the group settings - 226 - of the configuration file. P Change attributes (Ctrl-S) ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Mail Attributes ÿ ³ C (Cra) Crash ³ Send message directly to receiver ³ S (Snt) Sent ³ Message has been sent from your system ³ A (Att) File attach ³ Subject has a filename attached ³ K (K/s) Kill/sent ³ Message will be deleted after packing ³ L (Loc) Local ³ Message is written locally ³ H (Hld) Hold ³ Message is placed on hold ³ F (Frq) File request ³ Subject contains requested files ³ R (Rrq) Request Receipt ³ Get a confirmation msg from the receiver ³ E (Kfs) Erase file/sent ³ Erase the attached file after sending ³ P (Pvt) Private ³ Message is private ³ V (Rcv) Received ³ You've read this message ³ O (Lck) Locked ³ Message is protected from deletion (JAM) ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Q Quote-reply to message (FROM-name) (R, F4, Alt-R, Alt-Q) Quote the entire message and start editing your reply. This function sends your message to the FROM-name of the quoted message. S Search/Mark menu (Alt-S) ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Search/Mark Menu ÿ ³ Message Range: 3 - 101 ³ ³ Set range to last 500 messages ³ ³ Search only marked No ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Header From/To/Subject ³ ³ Header From ³ ³ Header To ³ ³ Header and text ³ ³ Personal mail ³ ³ Read mail ³ ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ ³ Mark all messages + ³ ³ Unmark all messages - ³ ³ Toggle marks * ³ ³ Mark messages 3-101 ³ ³ Mark messages 101-101 ³ ³ Mark current range ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Message Range Set the range in which messages will be searched or marked. Set range to last 500 messages Quickly set a range of the last 500 messages, can be useful if you have a large save area where you keep all you mail and you only want to search the latest messages. Search only marked To narrow down number of found messages, you can search only those messages that have already been marked. Assuming that you have already - 227 - found all messages containing the key word "Terminate" and now you want to search only these messages for the keyword "point system", this will unmark all tagged messages that do not contain the keyword "point system" and only those messages which contain both "Terminate" and "point system" would stay marked. Header From/To/Subject Check the header for a matching searchstring. Header From Check only the From-name for a matching searchstring. Header To Check only the To-name for a matching searchstring. Header and text Check the entire message for a matching searchstring. Personal mail Only search mail addressed to one of your usernames. Read mail Only search mail that has the received flag. Mark all messages Set the "marked" flag on all messages. Unmark all messages Remove the "marked" flag from all messages in range. Toggle marks Toggles marks on the messages in range. Mark messages first->current Mark all messages starting with the first message in the area and ending with the current message. Mark messages current->last Mark all messages from the current message in the area to last message. Mark current range Mark all the messages in the range currently selected. T Change template for group (Ctrl-T) Temporarily change the template for the group to which this area belongs. The default templates can be modified in the group settings section of the configuration file. - 228 - U Temporarily change user for group (Ctrl-U) Temporarily change the user name for the group to which this area belongs. The default users can be modified in the group settings section of the configuration file. V View nodelists View the raw nodelists defined in the configuration file. W Export message(s) (Alt-W) Export or print a message or all marked messages. You can also launch an external print utility for special print jobs. X Area statistics, message tracking and address finding Gather extensive statistics about the current message area or track down the route taken by a message before you received it. TerMail can check an entire area for any Fidonet, Internet or CompuServe addresses contained therein and save them in an export file. Y Message statistics Display a simple message statistic. Z Zap to next area This will make TerMail go to the following area immediately, without first having to leave the current area manually and then choosing the next one. Alt-A SmartNote If you use The Internet or some other network where you have to remember hundreds of different strings or note down lots of information, then you cannot live any longer without SmartNote! The SmartNote function is better than writing long addresses down on paper because it is always ready for noting down anything needed at a later time. Backups will be made automatically. For example, if you see something on the screen that you wish to note down: 1. Press Alt-K, mark and grab the text with the string grabber - the grabber can be adjusted in size and position with SHIFT and cursor-keys. 2. Now you enter SmartNote by pressing Alt-A and import the grabbed information by pressing Alt-G exactly where you want the text to appear. NB: It does not matter where you see something on the screen as long as you still are inside TerMail or Terminate. The Alt-K string grabber will work everywhere. If, for example, you want to copy something to another note file, just follow the procedure above. If you want to test this powerful feature, enter Terminate, press Alt-O, press Alt-K and grab a part of some menu. Then start up SmartNote with Alt-A and insert the grabbed text with Alt-G. (You can grab information from the Online Manual and insert in a - 229 - note file.) You can adjust the grabbers' size by holding down SHIFT and then resizing the window to be grabbed with the cursor movement keys (Arrow up, down, right or left). Z will Zoom the grabber to maximum size. Once you try this out, you will soon understand how powerful and useful this feature can be! The SmartNote editor offers the following functions: SmartNote commands (Many of these commands are the same as the ones used by the Qedit editor by SEMWARE) Alt-1 Uppercase line Alt-2 Lowercase line Alt-A Select character from ASCII-selector Alt-C Clear screen/erase all lines Alt-E Edit this file with an external editor Alt-F Search after keyword Alt-G Import the last block you grabbed with Alt-K Alt-I Import all history strings at the cursor position Alt-J Jump to DOS Alt-K String grabber Alt-L Load another SmartNote file Alt-U Import a textfile at the cursor position Alt-Z Perform Turbo Search in all note files ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´ Searching for 'YOU' ÿ ³ INTERNET ³ Here you can place any command you like or just want to r ³ ³ INTERNET ³ The following lines are only examples of what you could s ³ ³ SMARTNOT ³ used by default. If you want to use another note file with ³ ³ SMARTNOT ³ it will be used when you are online at that system. ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Turbo Search will allow you to search through all note files very quickly, allow you to choose your match and jump to the position in the notefile where the match was found. If several matches have been found, you will be asked which match to use, as in the above example. Ctrl-Enter Send a line to device, followed by a carriage return (#13) Ctrl-Y Delete current line Ctrl-T Delete word to the right of the cursor position F2 Add a line F4 Duplicate line F6 Delete from the cursor position to the end of line SmartNote cursor-movement commands Home Go to start of line End Go to end of line Ctrl-Home Go to first screen line Ctrl-End Go to last screen line Cursor Up Move one line up Cursor Down Move one line down Cursor Left Move one position left Cursor Right Move one position right Ctrl-Left Move one word to the left Ctrl-Right Move one word to the right PageUp Go 1 page down - 230 - PageDown Go 1 page up Ctrl-PageUp Go to top of file Ctrl-PageDown Go to bottom of file Insert Toggle Insert/Overwrite Delete Delete character under cursor Backspace Delete character before cursor Alt-B BossKey Start BOSSKEY.COM/EXE whenever you want to pretend that you are actually working so you don't have to admit that you are reading private mail during work-hours. Alt-K String grabber Grab strings using the cursor keys. Use SHIFT + the cursor keys to change size of string grabber. Whenever you are in an editing field, you can press cursor-up to recall the grabbed strings. Alt-P View picture of sender If a picture is available of the person who wrote the message, the word "PIC" will appear on the message header and you can press Alt-P to call up a picture viewer. Alt-V View all pictures View all the pictures you have available. Alt-X Exit TerMail Exit TerMail without asking for confirmation. - 231 - Alt-F10 CDROM player What could be more natural than listening to your favorite music while reading/writing your daily mail. The CDROM player can be called up with Alt-F10 from everywhere. This is a record by the world famous Danish heavy metal band "D.A.D.". Play Starts playing the track number entered, followed by the rest of the album. Stop Stop playing (mute). Resume Resume playing the track from where you stopped it. Next Skip the rest of the current track and play the next. Previous Play the previous track. Eject Eject the CD from your CDROM drive. Close tray Close your CDROM drive and start playing. Lock CD door Lock/unlock the CD inside the CDROM, so nobody can "borrow" the CD. MSCDEX Version MSCDEX.EXE is a program supplied by MicroSoft for making standard calls to CDROMs from DOS. MSCDEX stands for MicroSoft CD extension. You need version 2.00 or later for this player to work. The current version of MSCDEX is 2.24. CD in drive Did TerMail detect a CD in the drive? Door locked Is the CDROM door locked? Raw and cooked Does your drive support raw and cooked reading modes? (Uh?) - 232 - Data and Audio Does your CD have both audio and data tracks (mixed mode CD)? HSG and Red book Does your CDROM conform to the High Sierra May 28th standard and the ISO-9660 version of the High Sierra format (Red Book)? Audiomanipulation Does your CDROM support audio channel manipulation? Volume size This is the total playing time of the CD. Track Which track is currently being played. Track start Where the track starts on the CD. Total track time How long the track is. Track time How much of the track has been played. Track time left How much playing time is left of the track. Copyrighted track Is the track copyrighted? Index All music CD's have index marks when starting and stopping a track, TerMail will flash the Index indicator when it passes an index. Marking messages Press SPACE to toggle the "marked" status on a message. + Mark all messages in the current area. - Remove the "marked" status from all messages in this area. * Toggle the "marked" status on all marked messages in the area. Cursor LEFT/RIGHT Next/previous message Go to the next or previous message. Jump to next/previous marked message < > - 233 - When some messages have been marked, you can quickly jump to the messages by pressing the more-than (>) or less-than (<) keys on your keyboard. Reading reply links TerMail uses something called reply links to connect messages which are related. In MSG areas linking by subject is supported. In JAM areas, links are made through the MSGID kludge. Both are handled by an external maintenance utility contained in the TerMail package, called TMUTIL.EXE. Ctrl-Left Cursor Read the previous reply <=120 Ctrl-Right Cursor Read the following reply 150=> Ctrl-Up Cursor Read the first reply (JAM only) ^ The SHIFT + Cursor combination can also be used instead of the Ctrl key. Msg movement Cursor Up Move up through the message text Cursor Down Move down through message text Home Move to the top of a message End Move to the bottom of a message PgDn Move one screen page down in message text PgUp Move one screen page up in message text Enter Move down one page. When TerMail has arrived at the end of a message, RETURN will jump to the next message (this is disabled if you have enabled blind support). Ctrl-Home Go to first message Go to the first message in an area. Ctrl-End Go to last message Go to the last message in an area. 0,1,2..9 Go directly to a specific message Simply type in the message number and press RETURN: TerMail will jump directly to the message you want. Shift-Esc Runtime information Information which is only used for testing purposes. TAB Bookmark Set a bookmark. Press either SHIFT-TAB or the BACKSPACE key to return to the Bookmarked message. Cross-posting Cross-posting is a special way of writing a message once and automatically posting it in several areas without having to copy the message manually. It is very simple to use and only requires you to know the name of the conference where you want to copy the message to. Enter on any line in the message: - 234 - XP: TERMINAT,TERMINATE.GER If the example above were written in the netmail area, your message would be saved in three folders: the Netmail folder, the international TERMINAT conference and in the German Terminate support conference TERMINATE.GER. The following lines would be inserted at the top of the message: * Crossposted in NETMAIL * Crossposted in TERMINAT * Crossposted in TERMINATE.GER If you need to cross-post a mail to more areas, just use several XP: lines. For compatibility reasons the abbreviation XC: will also be accepted. Carbon Copy In your netmail area you can make copies of messages to multiple receivers. For this purpose you can use the cc: or bc: keywords directly in your messages. bc: is for blind copy or "Do not show in letter" otherwise the flags have the same function. Syntax: cc: address or group or searchstring, address or searchstring Each parameter must be seperated by a comma , Examples: Send to the first 3 numbers and search entire nodelists for first match on Bo Bendtsen. cc: 2:254/261, 2:236/2000, 2:236/111, Bo Bendtsen Send to NC236, 2:236/111 and to the points 13 and 17 of 2:236/111 cc: 2:236/0 , 111 , .13 , .17 Send to first match in nodelists on Bo Bendtsen and to 2:236/111 and remove all bc: lines in letter. bc: Bo Bendtsen, 2:236/111 You can have as many cc: or bc: lines in your letters as you like, you should start the cc: line before anything else to make it look as good as possible. If you have a list of people that you always send messages to please look in TM.CC where you can create groups/mailing lists. Group example: cc: 2:236/0, &Customers If you want always to send crash to certain nodes, you can use the 'C' option. cc: 2:236/0, C2:236/111 - 235 - Translation editor Alt-W When you receive messages in other character sets TerMail is able of translating these messages to your system. TerMail will assume that you are using IBMPC charset and translate to and from this set. If a CHRS: kludge in a message is LATIN-1, TerMail will load LATIN-1.850 if your codepage is 850. Whenever you reply to a message with a LATIN-1 kludge your message will automatically be translated back to LATIN-1 after you created the message. You can press Alt-W on a message and change the translation and see the how the characters are translated at once. Semaphore files TMRESCAN.NOW Create this file in the TerMail directory and all areas will be assumed unscanned and the next time you enter an area it will be rescanned. This file will be deleted afterwards. TMFREEZE.NOW On a network you can freeze all TerMail editors, to prevent users to do anything with the databases. When the file is removed, users are again allowed to use TerMail. TMNOTE.NOW Send note to user, that will pop up as a window and make a sound. Errorlevels When TerMail exits the errorlevels will be set as follows: 255 An error occured 3 Netmail and echomail was written 2 Echomail was written 1 Netmail was written 0 No mail was written - 236 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Information for blind people °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ The name of this document is BLIND.DOC. It can be found in the DOCS directory of Terminate. This file contains only information for people who cannot see. Because we got a lot of personal requests from blind people, we decided to create a few extra features which will help you to use Terminate even faster and with far more ease than any other terminal program we know. Most of you use some kind of speech device which only can detect BIOS writes. Terminate will use direct screen writes in menus and BIOS calls in terminal mode. You can also choose to use BIOS calls all the time. If you select Blind Support during installation the following options will be selected: Sound is turned on giving you a sound when popping up or closing a window Key click is turned on giving you a click noise every time you press a key Only menus will use direct screen writes The hardware cursor will be forced on all the time so your helper can see the cursor All sounds are turned on Passwords will not be hidden No automatic passwords will be generated The Blind Transfer window will be used for file transfers The File Manager will default to only one window Some extra sounds have been added In submenus all the background windows will be removed before displaying a new window. With blind support enabled, Terminate will always turn on the hardware cursor so if you have a helper he/she can tell you if the cursor position was wrong and report this error to me, the author of Terminate. This function also allows you to press CONTROL ENTER and then move the cursor. This will move the cursor position to the first position in the helpline at the bottom of the screen, allowing you faster speech access. If no help is found in a menu, when the menuline selector is used, then a beep will be played: a high tone followed by a low tone. To make things easier when transferring files, instead of the normal full screen file transfer menu yours have been cut down to the actual information needed. A sample picture is shown below. This window starts at the position 1,1 (upper left corner) and the cursor is placed just before the bytes transferred. The menu looks like the following lines: ÕÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ͵ Blind transfer Ƹ ³ Filename DANBBS.ARJ ³ ³ Filesize 2153297 ³ ³ 75% 8192 ³ ³ CPS/Errors 3340 ³ ³ H Hangup No S Skip file ³ - 237 - ÔÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ; Menu finished. Line 1: The name of the file. Line 2: The size of the file. Line 3: How many percent and how many bytes have been transfered. Line 4: Characters per second, speed of transfer and error count if any. Line 5: H to hang up after transfer. S to skip the rest of file. The message reader for Terminate is called TerMail. When starting up this editor you could use the parameter /BLIND to enable special sounds and features. If you call up TerMail from Terminate Alt-F7,L then this parameter will automatically be added if you have enabled blind support in the Terminate toggles menu. TerMail has a lot of sounds, as you will quickly learn. Also, when reading messages, you can press Ctrl-Enter to change the cursor location in the following order: To, Msg, From, Subject. Just try it and you will quickly get used to it. In the Terminate file manager you can press Q for Quiet, which will disable the entire left side and make it easier to view the files. List of available hot-keys in Terminate: change configuration (alt-o) S = Screen and colors C = Communications setup G = General options T = Toggles M = Modem and dialing F = Filenames and paths P = Protocol options E = Emulation/keyboard setup H = Host settings L = Login strings/scripts U = Users/iemsi/security N = Point system A = Cost management R = Registration info X = Fax configuration Phonebook (alt-d) Ins = Insert entry Del = Delete entry A = Add entry E = Edit/view D = Dial numbers M = Manual dial F = Find S = Sort entries I = Import P = Change phonebooks O = Other functions G = Global change V = Save now L = Voice call C = Copy or move entries T = Edit capture file - 238 - N = Edit note file W = Show warn days Tagging = space, plus (+), minus (-), stat (*) phonebook edit (alt-d,e) S = System name P = Phonenumber D = Device U = User profile W = Password O = Opening hours T = Terminal X = Dial prefix F = Dial suffix C = Com information A = Autologin L = Downloadpath N = Notefile Pointsystem (Alt-F7) C = Call boss M = Call system S = Send files R = File request K = Kill mail T = Auto requests Z = Zoom mail E = Mail address N = Send messager H = Change mail L = Mail editor I = Import X = Export O = Configuration TerMail (Alt-F7, L) Alt-F = Areafix DEl = Delete Alt-E = Edit Esc = Exit Enter = Area These features were made possible thanks to the input and help from many blind persons. In the future, we will have a blind contact person who will help us to support even more of these features. If you have any special needs, please send a letter to the following person and he will help us enabling what you want or need. He is also the person you should thank for giving us the initial many suggestions for improving Terminate. H.C. Andersen Fregatten 14 5330 Munkebo Denmark Internet hca@login.dknet.dk Please do not use handwriting. Send your letters on disk or in printed from a printer, so you can be sure I can read your information. - 239 - / Hans Christian Andersen Special thank you's for helping with the blind test go to: H.C. Andersen Bue Vester-Andersen Raul Gallegos Martin Kirchner Marco Zehe and all the other people that have helped us improve the blind features. / Bo Bendtsen - 240 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES WHEN YOU UPGRADE TO THE PROFESSIONAL VERSION * Terminate/TerMail are a user-supported programmes that has been developed constantly through many years with ideas and help from many people all over the world. You can help support future development of this program by registering your copy of Terminate today. * You are allowed to use the shareware version for more than 21 days. After this period you MUST register if you continue to use Terminate. * Reminder goes away The annoying 'Please consider upgrading' picture will not be displayed after a random period ever again. * All FAX functions are fully working. * Auto Request, which allows you to specify 10 phonenumbers to try requesting files from. When the files are selected in the Tagmenu, the Raid system will call up the numbers in sequence and try requesting the files. It will keep on requesting until you have all the files demanded or you escape. * Manual mail in the Point system, which allows you to send or request files with non-predefined systems. You can then call manually or a number from the phonebook and, when the connection is made and we know which NODE we have on the other end, the MANUMAIL.* will be renamed to the correct filename like 236/111 (DAN BBS) and MANUMAIL.REQ will be renamed to 00EC006F.REQ (00EC=236 006F=111), before the file is sent - otherwise the other system will not accept a filerequest, if it gets the wrong filename. * You will be able to define your System Name in the Point System. * The VISIBLE FAST (tm) access menu, when pressing Alt-V or mouse click in the lower right corner. * The SmartNote will have very fast and good searching on Alt-F and Alt-Z. * Ask device at startup Some people use several devices. It could be different modems or ISDN- lines. When this function is turned on, Terminate will ask you which device you want at startup. * You can put security passwords on configuration, phonebook changes, point system, screen blanker and file manager. * Password on phonebooks, to ensure privacy. * Create secondary encrypted logfiles. Mostly for network administrators. * Network lock. Lock TERMINAT.EXE to a network path, so it cannot be moved. Also lock the EXE-file to a certain keyfile which can be placed anywhere. * Prevent anyone from shelling to DOS or an external program * Phonebook report - 241 - You will be able to generate a report containing time used, KB transferred, how much money you have used every month for the last 12 months etc. and a printout of the phonebook, which tells how much each entry has cost you. * Turn off the opening/closing screens, for faster startup/closedown. * Capture keystrokes to record all pressed keys in terminal mode. * Doorway remote printing can be saved in a file instead of printer. * VT-220 host printing can be saved in a file instead of printer. * Supervisor status will work remotely in hostmode. * Files on hold will work remotely in hostmode. * Being able of removing Alt-O scroll screen. * All other features that pop up the window saying "Please upgrade". EXTRA TERMAIL FEATURES WHEN UPGRADING TO TERMINATE PROFESSIONAL * You are allowed to use the shareware version for more than 21 days. After this period you MUST register if you continue to use TerMail. * Signature manager allows you to define 20 large signatures (F5 in editor). * Inserts /Pro in PID and serial number, instead of UnReg * Inserts /Pro in the tearline. * You can add to the tearline using the AddToTearline function * Protect message areas with password * Locking of individual messages to avoid deleting, which will eventually moved important messages to the beginning of the conference (rules etc.) * The SmartNote will have very fast and good searching on Alt-F and Alt-Z. * Import from nodelists to addressbook * Export from addressbook * Find/export all Fidonet, Internet and CompuServe address in all messages * Enable the Alt-P function for generating PID-kludge reports * Turn off closing screen - 242 - ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ °°°° Licence agreement °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ Notice of COPYRIGHT and EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY Under local laws and according to the relevant international conventions, ALL versions of Terminate are copyright 1992,96 of Strathrory Systems Ltd. Worldwide distributor SerWiz Comm All Rights Reserved. IN NO EVENT WILL STRATHRORY SYSTEMS LIMITED, SERWIZ COMM OR THEIR ASSOCIATES BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ADDITIONAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE TERMINATE OR UTILITIES FOR TERMINATE, EVEN IF WE HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Succinctly: By using this program, you agree not to hold Strathrory Systems Limited, SerWiz Comm or associates responsible for anything other than taking up a lot of disk space. SHAREWARE LICENCE SerWiz Comm hereby grants to all a licence terminable at 7 days notice to distribute copies of the Shareware evaluation version of Terminate subject to the following limitations: ALL the files must be distributed. The individual files must also be complete and unmodified and without the addition of other files. Terminate may NEVER be sold or distributed for profit or anticipated profit without the written permission of the worldwide distributor. Terminate may not be `bundled' with hardware without a written permission from the worldwide distributor. Cost-effective licences for Terminate LITE are available for modem manufacturers and distributors: Email: sales@terminate.com Succinctly: no one other than SerWiz Comm and the authorised national Registration Sites may charge money for Terminate. Neither a personalised Key File, Terminate Lite, Terminate Professional, Terminate-f-W, Terminate NT or Terminate OS/2 may be copied (other than for backup purposes) or distributed. OFFER OF LICENCE - 243 - SerWiz Comm and associates hereby offers you, the reader of this offer, a licence to use Terminate for 21 days for evaluation purposes only in return for your agreement to directly or indirectly report to SerWiz Comm any bugs found or suggestions for improvements. If you decline this offer, please do not use Terminate. * -=> P R I Z E D R A W R E G I S T R A T I O N <=- We think Terminate is the final terminal. To encourage you to share copies of this evaluation version of Terminate with others we now have a little incentive for you: Every month beginning 1 January 1994, the Electronic Regsite will send out free keyfiles to some lucky Terminate users! But who is eligible? When people register at the Electronic Regsite we now have the ability to detect the two people who previously copied the distribution files to the person upgrading to Terminate PROFESSIONAL. It is these two previous users (our `distribution team') that qualify for the free keyfiles! Winners are announced in Terminate Tech Support conferences To join the list of eligible prizewinners, just spread Terminate around - the distribution files they need are in the \GIVEAWAY directory..... You MUST have used your real name upon installation since the prize will be sent to that address - so please make be sure that you filled in the information correctly when you installed Terminate! If you later decide to register and pay for Terminate, this information will be used to generate your personalised Key File. (You can't register Terminate under an alias such as Donald Duck). To register for an organisation also give the name of the person using the program. eg: Users Name (title and firm if applicable): Sir Oliver Smith / The Hunting Society